Hyundai 2019 Ioniq Plug-in Hybrid User Manual

HEV (hybrid electric vehicle) system...................H2

Hybrid Vehicle......................................................................H2

Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle.......................................................H3

Charging the plug-in hybrid vehicle.....................H4

Charging Information .........................................................H4

Charging Time .....................................................................H4

Charging Types ...................................................................H4

Charging Status ...................................................................H5

Scheduled Charging............................................................H6

Charging Connector AUTO/ LOCK Mode ......................H7

Charging Precautions.........................................................H8

Normal Charge...................................................................H10

Trickle Charge....................................................................H16

Driving the hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle.........H28

Starting the Vehicle..........................................................H28

Special Features ..............................................................H29

Hybrid System Gauge ......................................................H31

Plug-in Hybrid Mode(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)...........H32

Aux. Battery Saver+ (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)...........H33

Warning and Indicator Lights ........................................H35

LCD Display Messages.....................................................H36

Energy Flow ......................................................................H45

Safety precautions for hybrid system ...............H49

Hybrid Vehicle Components Safety Precautions ......H49

Service Plug .......................................................................H52

Hybrid Battery Cooling Duct..........................................H53

If an Accident Occurs......................................................H54

When the Hybrid Vehicle Shuts Off ............................H55

HHyybbrriidd ssyysstteemm oovveerrvviieeww

HHEEVV ((HHYYBBRRIIDD EELLEECCTTRRIICC VVEEHHIICCLLEE)) SSYYSSTTEEMM

Hybrid Vehicle

The HYUNDAI Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) uses both the petrol engine and the electric motor for power. The electric

motor is run by a 270V high-voltage HEV battery.

Depending on the driving conditions, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor

or even both at the same time.

Fuel efficiency increases when the engine is at idle, or when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor with the HEV bat-

tery.

The HEV battery charge must be maintained, so at times the engine will come on even at idle to act as a generator.

Charging also occurs when decelerating or by regenerative braking.

OAE056066

Startup/Low speed cruise

Electric motor

Acceleration

Electric motor + Engine

High speed cruise

Engine

Deceleration

Charging

Stop

Engine OFF

Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle

The HYUNDAI Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) shares the characteristics of both a conventional hybrid elec-

tric vehicle and an all-electric vehicle.

When used as a conventional hybrid electric vehicle, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and

the electric motor or even both at the same time.

When it is operating in the electric vehicle mode, the vehicle is driven only using the electric motor over a certain dis-

tance until the hybrid battery becomes low. The driving distance in EV mode depends on customer driving style and

road conditions.Aggressive driving manoeuvres may at times temporarily enable the engine to operate for maximum

power.

The hybrid battery can be fully charged by connecting a plug to an external electric power source.

OAEPH057200L

Electric Vehicle Mode

Startup/Low speed

Acceleration High speed Deceleration External charging

Electric motor

CD (Charge Depleting) Mode

CS (Charge Sustaining) Mode

Charging

Motor Engine+Motor Engine+Motor

Charging

Battery charging

Charging Information

• Normal Charge :

The plug-in hybrid vehicle is

charged by plugging into a normal

charger installed in your home or a

public charging station.(For further

details, refer to the 'Normal

Charge'.)

• Trickle Charge :

The plug-in hybrid vehicle can be

charged by using household elec-

tricity. The electrical outlet in your

home must comply with regulations

and can safely accommodate the

Voltage / Current (Amps) / Power

(Watts) ratings specified on the

portable charge.

Charging Time

• Normal Charge :

Takes approximately 2 hours 15

minutes at room temperature. (Can

be charged to 100%.)

Information

Depending on the condition and dura-

bility of the high voltage battery, charg-

er specifications, and ambient tempera-

ture, the time required for charging the

high voltage battery may vary.

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

Charging Types

Category Charging Inlet (Vehicle) Charging Connector Charging Outlet How to Charge Charging Time

Normal

Charge

Use normal

charger installed

in homes or public

charging station

Approx. 2 hours

15 minutes (to fully

charge, 100%)

Trickle

Charge

Use household

current

For charging at

home. Please note

that the Trickle charg-

er is slower than the

Normal charger.

• Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient

temperature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.

• Actual charger image and charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturer.

OLFP0Q5006K

OAEEQ016020

OAEEQ016024

OLFP0Q5007K

OLFP0Q5006K

Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat-

tery, the charge level can be checked

from outside the vehicle.

OAEEQ016025

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp

Details

(1) (2) (3)

 (OFF)  (OFF)  (OFF)

Not Charged

Blink

 (OFF)  (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

 (ON)

Blink

 (OFF)

34~66%

 (ON)  (ON)

Blink 67~99%

 (ON)  (ON)  (ON)

Fully charged (100%)(turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error whilst charging

 (OFF)  (OFF)

Blink

Charging the 12 V auxiliary battery

(Aux. Battery Saver+)

 (OFF)

Blink

 (OFF)

Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

Scheduled Charging

(if equipped)

• You can set-up a charging sched-

ule for your vehicle using the AVN

or BlueLink application.

Refer to the Multimedia manual or

the BlueLink manual for detailed

information about setting sched-

uled charging.

• Scheduled charging can only be

done when using a normal charger

or the portable charger (ICCB: In-

Cable Control Box).

• When scheduled charging is set

and the normal charger or the

portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable

Control Box) is connected for

charging, the indicator lamp in the

middle blinks (for 3 minutes) to

indicate that scheduled charging is

set.

• When scheduled charging is set,

charging is not initiated immediate-

ly when the normal charger or

portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable

Control Box) is connected. When

immediate charging is required,

use the AVN to deactivate the

scheduled charge setting or press

scheduled charging deactivation

( ) button.

• If you press the scheduled charg-

ing deactivation ( ) button to

immediately charge the battery,

charging must be initiated 3 min-

utes after the charging cable has

been connected.

When you press the scheduled

charging deactivation ( ) button

for immediate charging, the sched-

uled charge setting is not com-

pletely deactivated. If you need to

completely deactivate the sched-

uled charge setting, use the AVN

to finalize the deactivation.

Refer to "Normal Charge or Trickle

Charge" for details about connecting

the normal charger and the portable

charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OAEEQ016026 OAEEQ016027R

Charging Connector AUTO/

LOCK Mode

You may select when the charging

connector can be locked and

unlocked in the charging inlet.

Press the button to change

between AUTO mode and LOCK

mode.

When the Charging Connector

Is Locked

• LOCK mode (button indicator off) :

The connector locks when the

charging connector is plugged into

the charging inlet.The connector is

locked until all doors are unlocked

by the driver. This mode can be

used to prevent charging cable

theft.

- If the charging connector is

unlocked when all doors are

unlocked, but the charging cable

is not disconnected within 10 sec-

onds, the connector will be auto-

matically locked again.

- If the charging connector is

unlocked when all doors are

unlocked, but all doors are locked

again, immediately, the connector

will be automatically locked again.

• AUTO mode (button indicator on) :

The connector locks when charg-

ing starts. The connector unlocks

when charging is complete. This

mode can be used when charging

in a public charging station.

OAEEQ016059R

LOCK AUTO

Before charging O X

Whilst charging O O

Finished charging O X

Charging Precautions

Actual charger image and charg-

ing method may vary in accor-

dance with the charger manufac-

turer.

• Electromagnetic waves that

are generated from the charg-

er can seriously impact med-

ical electric devices such as

an implantable cardiac pace-

maker.

When using medical electric

devices such as an implantable

cardiac pacemaker, make sure

to ask the medical team and

manufacturer whether charg-

ing your electric vehicle will

impact the operation of the

medical electric devices such

as an implantable cardiac

pacemaker.

• Check to make sure there is

no water or dust on the charg-

ing cable connector and plug

before connecting to the

charger and charging inlet.

Connecting whilst there is

water or dust on the charging

cable connector and plug may

cause a fire or electric shock.

WARNING

• Be careful not to touch the

charging connector, charging

plug, and the charging inlet

when connecting the cable to

the charger and the charging

inlet on the vehicle.

• Comply with the following in

order to prevent electrical

shock when charging:

- Use a waterproof charger.

- Be careful when touching

the charging connector and

charging plug with your

hands wet, or when standing

in water or snow whilst con-

necting the charging cable.

- Be careful when there is

lightning.

- Be careful when the charg-

ing connector and plug is

wet.

WARNING

OLFP0Q5007K

■ Normal Charger

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

• Immediately stop charging

when you find abnormal

symptoms (odor, smoke).

• Replace the charging cable if

the cable coating is damaged

to prevent electrical shock.

• When connecting or removing

the charging cable, make sure

to hold the charging connec-

tor handle and charging plug.

If you pull the cable itself

(without using the handle),the

internal wires may disconnect

or get damaged.This may lead

to electric shock or fire.

WARNING

• Always keep the charging con-

nector and charging plug in

clean and dry condition. Be

sure to keep the charging

cable in a condition where

there is no water or moisture.

• Make sure to use the designat-

ed charger for charging the

electric vehicle. Using any

other charger may cause fail-

ure.

• Before charging the battery,

turn the vehicle OFF.

• When the vehicle is switched

OFF whilst charging, the cool-

ing fan inside the motor com-

partment may automatically

operate. Do not touch the cool-

ing fan whilst charging.

• Be careful not to drop the

charging connector. The

charging connector can be

damaged.

CAUTION

H10

Normal Charge

Actual charger image and charg-

ing method may vary in accor-

dance with the charger manufac-

turer.

How to Connect Normal

Charger

1.Depress the brake pedal and apply

the parking brake.

2.Turn OFF all switches, shift to P

(Park), and turn OFF the vehicle.

3.Press centre edge of the charging

door to open the charging door.

Information

The charging door opens only when

the door is unlocked.

4. Check if there is dust on the

charging connector and charging

inlet.

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OLFP0Q5007K

■ Normal Charger

OAEEQ016030

H11

5. Hold the charging connector han-

dle and connect it to the vehicle

normal charging inlet. Push the

connector until you hear a "click-

ing" sound. If the charging con-

nector and charging terminal are

not connected properly, this may

cause a fire.

Information

Charging connector AUTO/LOCK

mode

The charging connector is locked in

the inlet at a different period accord-

ing to which mode is selected.

• LOCK mode : The connector locks

when the charging connector is

plugged into the charging inlet.

• AUTO mode : The connector locks

when charging starts.

For more details, refer to “Charging

Connector AUTO/ LOCK Mode” in

this chapter.

6. Connect the charging plug to the

electric outlet at a normal charging

station to start charging.

OLFP0Q5007K

■ Normal Charger

OAEEQ016031

H12

7. Check if the charging indicator

light of the high voltage battery on

the instrument cluster is turned

ON. Charging is not done when

the charging indicator lamp is

OFF.

When the charging connector and

charging plug are not connected

properly, reconnect the charging

cable to charge.

Information

• Even though charging is possible

with the ignition switch in the

ON/START position, for your safe-

ty, start charging when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK/OFF position

and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).

After charging has started, you can

use electrical components such as

the radio by placing the ignition

switch in the ACC or ON position.

• During normal charging, the radio

reception may be bad.

• Moving the shift lever from P (Park)

to R (Reverse)/N(Neutral)/D (Drive)

stops the charging process.

To restart the charging process,

move the shift lever to P (Park),

place the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, and discon-

nect the charging cable. Then, con-

nect the charging cable.

8.After charging has started, the esti-

mated charging time is displayed on

the instrument cluster for about 1

minute.

If you open the driver seat door

whilst charging, the estimated charg-

ing time is also displayed on the

instrument cluster for about 1

minute.

When scheduled charging is set, the

estimated charging time is displayed

as “--" .

Information

Depending on the condition and dura-

bility of the high voltage battery,

charger specifications, and ambient

temperature, the time required for

charging the battery may vary.

OAEEQ016032 OAEPH047193L

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H13

Checking Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat-

tery, the charge level can be checked

from outside the vehicle.

OAEEQ016025

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp

Details

(1) (2) (3)

 (OFF)  (OFF)  (OFF)

Not Charged

Blink

 (OFF)  (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

 (ON)

Blink

 (OFF)

34~66%

 (ON)  (ON)

Blink 67~99%

 (ON)  (ON)  (ON)

Fully charged (100%)(turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error whilst charging

 (OFF)  (OFF)

Blink

Charging the 12 V auxiliary battery

(Aux. Battery Saver+)

 (OFF)

Blink

 (OFF)

Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

H14

How to Disconnect Normal

Charger

1.When charging is complete, remove

the charging plug from the electrical

outlet of the normal charging station.

2.Hold the charging connector han-

dle and pull it whilst pressing the

release button (1).

Information

To prevent charging cable theft, the

charging connector cannot be discon-

nected from the inlet when the doors

are locked. Unlock all doors to discon-

nect the charging connector from the

inlet.

However, if the vehicle is in the charg-

ing connector AUTO mode, the charg-

ing connector automatically unlocks

from the inlet when charging is com-

pleted.

For more details, refer to “Charging

Connector AUTO/ LOCK Mode” in

this chapter.

OAEEQ016033

OLFP0Q5007K

■ Normal Charger

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H15

3. Make sure to completely close the

charging door.

Unlock Charging Connector in

Emergency

If the charging connector does not

disconnect due to battery discharge

and failure of the electric wires, open

the bonnet and slightly pull the emer-

gency cable.The charging connector

will then disconnect.

OAEPHQ016060

OAEEQ016034

H16

Trickle Charge

(1) Code and Plug (Code set)

(2) Control Box

(3) Charging Cable and Charging

Connector

Trickle Charge can be used when

Normal Charge is not available by

using household electricity.

How to set the charge level of

the portable charger

1. Check the rated current of the

electric outlet prior to connecting

the plug to the outlet.

2. Connect the plug to a household

electric outlet.

3. Check the display window on the

control box.

4. Press the button (1) on the back of

the control box for more than 1

second to adjust the charge level.

(Refer to charging cable type and

example for setting the charge

level.)

OAEEQ016042N

■ Portable Charger

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OAEEQ018083

OLFP0Q5020K

Plug

Electric Outlet

H17

5.The display window on the control

box changes from H and M to L

every time you press the button

(1).

6.When setting the charge level is

complete, start charging accord-

ing to the trickle charge procedure.

* Example for setting the ICCB charge level

(The example is only for reference and may vary according to the surround-

ing environment.)

Outlet current

ICCB charge

level

Control box display window

14-16A 12A

13-12A 10A

11-10A 8A

9-8A 6A

H18

How to Connect Portable

Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control

Box)

1. Connect the plug to a household

electric outlet.

2. Check if the power lamp (green)

illuminates on the control box.

3. Depress the brake pedal and

apply the parking brake.

4. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P

(Park), and turn OFF the vehicle.

OLFP0Q5020K

Plug

Electric Outlet

OAEEQ016043

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H19

5. Press centre edge of the charging

door to open the charging door.

Information

The charging door opens only when

the door is unlocked.

6.Check if there is dust on the charg-

ing connector and charging inlet.

7. Hold the charging connector han-

dle and connect it to the vehicle

normal charging inlet. Push the

connector until you hear a "click-

ing" sound.If the charging connec-

tor and charging terminal are not

connected properly, this may

cause a fire.

Information

Charging connector AUTO/LOCK

mode

The charging connector is locked in

the inlet at a different period accord-

ing to which mode is selected.

• LOCK mode : The connector locks

when the charging connector is

plugged into the charging inlet.

• AUTO mode : The connector locks

when charging starts.

For more details, refer to “Charging

Connector AUTO/ LOCK Mode” in

this chapter.

OAEEQ016030

OAEEQ016031

H20

8.Charging starts automatically

(charging lamp blinks).

9. Check if the charging indicator

light of the high voltage battery on

the instrument cluster is turned

ON. Charging is not done when

the charging indicator lamp is

OFF.

When the charging connector is

not connected properly, reconnect

the charging cable to charge it

again.

Information

• Even though charging is possible

with the ignition switch in the

ON/START position, for your safe-

ty, start charging when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK/OFF position

and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).

After charging has started, you can

use electrical components such as

the radio by placing the ignition

switch in ACC or ON position.

• Moving the shift lever from P (Park)

to R (Reverse)/N(Neutral)/D (Drive)

stops the charging process.

To restart the charging process,

move the shift lever to P (Park),

place the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, and discon-

nect the charging cable. Then, con-

nect the charging cable.

OAEEQ016045 OAEEQ016032

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H21

10. After charging has started, the

estimated charging time is dis-

played on the instrument cluster

for about 1 minute.

If you open the driver seat door

whilst charging, the estimated

charging time is also displayed on

the instrument cluster for about 1

minute.

When scheduled charging is set,

the estimated charging time is

displayed as “--" .

Information

Depending on the condition and dura-

bility of the high voltage battery,

charger specifications, and ambient

temperature, the time required for

charging the battery may vary.

Checking Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat-

tery, the charge level can be checked

from outside the vehicle.

OAEPH047193L

OAEEQ016025

H22

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp

Details

(1) (2) (3)

 (OFF)  (OFF)  (OFF)

Not Charged

Blink

 (OFF)  (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

 (ON)

Blink

 (OFF)

34~66%

 (ON)  (ON)

Blink 67~99%

 (ON)  (ON)  (ON)

Fully charged (100%)(turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error whilst charging

 (OFF)  (OFF)

Blink

Charging the 12 V auxiliary battery

(Aux. Battery Saver+)

 (OFF)

Blink

 (OFF)

Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H23

Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

Control Box Indicator Details

PLUG

On : Power on

Blink : Plug temperature sensor failure

On : Plug high temperature protection

Blink : Plug high temperature warning

POWER On : Power on

CHARGE

Blink : Charging In power saving mode, only the CHARGE

indicator is illuminated.

FAULT Blink : Charging interrupted

CHARGE LEVEL

Type A Type B Type C

The charging current

changes (3 level)

whenever the button

(1) is pressed for 1

sec with the charger

plugged into an

electrical outlet but

not the vehicle.

12 A 10 A 8 A

10 A 8 A 7 A

8 A 6 A 6 A

VEHICLE

Charging connector plugged

Charging

Blink : Charging impossible

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

❈ Back of the control box

H24

Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure

• Charging connector plugged into vehicle

(Green ON)

• Plug temperature sensor failure

(Green blink)

• Plug high temperature protection

(Red blink)

• Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)

We recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- Charging connector plugged into

vehicle (Green ON)

- Whilst charging

• Charge indicator (Green blink)

• Vehicle indicator (Blue ON)

- Before plugging charging connector

into vehicle (Red blink)

• Abnormal temperature

• ICCB (In-Cable Control Box) failure

We recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H25

How to Disconnect Portable

NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure

- Plugged into vehicle (Red blink)

• Diagnostic device failure

• Current leakage

• Abnormal temperature

We recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- After plugging charging connector

into vehicle (Red blink)

• Communication failure

We recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Plug temperature sensor failure

(Green blink)

• Plug high temperature protection

(Red blink)

• Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)

We recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- Power saving mode

• 3 minutes after charging starts

(Green blink)

Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

H26

Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control

Box)

1. Hold the charging connector han-

dle and pull it whilst pressing the

release button (1).

Information

To prevent charging cable theft, the

charging connector cannot be discon-

nected from the inlet when the doors are

locked. Unlock all doors to disconnect

the charging connector from the inlet.

However, if the vehicle is in the charging

connector AUTO mode, the charging

connector automatically unlocks from

the inlet when charging is completed.

For more details, refer to “Charging

Connector AUTO/ LOCK Mode” in

this chapter.

2. Make sure to completely close the

charging door.

3. Disconnect the plug from the

household electric outlet. Do not

pull the cable when disconnecting

the plug.

4. Close the protective cover for the

charging connector so that foreign

material cannot get into the termi-

nal.

5. Put the charging cable inside the

cable compartment to protect it.

OAEEQ016033

OAEEQ016034

OAEEQ016061

Plug

Electric Outlet

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H27

Unlock Charging Connector in

Emergency

If the charging connector does not

disconnect due to battery discharge

and failure of the electric wires, open

the bonnet and slightly pull the emer-

gency cable.The charging connector

will then disconnect .

Precautions for Portable

Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control

Box)

• Use the portable charger that is

certified by HYUNDAI Motors.

• Do not try to repair, disassemble,

or adjust the portable charger.

• Do not use an extension cord or

adapter.

• Stop using immediately when fail-

ure occurs.

• Do not touch the plug and charging

connector with wet hands.

• Do not touch the terminal part of

the normal charging connector and

the normal charging inlet on the

vehicle.

• Do not connect the charging con-

nector to voltage that does not

comply with regulations.

• Do not use the portable charger if it

is worn out, exposed, or there

exists any type of damage on the

portable charger.

• If the ICCB case and normal charg-

ing connector is damaged, cracked,

or the wires are exposed in any way,

do not use the portable charger.

• Do not let children operate or touch

the portable charger.

• Keep the control box free of water.

• Keep the normal charging connec-

tor or plug terminal free of foreign

substances.

• Do not step on the cable or cord.

Do not pull the cable or cord and

do not twist or bend it.

• Do not charge when there is light-

ning.

• Do not drop the control box or

place a heavy object on the control

box.

• Do not place an object that can

generate high temperatures near

the charger when charging.

• Charging with the worn out or dam-

aged household electric outlet can

result in a risk of electric shock. If

you are in doubt to the household

electric outlet condition, have it

checked by a licensed electrician.

• Stop using the portable charger

immediately if the household elec-

tric outlet or any components is

overheated or you notice burnt

odors.

OAEPHQ016060

H28

Starting the Vehicle

Vehicles with remote key system

1.Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2.Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

3.Depress the brake pedal.

4.Turn the ignition swich to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 senconds) until

the " " comes on and release it.

Whether the engine is cold or

warm, it should be started without

depressing the accelerator.

After following the start proce-

dures, “ ” indicator on the

instrument cluster will turn on.

For more information, please check

Chapter 5.

Vehicles with smart key system

1.Carry the smart key or leave it

inside the vehicle.

2.Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied.

3.Place the shift lever in P (Park).

With the shift lever in N (Neutral),

you cannot start the vehicle.

4.Depress the brake pedal.

5.Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton. If the hybrid system starts, the

" " indicator will come on.

Whether the engine is cold or

warm, it should be started without

depressing the accelerator.

After following the start proce-

dures, “ ” indicator on the

instrument cluster will turn on.

For more information, please check

Chapter 5.

ECONOMICAL and SAFE OPERA-

TION of Hybrid system

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a

moderate rate and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Do not

make "jack-rabbit" starts. Do not

race between stoplights.

Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-

sible. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from other vehicles so you

can avoid unnecessary braking.

This also reduces brake wear out.

• The regenerative brake generates

energy when the vehicle deceler-

ates.

• When the hybrid battery power is

low, the hybrid system automatical-

ly recharges the hybrid battery.

• When the engine run with the shift

lever in N (Neutral), the hybrid sys-

tem cannot generate electricity.The

hybrid battery cannot recharge with

the shift lever in N (Neutral).

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

H29

Information

In the hybrid system, the engine auto-

matically runs and stops. When the

hybrid system operates, the " "

indicator is illuminated.

In the following situation, the engine

may operate automatically.

- When the engine is ready to run

- When the hybrid battery is being

charged

- Depending on the temperature con-

dition of the hybrid battery

Special Features

Hybrid vehicles sound different than

petrol engine vehicles. When the

hybrid system operates, you may

hear a sound from the hybrid battery

system behind the rear seat. If you

apply the accelerator pedal rapidly,

you may hear an unconventional

sound. When you apply the brake

pedal, you may hear a sound from

the regenerative brake system.

When the hybrid system is turned off

or on, you may hear a sound in the

engine compartment. If you depress

the brake pedal repeatedly when the

hybrid system is turned on, you may

hear a sound in the engine compart-

ment. None of these sounds indicate

a problem.These are normal charac-

teristics of hybrid vehicles.

If any of following occur, it's a normal

condition if you hear a motor sound

in the engine compartment:

- After turning off the hybrid system,

the brake pedal is released.

- When the hybrid system is turned

off, the brake pedal is applied.

- When the driver door is opened.

When the hybrid system is turned

ON, the engine may run or may not.

In this situation, you may feel a vibra-

tion. This does not indicate a mal-

function. When the “ ” indicator

illuminates, the hybrid system is ready

to start. Even if the engine is off, you

can operate the vehicle as long as the

“ ” indicator is illuminated.

The hybrid system contains many

electronic components. High volt-

age components, such as cables

and other parts, may emit electro-

magnetic waves. Even when the

electromagnetic cover blocks elec-

tromagnetic emissions, electro-

magnetic waves may have an effect

on electronic devices. When your

vehicle is not for a long period of

time, the hybrid system will dis-

charge.You need to drive the vehi-

cle several times a month. We rec-

ommend driving at least for 1 hour

or 16 km.When the hybrid battery is

discharged, or when it is impossi-

ble to jump start the vehicle, con-

tact your HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

NOTICE

H30

Virtual Engine Sound System

(VESS)

The Virtual Engine Sound System

generates engine sound for pedestri-

ans to hear vehicle sound because

there is limited sound whilst motor

power is used.

• The VESS may be turned ON or

OFF by pressing the VESS button.

(if equipped)

• If the vehicle is moving at low

speed, the VESS will operate.

• When the gear is shifted to R

(Reverse), an additional warning

sound will be heard.

What Does Regenerative

Braking Do?

It uses an electric motor when decel-

erating and when braking and trans-

forms kinetic energy to electrical

energy in order to charge the high

voltage battery.

Battery

• Hybrid

- The vehicle is composed of a

high voltage battery that drives

the motor and air conditioner, and

an integrated 12V lithium ion

polymer battery with the HEV

battery that drives the lamps,

wipers, and audio system.

- The integrated 12V battery is auto-

matically charged when the vehicle

is in the ready ( ) mode.

• Plug-in hybrid vehicle

- The vehicle is composed of a

highvoltage battery that drives

the motor and air-conditioner,

and an auxiliary battery (12 V)

that drives the lamps, wipers, and

audio system.

- The auxiliary battery is automati-

cally charged when the vehicle is

in the ready ( ) mode.

• When you start the hybrid

system with the shift lever in

P (Parking), the “ ” indica-

tor illuminates on the instru-

ment cluster. The driver can

drive the vehicle, even when

the engine is stopped.

• When you leave the vehicle,

you should turn OFF the

hybrid system or locate the

shift lever in P (Park). When

you depress the accelerator

pedal by mistake, or when the

shift lever is not in P (Park),

the vehicle will abruptly move,

possibly resulting in serious

injury or death.

WARNING

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OAEPH047540R

H31

Hybrid System Gauge

The hybrid system gauge indicates

whether the current driving condition

is fuel efficient or not.

• CHARGE :

Shows that the energy made by

the vehicle is being converted

to electrical energy. (Regenerated

energy)

• ECO :

Shows that the vehicle is being

driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

• POWER :

Shows that the vehicle is exceeding

the Eco-friendly range.

According to the hybrid system

gauge area, the "EV" indicator comes

on or off.

- "EV" indicator ON :Vehicle is driven

using the electric motor or the

petrol engine is stopped.

- "EV" indicator OFF : Vehicle is driv-

en using the petrol engine.

Hybrid Battery SOC

(State of Charge) Gauge

This gauge indicates the remaining

hybrid battery power. If the SOC is

near the "0" level, the vehicle auto-

matically operates the engine to

charge the battery.

OAEQ046008

OAEPH047522L

OAEQ046009L

■ Hybrid vehicle

■ Plug-in hybrid vehicle

H32

However, if the Service Indicator

( ) and Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the

SOC gauge is near the "0" level, we

recommend the vehicle be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Plug-in Hybrid Mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

EV/HEV Button

Pressing the [EV/HEV] button

changes the plug-in hybrid system

modes, between Electric (CD) mode

and Hybrid (CS) mode.

Each time the mode is changed a

corresponding indicator is displayed

on the instrument cluster as follows.

Plug-in hybrid mode indicator

• CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)

mode : The high-voltage (hybrid)

battery is used to drive the vehicle.

• CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)

mode : The high-voltage (hybrid)

battery and petrol engine is used to

drive the vehicle.

Information

Even when the battery charging rate

is high and driving in electric mode is

possible, engine may turn on in some

areas to protect the system.

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OAEPH047518R

OAEPH047519N

■ CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)

OAEPH047520N

■ CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)

H33

AVN Screen

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

(if equipped)

Press [PHEV] on the [Home] screen

or the [All menus] screen and the

menus related to plug-in hybrid

([ECO driving], [Energy information],

[EV range], [Set charging times],

[Charging stations], [Petrol stations])

are displayed.

For more information, please refer

to the Multimedia System Manual

that was separately supplied with

your vehicle.

Aux. Battery Saver+

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

The Aux. Battery Saver+ is a function

that monitors the charging status of

the 12 V auxiliary battery. If the aux-

iliary battery level is low, the main

high voltage battery charges the aux-

iliary battery.

Information

The Aux. Battery Saver+ function will

be ON when the vehicle is delivered. If

the function is not needed, you may

turn it off in the Users Settings mode

on the cluster. For more information,

refer to the following page.

Mode

• Cycle Mode :

When the vehicle is OFF with all

doors, bonnet and tailgate closed,

the Aux. Battery Saver+ periodically

activates according to the auxiliary

battery status.

• Automatic Mode :

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position with the charging connector

plugged in, the function activates

according to the auxiliary battery sta-

tus to prevent overdischarge of the

auxiliary battery.

OAEPHQ017003L

H34

Information

• The Aux. Battery Saver+ activates

maximum of 20 minutes. If the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function activates

more than 10 times consecutively, in

the Automatic Mode the function

will stop activating, judging that

there is a problem with the auxiliary

battery. In this case, drive the vehi-

cle for some period of time. The

function will start activating if the

auxiliary battery returns to normal.

• The Aux. Battery Saver+ function

cannot prevent battery discharge if

the auxiliary battery is damaged,

worn out, used as a power supply or

unauthorised electronic devises are

used.

• If the Aux. Battery Saver+ function

was activated, a message will be dis-

played on the instrument cluster

and the high voltage battery level

may have decreased.

System Setting

The driver can activate the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function by placing

the ignition switch to the ON position

and by selecting:

'User Settings → Other Features →

Aux. Battery Saver+'

The Aux. Battery Saver+ function

deactivates, when the driver cancels

the system setting.

LCD Message

This message is displayed when the

Aux. Battery Saver+ function has

been completed when the vehicle is

turned ON.

However, if the LCD message pops

up frequently, we recommend that

your vehicle’s auxiliary battery or

electric/electronic components be

serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

OAEE046143LOAEE046433L

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H35

Warning and Indicator Lights

Ready Indicator

This indicator illuminates :

When the vehicle is ready to be driven.

- ON : Normal driving is possible.

- OFF : Normal driving is not possible,

or a problem has occurred.

- Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the ready indicator goes OFF

or blinks, there is a problem with the

system. In this case, we recommend

that you have your vehicle inspected

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Service Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

• When the ignition switch or the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a problem with the

hybrid vehicle control system or

hardware.

When the warning light illuminates

whilst driving, or does not go OFF

after starting the vehicle, we recom-

mend that you have your vehicle

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

When the function is activating,

the third Charging Indicator

Lamp will blink and high voltage

electricity will be flowing in the

vehicle. Do not touch the high

voltage electric wire (orange),

connector, and all electric com-

ponents and devices. This may

cause electric shock and lead to

injuries. Also, do not modify

your vehicle in any way. This

may affect your vehicle per-

formance and lead to an acci-

dent.

WARNING

OAEEQ016025

H36

EV Mode Indicator

This indicator illuminates when the

vehicle is driven by the electric motor.

Charging Cable

Connection Indicator

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This indicator illuminates in red when

the charging cable is connected.

Regenerative Brake

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the regenerative brake is not

operating. This causes the Brake

Warning light (red) and Regenerative

Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu-

minate simultaneously as soon as

possible.

In this case, drive safely and have

your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The service brake still function, how-

ever, the operation of the brake pedal

may be more difficult than normal

and the braking distance can

increase.

LCD Display Messages

Check Hybrid system

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the hybrid

control system.

Refrain from driving when the warn-

ing message is displayed.

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OLFH044248L

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H37

Check Hybrid system.

Turn off engine

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the hybrid

system.The " " indicator will blink

and a warning chime will sound until

the problem is solved.

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check Hybrid system.

Do not start engine

This message is displayed when the

hybrid battery power (SOC) level is

low. A warning chime will sound until

the problem is solved.

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Stop vehicle and check power

supply

This message is displayed when a

failure occurs in the power supply

system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and we recommend

that you tow your vehicle to the near-

est HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the vehicle inspected.

OLFH044228L

OLFH044240L OLFH044230L

H38

Stop vehicle to charge battery

This message is displayed when the

hybrid battery power (SOC) level is

low.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and wait until the hybrid

battery is charged.

You can increase the hybrid battery

charging rate by holding the acceler-

ator pedal to the floor with transmis-

sion in P.The engine will rev high but

it will be limited for charging purpose

when you hold the pedal to the floor.

Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery

damage

This message is displayed when the

fuel tank is nearly empty.

You should refill the fuel tank to pre-

vent hybrid battery damage.

Refill inverter coolant

This message is displayed when the

inverter coolant is nearly empty.

You should refill the inverter coolant.

OLFH044232L

OLFH044242L

OLFH044244L

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H39

Stop vehicle and check brakes

This message is displayed when a

failure occurs in the brake system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and we recommend

that you tow your vehicle to the near-

est HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the vehicle inspected.

Check brakes

This message is displayed when the

brake performance is low or the

regenerative brake does not work

properly due to a failure in the brake

system.

In this case, it may take longer for the

brake pedal to operate and the brak-

ing distance may become longer.

Check Virtual Engine Sound

System

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the Virtual

Engine Sound System (VESS).

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OLFH044234L OLFH044250L

OLFH044543L

H40

Unplug vehicle to start

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when you

start the engine without unplugging

the charging cable. Unplug the

charging cable, and then start the

vehicle.

Remaining charge time

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed to notify

the remaining time to fully charge the

battery.

Wait until fuel door opens

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when you

attempt to open the fuel filler door

with the fuel tank pressurised. Wait

until the fuel tank is depressurised.

Information

It may take up to 20 seconds to open

fuel filler door.

OLFP045258N

OAEPH047193L

OAEPH047201L

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H41

Check fuel door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the fuel filler

door. Such as, when the fuel filler

door does not open after 20 seconds

at freezing temperature.

Information

When the fuel filler door is frozen and

does not open after 20 seconds at

freezing temperature, slightly tap the

fuel filler door and then attempt to

open it. In other cases, we recommend

that you have your vehicle inspected

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuel door open

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

fuel filler door opens after the fuel

tank is depressurized. If this mes-

sage is displayed, you can refuel the

fuel tank.

Check fuel door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle is driven with the fuel filler

door opened. Close the fuel filler

door and then start driving.

OAEPH047526L

OAEPH047525L

OAEPH047526L

H42

Shift to P to charge

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

charging connector is plugged with

the shift lever in R (Reverse), N

(Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift

lever to P (Park) and re-start the

charging process.

Charger Error!

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the charger.

Switching to Hybrid mode to

allow heating or air condition-

ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle automatically switches to

HEV mode to allow heating or air

conditioning. It is when the coolant

temperature is low (below -14°C)

and the driver turns on the heating or

cooling system.

If the coolant temperature gets high-

er than -14°C or the driver turns off

the heating or cooling system the

vehicle returns to its default (EV)

mode.

OAEPH047202L

OAEE046134

OAEPH047207L

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H43

Maintaining Hybrid mode to

allow heating or air condition-

ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle maintains the HEV mode to

allow heating or air conditioning.The

mode does not change when the

driver presses the [EV/HEV] button

to switch from the HEV mode to EV

mode whilst the heating and cooling

system is on and the coolant temper-

ature is below -14°C.

Low/High System Temp.

Maintaining Hybrid mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

temperature of the high-voltage

(hybrid) battery is too low or too high.

This warning message is to protect

the battery and the hybrid system.

Low/High System Temp.

Switching to Hybrid mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

temperature of the high-voltage

(hybrid) battery is too low or high.

This warning message is to protect

the battery and the hybrid system.

OAEPH047527L

OAEPH047203L/OAEPH047204L

OAEPH047205L/OAEPH047206L

H44

Switching to Hybrid mode to

lubricate engine

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle is automatically switched to

the HEV mode to lubricate engine

whilst the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Maintaining Hybrid mode to pro-

tect engine

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

[EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is

impossible to switch from the HEV

mode to EV mode due to engine

lubrication.

Exit SPORT to switch to electric

mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

[EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is

impossible to switch from the HEV

mode to EV mode because the

SPORT mode is engaged.

OAEPH047530L

OAEPH047528L

OAEPH047531L

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

H45

Energy Flow

The hybrid system informs the driv-

ers its energy flow in various operat-

ing modes.Whilst driving, the current

energy flow is specified in 11 modes.

Vehicle Stop

The vehicle is stopped.

(No energy flow)

EV Propulsion

Only the motor power is used to drive

the vehicle.

(Battery ➞ Wheel)

OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046150L/OAEQ046020L

■ Type A

■ Type B

H46

Power Assist

Both the motor and the engine power

are used to drive the vehicle.

(Battery & Engine ➞ Wheel)

Engine Only Propulsion

Only the engine power is used to

drive the vehicle.

(Engine ➞ Wheel)

Engine Generation

When the vehicle is stopped, the

high-voltage battery is charged up by

the engine.

(Engine ➞ Battery)

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OAE046151L/OAEQ046021L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046152L/OAEQ046022L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046153L/OAEQ046005L

■ Type A

■ Type B

H47

Regeneration

The high-voltage battery is charged

up by the regenerative brake system.

(Wheel ➞ Battery)

Engine Brake

The engine braking is used to decel-

erate the vehicle.

(Wheel ➞ Engine)

Power Reserve

The engine is simultaneously used to

drive the vehicle and to charge up

the high-voltage battery.

(Engine ➞ Wheel & Battery)

OAE046152L/OAEQ046004L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046150L/OAEQ046002L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046154L/OAEQ046023L

■ Type A

■ Type B

H48

Engine Generation/Motor Drive

The engine charges up the high-volt-

age battery.The motor power is used

to drive the vehicle.

(Engine ➞ Battery ➞ Wheel)

Engine Generation/Regeneration

The engine and regenerative brake

system charges up the high-voltage

battery.

(Engine & Wheel ➞ Battery)

Engine Brake/Regeneration

The engine braking is simultaneously

used to decelerate the vehicle and to

charge up the high-voltage battery.

(Wheel ➞ Engine & Battery)

DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))

OAE046155L/OAEQ046024L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046155L/OAEQ046007L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046151L/OAEQ046003L

■ Type A

■ Type B

H49

Hybrid Vehicle Components

Safety Precautions

High Voltage Battery System

Never touch orange coloured or

high voltage labelled compo-

nents, including wires, cables,

and connections.When the insu-

lators or covers are damaged or

removed, severe injury or death

from electrocution may occur.

WARNING

Whilst replacing the fuses in the

engine compartment, never

touch the HPCU.The HPCU car-

ries high voltage. Touching the

HPCU may result in electrocu-

tion, serious injury, or death.

WARNING

SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAEQ046019

■ High voltage battery system *

: Located in the engine compartment

: Located under the rear seats

OAEPHQ016040L

■ HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit) *

H50

SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))

: Located in the engine compartment

OAEQ046017

■ Drive motor *

• Do not disassemble the high

voltage motor connector. The

high voltage motor connector

may contain residual high

voltage. Coming in contact

with high voltage may result

in death or serious injury.

• Your vehicle's hybrid system

should only be inspected or

repaired by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

WARNING

• Do not pile up any items in an

area behind the high voltage

battery. In a crash, the battery

may become unstable, or its

performance may degrade.

• Do not apply strong force nor

pile up any items above the

luggage compartment. Such

an attempt may distort the

high voltage battery case,

causing a safety problem or

degrading the performance.

• Be careful when loading flam-

mable liquid in luggage com-

partment. It could cause oper-

ational and safety degrada-

tion if the liquid leaks and

flows in high voltage battery.

CAUTION

In the hybrid system, the hybrid

battery uses high voltage to

operate the motor and other

components. This high voltage

hybrid battery system can be

very dangerous.

Never touch the hybrid system.

When you touch the hybrid bat-

tery system, serious injury or

death may occur.

WARNING

H51

• When the vehicle is paint baked,

do not bake over 30 minutes in

70°C (158°F) or 20 minutes in

80°C (176°F) degree.

• Do not wash the engine compart-

ment, using water. Water may

cause an electric shock to and

damage the electronic.

NOTICE

• Never use the package mod-

ules (high voltage battery,

inverter and converter) for any

other purpose.

• Do not use an unauthorised

battery charger to charge the

high voltage battery. Doing so

may result in death or serious

injury.

• Never locate the high voltage

system near or in a fire.

• Never drill into or strike the

package module. Otherwise, it

may be damaged. An electric

shock may occur, resulting in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

• Do not disassemble or assem-

ble the high voltage battery

system. Doing so may result

in electric shock, causing

death or serious injury.

• If you disassemble or assem-

ble hybrid system compo-

nents improperly, it may dam-

age the performance and reli-

ability of your vehicle.

• If electrolyte comes in contact

with your body, clothes or

eyes, immediately flush with a

large quantity of fresh tap

water. Have your eyes exam-

ined by a doctor as soon as

possible.

WARNING

Never assemble or disassemble

the high voltage battery system.

• If you assemble or disassem-

ble the high voltage battery

system, the durability and per-

formance of the vehicle may be

damaged.

• When you want to check the

high voltage battery system,

have the vehicle checked and

inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Do not touch the high voltage

battery and high voltage cable

connected to motor (orange

colour). Severe burns and elec-

tric shock may occur. For your

safety, do not touch the cover

of electronic components and

electronic cable. Do not remove

the cover of electronic compo-

nents and electronic cable. In

particular, never touch the high

voltage battery system when

the hybrid system in operation.

It may result in death or serious

injury.

WARNING

H52

Service Plug

Never touch the service plug.

Service plug is attached to high

voltage hybrid battery system.

Touching the service plug will

result in death or serious injury.

Service personnel should follow

procedure in service manual.

DANGER

OAEQ046018

SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))

(Continued)

• Do not drop water or liquid on

to HPCU, HSG, motor and

fuses.The hybrid system com-

ponents are covered. If you

drop water or liquid on to

hybrid system components, it

may result in electric shock.

This hybrid vehicle uses the

hybrid battery system inverter

and converter to generate high

voltage. High voltage in the

hybrid battery system is very

dangerous and may cause

severe burns and electric

shock. This may result in seri-

ous injury or death.

• For your safety, never touch,

replace, disassemble or remove

the hybrid battery system

including components, cables

and connectors. Severe burns

or electric shock may result in

serious injury or death when

you fail to follow this warning.

• When the hybrid battery sys-

tem operates, the hybrid bat-

tery system can be hot. Always

be careful because burns or

electric shock may be caused

by high voltage.

(Continued)

WARNING

H53

Hybrid Battery Cooling Duct

The hybrid battery cooling duct is

located on the left side of the rear

seats. The cooling duct cools down

the hybrid battery. When the hybrid

battery cooling duct is blocked, the

hybrid battery may be overheated.

Do not obstruct the cooling duct with

any other objects.

Information

Clean the cooling duct for the hybrid bat-

tery with a dry cloth on a regular basis.

(Continued)

• Do not put any objects into

the cooling duct of the hybrid

battery. Doing so may cause

loss of cooling duct volume to

the hybrid battery. When the

cooling duct is blocked with

any objects, immediately con-

tact your HYUNDAI dealer.

• Never place a container of liq-

uid on or near the cooling

duct. If the liquid spills, the

hybrid battery located in the

luggage compartment may be

damaged.

• Secure all loads in the lug-

gage compartment to prevent

them from being tossed about

before driving. When a sharp

or heavy load strike with a

strong impact or pierce the

interior luggage compartment

wall, the hybrid battery sys-

tem may be damaged, deterio-

rating its performance.

• Never clean the cooling duct

of the hybrid battery with a

wet cloth. If any water enters

in the cooling duct of the

hybrid battery, the hybrid bat-

tery may cause an electric

shock, resulting in a serious

damage, an injury or a death.

• The hybrid battery is com-

posed of lithium-ion polymer.

If the hybrid battery is improp-

erly handled, it is dangerous

to the environment. Also it

may cause electrical shock

and severe burns, resulting in

a serious injury or a death.

• Do not spill liquid over the

cooling duct of the hybrid bat-

tery. Doing so is very danger-

ous. It may cause electric

shock or serious injury.

• Do not cover the cooling duct

with objects.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE036024

■ Hybrid vehicle

OAEPH036024

■ Plug-in hybrid vehicle

H54

If an Accident Occurs

(Continued)

Using small amount of water

or fire extinguishers not

meant for electrical fires

could cause serious injury or

death from electrical shocks.

• Upon witnessing any sparks,

gases, flames, or fuel leakage

of your vehicle, immediately

call emergency services or

contact a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer. Also, advise

them that a hybrid vehicle is

involved.

SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))

(Continued)

• When the vehicle is severely

damaged, remain a safe dis-

tance of 15 meter or more

between your vehicle and other

vehicles/flammables.

If a fire occurs :

• If a small scale fire occurs,

use a fire extinguisher (ABC,

BC) that is meant for electrical

fires.

If it is impossible to extin-

guish the fire in the early

stage, remain a safe distance

from the vehicle and immedi-

ately call your local fire emer-

gency responders. Also,

advise them that a hybrid

vehicle is involved.

If the fire spreads to the high

voltage battery, large amount

of water is needed to put out

the fire.

(Continued)

WARNING

• For your safety, do not touch

high voltage cables, connec-

tors and package modules.

High voltage components are

orange in colour.

• Exposed cables or wires may

be visible inside or outside of

the vehicle. Never touch the

wires or cables, because an

electrical shock,an injury, or a

death may occur.

• Any gas or electrolyte leakage

from your vehicle is not only

poisonous but also flamma-

ble. Upon witnessing one of

those, open the windows, and

remain a safe distance from

the vehicle out of the road.

Immediately call an emergency

services or contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer and advise

them that a hybrid vehicle is

involved.

(Continued)

WARNING

H55

When the Hybrid Vehicle Shuts

Off

When the high voltage battery is dis-

charged, when the 12-volt battery is

discharged, or when the fuel tank is

empty, the hybrid system may not

operate whilst driving. When the

Hybrid system does not operate, do

the followings:

1.Gradually reduce the vehicle

speed. Pull over your vehicle off

the road in a safe area.

2. Locate the shift lever in P (Park).

3.Turn ON the hazard warning flashers.

4.Turn OFF the vehicle, and try to

start the hybrid system again,

whilst depressing the brake pedal

and turning on the ignition switch.

5.When the hybrid system still does

not operate, refer to "If the 12 Volt

Battery Is Discharged" in chapter 6.

Before jump-starting the vehicle,

check the fuel level and the exact

procedure to jump start. For further

details, refer to "If the 12 Volt

Battery Is Discharged" in the chap-

ter 6. When the fuel level is low, do

not attempt to drive the vehicle only

with the battery power. The high

voltage battery may be discharged,

and the hybrid system will turn OFF.

When a submersion in water

occurs:

When your vehicle is flooded in

water, a high-voltage battery

may cause shock or fires. Thus,

turn the hybrid system OFF, take

the key in your possession and

escape to a safe place. Never

attempt physical contact with

your flooded vehicle.

Immediately contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer and advise

them that a hybrid vehicle is

involved.

WARNING

OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL

OOppeerraattiioonn

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss

The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, the right to amend specifications without notice or

obligation to incorporate such amendments into vehicles already

produced is reserved.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As

a result, some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may

not apply to the particular vehicle with which this manual is supplied.

We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

information regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.

Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may adverse-

ly affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.

Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification without the

express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not covered by the vehi-

cle manufacturers warranty.

Particular attention is drawn to the fitment of replacement road wheels having a different specification to those

installed in production.The electric power assisted steering system is specifically programmed to operate only

with the road wheels fitted during production.The installation of alternative specification road wheels may result

in the replacement road wheels fouling the vehicle body resulting in tyre damage and compromised safety.The

installation of after market wheels on vehicles equipped with TPMS may result in wheel balancing difficulties

or malfunction of the TPMS system.

We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer before non original specification road wheels

are installed.

This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled equipment.

It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adversely affect

these systems.

Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, we recommend that you contact your HYUNDAI authorised

repairer for recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the rec-

ommended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment which

gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall within the scope

of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-

tion which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

DANGER

This indicates that a condition may

result in harm, serious injury or death

to you or other persons if the warning

is not heeded. Follow the advice pro-

vided with the warning.

This indicates that a condition may

result in damage to your vehicle or its

equipment if the caution is not heed-

ed. Follow the advice provided with

the caution.

CAUTION

This indicates that interesting or helpful

information is being provided.

NOTICE

WARNING

FOREWORD

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of

discerning people who drive HYUNDAIs. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc-

tion of each HYUNDAI we build.

Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with

your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.

This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-

trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.

This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be

required.

This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so

you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with

important operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new

owner.

in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor Company.

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that

do not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the

specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

CAUTION

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your

vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can

assist you in many ways.We strong-

ly recommend that you read the

entire manual. In order to minimise

the chance of death or injury, you

must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words

in this manual to best explain how to

enjoy your vehicle. By reading your

manual, you will learn about fea-

tures, important safety information,

and driving tips under various road

conditions.

The general layout of the manual is

provided in the Table of Contents.

Use the index when looking for a

specific area or subject; it has an

alphabetical listing of all information

in your manual.

Sections:This manual has eight sec-

tions plus an index. Each section

begins with a brief list of contents so

you can tell at a glance if that section

has the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGS,

CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this

manual. These were prepared to

enhance your personal safety. You

should carefully read and follow ALL

procedures and recommendations

provided in these WARNINGS, CAU-

TIONS and NOTICES.

This is the safety alert sym-

bol. It is used to alert you to

potential physical injury haz-

ards. Obey all safety mes-

sages that follow this symbol

to avoid possible injury or

death. The safety alert sym-

bol precedes the signal words

DANGER, WARNING and

CAUTION.

A NOTICE indicates interesting or

helpful information is being pro-

vided.

NOTICE

HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL

Introduction

A WARNING indicates a situa-

tion in which harm,serious bod-

ily injury or death could result if

the warning is ignored.

WARNING

A CAUTION indicates a situa-

tion in which damage to your

vehicle could result if the cau-

tion is ignored.

CAUTION

DANGER indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious

injury.

DANGER

Introduction

Petrol engine

Unleaded

For the optimal vehicle performance,

we recommend you use unleaded

petrol which has an octane rating of

RON (Research Octane Number) 95 /

AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.

You may use unleaded petrol with an

octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI 87-

90 but it may result in slight perform-

ance reduction of the vehicle. (Do not

use methanol blended fuels)

Your new vehicle is designed to

obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as min-

imise exhaust emissions and spark

plug fouling.

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The

use of leaded fuel is detrimental to

the catalytic converter and will

damage the engine control sys-

tem’s oxygen sensor and affect

emission control.

Never add any fuel system clean-

ing agents to the fuel tank other

than what has been specified (We

recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

details.)

NOTICE

FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS

• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off

when refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

WARNING

Introduction

Petrol containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and

ethanol (also known as grain alco-

hol), and petrol or gasohol containing

methanol (also known as wood alco-

hol) are being marketed along with or

instead of leaded or unleaded petrol.

Do not use gasohol containing more

than 10% ethanol, and do not use

petrol or gasohol containing any

methanol. Either of these fuels may

cause drivability problems and dam-

age to the fuel system, engine control

system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any

kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability prob-

lems may not be covered by the

manufacturer’s warranty if they result

from the use of:

1.Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.

2.Petrol or gasohol containing

methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs

drivability.

Other fuels

Using fuel additives such as:

- Silicone fuel additive

- MMT (Magnanese, Mn) fuel additive

- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive

- Other metallic-based fuel additives

may result in cylinder misfire, poor

acceleration, engine stalling, dam-

age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-

rosion, and may cause damage to

the engine resulting in a reduction in

the overall life of the powertrain.

Damage to the fuel system or per-

formance problem caused by the

use of these fuels may not be cov-

ered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

NOTICE

Introduction

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends avoiding

fuels containing MTBE (Methyl

Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in

your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%

vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)

may reduce vehicle performance and

produce vapour lock or hard starting.

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty may not cover damage

to the fuel system and any per-

formance problems that are

caused by the use of fuels con-

taining methanol or fuels contain-

ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen

Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood

alcohol) should not be used in your

vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce

vehicle performance and damage

components of the fuel system,

engine control system and emission

control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

unleaded petrol which has an octane

rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index)

91 or higher.

For customers who do not use good

quality petrols, and have problems

starting or the engine does not run

smoothly, one bottle of additive added

to the fuel tank is recommended

according to the maintenance sched-

ule which is provided in your Service

Booklet.

Additives are available from your

HYUNDAI authorised repairer along

with information on how to use them.

Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle

in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

NOTICE

• This vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification of your vehicle

could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate

governmental safety and emis-

sions regulations.

In addition, damage or perform-

ance problems resulting from any

modification may not be covered

under warranty.

• If you use unauthorised electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage,

battery discharge and fire.For your

safety, do not use unauthorised

electronic devices.

By following a few simple precautions

for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you

may add to the performance, econo-

my and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• Whilst driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions per

minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast or

slow.Varying engine speed is need-

ed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-

gencies, to allow the brakes to seat

properly.

HYUNDAI promotes an environmen-

tally sound treatment for end of life

vehicles and offers to take back your

HYUNDAI end of life vehicles in

accordance with the European Union

(EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.

You can get detailed information

from your national HYUNDAI home-

page.

Introduction

VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN

PPRROOCCEESSSS

VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMOODDIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS RREETTUURRNNIINNGG UUSSEEDD VVEEHHIICCLLEESS

((FFOORR EEUURROOPPEE))

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

TABLE OF CONTENTS

F11

Your vehicle at a glance

HHyybbrriidd vveehhiiccllee

Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2

Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3

Interior overview....................................................1-4

Instrument panel overview...................................1-5

Engine compartment .............................................1-6

PPlluugg--iinn hhyybbrriidd vveehhiiccllee

Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-7

Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-8

Interior overview....................................................1-9

Instrument panel overview.................................1-10

Engine compartment ...........................................1-11

1-2

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II)) -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Bonnet...............................................3-35

2. Headlamp..........................................7-55

3. Daytime running light (DRL)...3-112, 7-62

4.Tyres and wheels .......................7-29, 8-4

5. Outside rearview mirror.....................3-24

6. Sunroof..............................................3-31

7. Front windscreen wiper blades..........7-23

8.Windows............................................3-27

9. Parking distance warning

(Reverse/Forward) system ............. 3-124

OAE016001R

■ Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-3

Your vehicle at a glance

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII)) -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Antenna................................................4-2

2. Doors..................................................3-12

3. Fuel filler door.....................................3-38

4. Parking distance warning

(Reverse/Forward) system/ ..............3-124

Parking distance warning (Reverse)

system..............................................3-122

5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-62

6. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-67

7. Rear view monitor ............................3-121

8.Tailgate ...............................................3-37

9.Towing hook.......................................6-44

OAE016002

■ Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-4

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-14

2. Driver position memory system ........3-18

3. Outside rearview mirror folding

switch ................................................3-26

4. Outside rearview mirror control

switch ................................................3-25

5. Central door lock switch ....................3-14

6. Power window switches ....................3-27

7. Power window lock switch ................3-30

8. Headlamp levelling device ..............3-112

9. Instrument panel illumination

control switch ......................................3-46

10. Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)

system................................................5-41

11. Lane keeping assist (LKA) system....5-63

12. ESC OFF button..............................5-33

13. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-38

14. 12V battery reset switch....................6-5

15. Bonnet release lever........................3-35

16. Fuse box..........................................7-41

17. Steering wheel ................................3-20

18. Seat ..................................................2-4

OAEPH017008L

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-5

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

OAEPH017005R

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Instrument cluster .........................................3-44

2. Horn..............................................................3-22

3. Driver's front air bag .....................................2-51

4. Key ignition switch/..........................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop button.................................5-9

5. Light control/Turn signals............................3-108

6.Wiper/Washer..............................................3-118

7. Audio system/ .................................................4-8

Navigation system ..........................................4-5

8. Hazard warning flasher...................................6-2

9. Automatic climate control system .................3-128

10. Dual clutch transmission.............................5-15

11. Passenger's front air bag............................2-51

12. Glove box..................................................3-147

13. Cigarette lighter.........................................3-154

14. Power outlet..............................................3-151

15.Wireless mobile phone charging

system..................................................3-152

16. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat.................2-20

17. Heated steering wheel................................3-21

18. Parking distance warning (Reverse/Forward)

ON button/.................................................3-125

Parking distance warning (Reverse) OFF

button........................................................3-123

19. Cup holder ................................................3-149

20. Steering wheel audio controls/ .....................4-3

Bluetooth

wireless technology

hands-free controls.......................................4-4

21. Speed limiter/............................................. 5-75

Cruise controls/...........................................5-78

Smart cruise controls..................................5-84

1-6

Your vehicle at a glance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

OAE076001

■■

Petrol Engine (Kappa 1.6 GDI)

1. Engine oil filler cap............................7-12

2. Engine oil dipstick ............................7-11

3. Engine coolant cap............................7-14

4. Engine coolant reservoir ..................7-13

5. Inverter coolant reservoir ..................7-13

6. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-17

7. Air cleaner ........................................7-19

8.Windscreen washer fluid reservoir....7-18

9. Fuse box............................................7-42

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1-7

Your vehicle at a glance

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II)) -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Bonnet...............................................3-35

2. Headlamp..........................................7-55

3. Daytime running light (DRL) ..3-112, 7-62

4.Tyres and wheels .......................7-29, 8-4

5. Outside rearview mirror.....................3-24

6. Sunroof..............................................3-31

7. Front windscreen wiper blades..........7-23

8.Windows............................................3-27

9. Parking distance warning

(Reverse/Forward) system ............. 3-124

10. Charging door ....................................H4

OAEPH017001L

■ Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-8

Your vehicle at a glance

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII)) -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Antenna................................................4-2

2. Doors..................................................3-12

3. Fuel filler door.....................................3-41

4. Parking distance warning

(Reverse/Forward) system/ ..............3-124

Parking distance warning (Reverse)

system..............................................3-122

5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-62

6. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-67

7. Rear view monitor ............................3-121

8.Tailgate ...............................................3-37

9.Towing hook........................................6-44

OAEPH016002

■ Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-9

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-14

2. Driver position memory system ........3-18

3. Outside rearview mirror folding

switch ................................................3-26

4. Outside rearview mirror control

switch ................................................3-25

5. Central door lock switch ....................3-14

6. Power window lock switch ................3-27

7. Power window switches ....................3-30

8. Headlamp levelling device ..............3-112

9. Instrument panel illumination

control switch ......................................3-46

10. Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)

system................................................5-41

11.VESS (Virtual Engine Sound System)

button..................................................H30

12. Lane keeping assist (LKA) system....5-63

13. ESC OFF button..............................5-33

14. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-41

15. AUTO/LOCK mode selection button

16. Scheduled charging deactivation

button ................................................H6

17. Bonnet release lever........................3-35

18. Fuse box..........................................7-41

19. Steering wheel ................................3-20

20. Seat ..................................................2-4

OAEPH017006R

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-10

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

OAEPH017004R

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Instrument cluster....................................3-44

2. Horn.........................................................3-22

3. Driver's front air bag ................................2-51

4. Key ignition switch/ ....................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop button ...........................5-9

5. Light control/Turn signals.......................3-108

6.Wiper/Washer ........................................3-118

7. Audio system/ ............................................4-8

Navigation system......................................4-5

8. Hazard warning flasher..............................6-2

9. Automatic climate control system............3-128

10. Dual clutch transmission........................5-15

11. Passenger's front air bag.......................2-51

12. Glove box.............................................3-147

13. Cigarette lighter ...................................3-154

14. Power outlet.........................................3-151

15.Wireless mobile phone charging

system..................................................3-152

16. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat............2-20

17. Heated steering wheel...........................3-21

18. EV/HEV button ......................................H32

19. Parking distance warning (Reverse/Forward)

ON button/............................................3-125

Parking distance warning (Reverse) OFF

button......................................................3-123

20. Cup holder ...........................................3-149

21. Steering wheel audio controls/ ................4-3

Bluetooth

wireless technology

hands-free controls..................................4-4

22. Speed limiter/........................................ 5-75

Cruise controls/......................................5-78

Smart cruise controls.............................5-84

1-11

Your vehicle at a glance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

OAEPH076001

■■

Petrol Engine (Kappa 1.6 GDI)

1. Engine oil filler cap............................7-12

2. Engine oil dipstick ............................7-11

3. Engine coolant cap ..........................7-14

4. Engine coolant reservoir ..................7-13

5. Inverter coolant reservoir ................7-13

6. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-17

7. Air cleaner ........................................7-19

8.Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-18

9. Fuse box ..........................................7-42

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety system of your vehicle

Important safety precautions...............................2-2

Always wear your seat belt............................................2-2

Restrain all children..........................................................2-2

Air bag hazards..................................................................2-2

Driver distraction...............................................................2-2

Control your speed ...........................................................2-3

Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4

Safety precautions............................................................2-5

Front seats..........................................................................2-6

Rear seats .........................................................................2-12

Head restraint..................................................................2-15

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-20

Seat belts ..............................................................2-24

Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-24

Seat belt warning light ..................................................2-25

Seat belt restraint system ............................................2-27

Additional seat belt safety precautions ....................2-32

Care of seat belts ...........................................................2-35

Child restraint system (CRS) .............................2-36

Our recommendation:Children always in the rear..2-36

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-37

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-39

Air bag - supplemental restraint system .........2-49

Where are the air bags? ...............................................2-51

How does the air bags system operate?..................2-56

What to expect after an air bag inflates..................2-60

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision?...........2-62

SRS care ............................................................................2-67

Additional safety precautions......................................2-68

Air bag warning labels...................................................2-69

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.

It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

2-2

You will find many safety precautions

and recommendations throughout

this section, and throughout this man-

ual.The safety precautions in this sec-

tion are among the most important.

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of accidents. Air bags are

designed to supplement seat belts,

not replace them. So even though

your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your

passengers wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

Restrain all children

All children under age 13 should ride

in your vehicle properly restrained in

a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants

and small children should be

restrained in an appropriate Child

Restraint System. Larger children

should use a booster seat with the

lap/shoulder belt until they can use

the seat belt properly without a

booster seat.

Air bag hazards

Whilst air bags can save lives, they

can also cause serious or fatal

injuries to occupants who sit too

close to them, or who are not prop-

erly restrained. Infants, young chil-

dren, and short adults are at the

greatest risk of being injured by an

inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-

tions and warnings in this manual.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious

and potentially deadly danger, espe-

cially for inexperienced drivers.Safety

should be the first concern when

behind the wheel and drivers need to

be aware of the wide array of potential

distractions, such as drowsiness,

reaching for objects, eating, personal

grooming, other passengers, and

using mobile phones.

Drivers can become distracted when

they take their eyes and attention off

the road or their hands off the wheel

to focus on activities other than driv-

ing.To reduce your risk of distraction

and an accident:

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-

tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is

parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when

allowed by laws and conditions per-

mit safe use. NEVER text or email

whilst driving. Most countries have

laws prohibiting drivers from texting.

Some countries and cities also pro-

hibit drivers from using handheld

phones.

IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS

Safety system of your vehicle

2-3

Safety system of your vehicle

• NEVER let the use of a mobile device

distract you from driving.You have a

responsibility to your passengers and

others on the road to always drive

safely, with your hands on the wheel

as well as your eyes and attention on

the road.

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed, the greater the

risk, but serious injuries can also

occur at lower speeds. Never drive

faster than is safe for current condi-

tions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condi-

tion

Having a tyre blowout or a mechanical

failure can be extremely hazardous.To

reduce the possibility of such prob-

lems, check your tyre pressures and

condition frequently, and perform all

regularly scheduled maintenance.

2-4

Safety system of your vehicle

SSEEAATTSS

OAE036001R

Front seat

1. Forward and backward

2. Seatback angle

3. Seat cushion height*

4. Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*

5. Seat warmer */ Air ventilation seat *

6. Head restraint

2nd row seat

7. Seatback angle and folding

8. Head restraint

9. Armrest

10. Seat warmer*

* : if equipped

2-5

Safety system of your vehicle

Safety precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-

ting in a safe, comfortable position

plays an important role in driver and

passenger safety together with the

seat belts and air bags in an accident.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk

of being injured by an inflating air

bag. Sitting too close to an air bag

greatly increases the risk of injury in

the event the air bag inflates. Move

your seat as far back as possible

from front air bags, whilst still main-

taining control of the vehicle.

Do not use a cushion that reduces

friction between the seat and the

passenger.The passenger's hips

may slide under the lap portion

of the seat belt during an acci-

dent or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries

could result because the seat

belt cannot operate properly.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• Adjust the driver’s seat as far

to the rear as possible main-

taining the ability to control the

vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger seat

as far to the rear as possible.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Hold the steering wheel by the

rim with hands at the 9 o’clock

and 3 o’clock positions to min-

imise the risk of injuries to

your hands and arms.

• NEVER place anything or any-

one between you and the air

bag.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place feet or legs on the

dashboard to minimise the risk

of leg injuries.

2-6

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before

starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit

upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be

restrained in appropriate Child

Restraint Systems. Children who

have outgrown a booster seat and

adults must be restrained using the

seat belts.

Front seats

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the control lever or switches

located on the outside of the seat

cushion. Before driving, adjust the

seat to the proper position so that you

can easily control the steering wheel,

foot pedals and controls on the instru-

ment panel.

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for

more than one occupant.

• Always position the seatback

upright with the lap portion of

the seat belt snug and low

across the hips.

• NEVER allow children or small

infants to ride on a passenger’s

lap.

• Do not route the seat belt

across your neck,across sharp

edges, or reroute the shoulder

strap away from your body.

• Do not allow the seat belt to

become caught or jammed.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the

seat whilst the vehicle is mov-

ing. The seat could respond

with unexpected movement

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything under

the front seats. Loose objects

in the driver’s foot area could

interfere with the operation of

the foot pedals, causing an

accident.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-7

Safety system of your vehicle

Manual adjustment

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment

lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place. Move

forward and rearward without using

the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat whilst

wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion for-

ward may cause strong pres-

sure on your abdomen.

• Do not allow your hands or

fingers to get caught in the

seat mechanisms whilst the

seat is moving.

CAUTION

(Continued)

• Do not allow anything to inter-

fere with the normal position

and proper locking of the seat-

back.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter

on the floor or seat. When you

operate the seat, gas may exit

out of the lighter causing a fire.

• Use extreme caution when

picking up small objects

trapped under the seats or

between the seat and the cen-

tre console.Your hands might

be cut or injured by the sharp

edges of the seat mechanism.

• If there are occupants in the

rear seats, be careful whilst

adjusting the front seat posi-

tion.

OAE036002/H

2-8

Safety system of your vehicle

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its orig-

inal position for the seatback to

lock.)

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

OAE036003/H

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-9

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you.During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger’s

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger’s neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

• Push down the lever several times,

to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up the lever several times, to

raise the seat cushion.

Power adjustment (if equipped)

OAE036004/H

NEVER allow children in the

vehicle unattended. The power

seats are operable when the

engine is turned off.

WARNING

2-10

Safety system of your vehicle

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat-

back reaches the desired position.

OAE036006/H OAE036007/H

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the

seats when the seat has been

adjusted as far forward or

rearward as possible.

• Do not adjust the seats longer

than necessary when the

engine is turned off.This may

result in unnecessary battery

drain.

• Do not operate two or more

seats at the same time. This

may result in an electrical

malfunction.

CAUTION

2-11

Safety system of your vehicle

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you.During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger’s

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger’s neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat cush-

ion:

1. • Push the front portion of the con-

trol switch up to raise or down to

lower the front part of the seat

cushion.

• Push the rear portion of the con-

trol switch up to raise or down to

lower the height of the seat cush-

ion.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a

collision or sudden stop.

Driver and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

OAE036008/H

2-12

Safety system of your vehicle

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat,

if equipped)

• The lumbar support can be adjust-

ed by pressing the lumbar support

switch.

• Press the front portion of the switch

(1) to increase support or the rear

portion of the switch (2) to decrease

support.

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on

the back of the front seatbacks.

Rear seats

Folding the rear seat

(if equipped)

The rear seatbacks can be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

Do not put heavy or sharp

objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come

loose from the pocket and

injure occupants.

CAUTION

OAE036064

OAE036005R

• Never allow passengers to sit

on top of the folded down

seatback whilst the vehicle is

moving. This is not a proper

seating position and no seat

belts are available for use.

This could result in serious

injury or death in case of an

accident or sudden stop.

•

Objects carried on the folded

down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of

the front seatbacks.This could

allow cargo to slide forward

and cause injury or damage

during sudden stops.

WARNING

2-13

Safety system of your vehicle

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the upright

position.

2. Lower the rear head restraints

down(2) pushing the adjusting

button(1).

3. Locate the seatbelt toward the out-

board position before folding down

the seatback to avoid the seatbelt

system interfering with the seat-

back.

4. Pull on the seatback folding lever

(1), then fold the seat toward the

front of the vehicle.

OAE036018

OAE036065L

OAE036019

OAE036020

OAE036021

2-14

Safety system of your vehicle

5.To use the rear seat, lift and push

the seatback rearward.

Push the seatback firmly until it

clicks into place. Make sure the

seatback is locked in place.

OAE036066L

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be

properly secured and may hit

vehicle occupants in a collision

causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

When returning the rear seat-

back from a folded to an upright

position, hold the seatback and

return it slowly. Ensure that the

seatback is completely locked

into its upright position by

pushing on the top of the seat-

back. In an accident or sudden

stop, the unlocked seatback

could allow cargo to move for-

ward with great force and enter

the passenger compartment,

which could result in serious

injury or death.

WARNING

2-15

Safety system of your vehicle

Armrest

The armrest is located in the centre

of the rear seat. Pull the armrest

down from the seatback to use it.

Head restraint

The vehicle’s front and rear seats

have adjustable head restraints. The

head restraints provide comfort for

passengers, but more importantly

they are designed to help protect

passengers from whiplash and other

neck and spinal injuries during an

accident, especially in a rear impact

collision.

OAE036022

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident,

take the following precautions

when adjusting your head

restraints:

• Always properly adjust the

head restraints for all passen-

gers BEFORE starting the vehi-

cle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat

with the head restraint

removed.

(Continued)

•

Adjust the head restraints so

the middle of the head

restraint is at the same height

as the height of the top of the

eyes.

• NEVER adjust the head

restraint position of the dri-

ver’s seat when the vehicle is

in motion.

• Adjust the head restraint as

close to the passenger’s head

as possible. Do not use a seat

cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback.

• Make sure the head restraint

locks into position after

adjusting it.

WARNING

OLF034072N

2-16

Safety system of your vehicle

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or

pull on the head restraints.

Front seat head restraints

The driver’s and front passenger’s

seats are equipped with adjustable

head restraints for the passengers

safety and comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

NOTICE

When there is no occupant in

the rear seats, adjust the height

of the head restraint to the low-

est position.The rear seat head

restraint can reduce the visibili-

ty of the rear area.

CAUTION

OPDE036068

OAE036010

2-17

Safety system of your vehicle

Forward and rearward adjustment

(if equipped)

The head restraint may be adjusted

forward to 3 different positions by

pulling the head restraint forward to

the desired detent. To adjust the

head restraint to it’s furthest rear-

wards position, pull it fully forward to

the farthest position and release it.

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint

and seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with using

the seatback angle lever or switch

(1).

2. Raise the head restraint as far as it

can go.

NOTICE

OAE036012R

OAE036011R

■ Type A

■ Type B

OLF034015

OAE036009

2-18

Safety system of your vehicle

3. Press the head restraint release

button (3) whilst pulling the head

restraint up (4).

To reinstall the head restraint :

1. Recline the seatback.

2. Put the head restraint poles (2) into

the holes whilst pressing the

release button (1).

3. Adjust the head restraint to the

appropriate height.

4. Recline the seatback (4) with the

seatback angle lever or switch (3).

NEVER allow anyone to travel in a

seat with the head restraint

removed.

WARNING

Always make sure the head

restraint locks into position after

reinstalling and adjusting it prop-

erly.

WARNING

OAE036014R

OAE036013R

■ Type A

■ Type B

2-19

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat head restraints

The rear seats are equipped with

head restraints in all the seating

positions for the passenger’s safety

and comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

To remove the head restraint, raise it

as far as it can go then press the

release button (1) whilst pulling the

head restraint up (2).

To reinstall the head restraint, put the

head restraint poles (3) into the holes

whilst pressing the release button

(1). Then adjust it to the appropriate

height.

OPDE036069

Make sure the head restraint

locks in position after adjusting

it to properly protect the occu-

pants.

WARNING

OAE036017 OAE036072L

2-20

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat warmers and air ventila-

tion seats

Front seat warmers (if equipped)

Seat warmers are provided to warm

the seats during cold weather.

To prevent damage to the seat

warmers and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol

or petrol to clean the seats.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmers.

• Do not change the seat cover. It

may damage the seat warmer.

NOTICE

(Continued)

• Fatigued individuals.

• Intoxicated individuals.

• People taking medication that

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness.

NEVER place anything on the

seat that insulates against heat

when the seat warmer is in oper-

ation, such as a blanket or seat

cushion. This may cause the

seat warmer to overheat, caus-

ing a burn or damage to the seat.

WARNING

The seat warmers can cause a

SERIOUS BURN, even at low

temperatures and especially if

used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel

if the seat is becoming too warm

so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect tem-

perature change or pain to the

skin should use extreme cau-

tion, especially the following

types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital

outpatients.

• People with sensitive skin or

who burn easily.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-21

Safety system of your vehicle

Whilst the engine is running, push

either of the switches to warm the dri-

ver's seat or front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

• Each time you push the switch, the

temperature setting of the seat is

changed as follows :

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the seat

warmer operating, the seat warmer

will turn OFF.

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the ignition

switch is placed to the ON position.

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

Front air ventilation seat

(if equipped)

The air ventilation seats are provided

to cool the front seats by blowing air

through small vent holes on the sur-

face of the seat cushions and seat-

backs.

When the operation of the air ventila-

tion seat is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

Whilst the engine is running, push the

switch to cool the driver's seat or the

front passenger's seat (if equipped).

OAE036015R

OAE036016R

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

→

2-22

Safety system of your vehicle

• Each time you push the switch, the

airflow changes as follows:

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the air venti-

lation seat operating, the operation

will turn OFF.

• The air ventilation seats defaults to

the OFF position whenever the

ignition switch is placed to the ON

position.

To prevent damage to the air ven-

tilation seat:

• Use the air ventilation seat ONLY

when the climate control system

is on. Using the air ventilation

seat for prolonged periods of

time with the climate control sys-

tem off could cause the air venti-

lation seat to malfunction.

• Never use a solvent such as paint

thinner, benzene, alcohol or

petrol to clean the seats.

• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-

face of the front seats and seat-

backs;this may cause the air vent

holes to become blocked and not

work properly.

• Do not place materials such as

plastic bags or newspapers under

the seats. They may block the air

intake causing the air vents to not

work properly.

(Continued)

• Do not change the seat covers. It

may damage the air ventilation

seat.

• If the air vents do not operate,

restart the vehicle. If there is no

change, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

NOTICE

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

→

2-23

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

Whilst the engine is running, push

either of the switches to warm the rear

seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

Each time you push the switch, the

temperature setting of the seat is

changed as follows :

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF

position whenever the ignition switch

is placed to the ON position.

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

Battery cooling duct

The hybrid battery cooling duct is

located on the left side of the rear

seats. The cooling duct cools down

the hybrid battery.

When the hybrid battery cooling duct

is blocked, the hybrid battery may be

overheated.Do not obstruct the cool-

ing duct with any other objects.

OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )

→

OAE036023

OAE036024

■ Hybrid vehicle

OAEPH036024

■ Plug-in hybrid vehicle

2-24

Safety system of your vehicle

This section describes how to use the

seat belts properly. It also describes

some of the things not to do when

using seat belts.

Seat belt safety precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and

make sure all passengers have fas-

tened their seat belts before starting

any trip. Air bags (if equipped) are

designed to supplement the seat belt

as an additional safety device, but

they are not a substitute. Most coun-

tries require all occupants of a vehicle

to wear seat belts.

SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS

Seat belts must be used by ALL

passengers whenever the vehi-

cle is moving.Take the following

precautions when adjusting and

wearing seat belts:

• Children under the age of 13

should be properly restrained

in the rear seats.

• Never allow children to ride in

the front passenger seat,

unless the air bag is deacti-

vated. If a child is seated in

the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as

possible and properly restrain

them in the seat.

• NEVER allow an infant or child

to be carried on an occupant’s

lap.

• NEVER ride with the seatback

reclined when the vehicle is

moving.

• Do not allow children to share

a seat or seat belt.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back.

• Never wear a seat belt over

fragile objects.If there is a sud-

den stop or impact, the seat

belt can damage it.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

twisted. A twisted seat belt

will not protect you properly

in an accident.

• Do not use a seat belt if the

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged.

• Do not latch the seat belt into

the buckles of other seats.

• NEVER unfasten the seat belt

whilst driving.This may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Make sure there is nothing in

the buckle interfering with the

seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt

from fastening securely.

(Continued)

2-25

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belt warning light

Seat belt warning

Driver’s seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat

belt warning light will illuminate and

chime for approximately 6 seconds

each time you turn the ignition switch

ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened

after the ignition switch is ON, the

seat belt warning light illuminates

until the belt is fastened.

If you start to drive without fastening

the seatbelt, warning light will contin-

ue to illumiante until you fasten the

seatbelt.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 20km/h the

seat belt warning chime will sound

for approximately 100 seconds and

the corresponding warning light will

blink. (if equipped)

Damaged seat belts and seat

belt assemblies will not operate

properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-

aged webbing.

• Damaged hardware.

• The entire seat belt assembly

after it has been worn in an

accident, even if damage to

webbing or assembly is not

apparent.

WARNING

(Continued)

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the

seat belt adjusting devices

from operating to remove

slack, or prevent the seat belt

assembly from being adjusted

to remove slack.

OAM032161R

2-26

Safety system of your vehicle

Front passenger’s seat belt warning

As a reminder to the front passenger,

the front passenger’s seat belt warn-

ing lights will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you turn

the ignition switch ON regardless of

belt fastening.

If the front passenger’s seat belt is

not fastened when the ignition switch

is turned ON or if it is disconnected

after the ignition switch is turned ON,

the corresponding seat belt warning

light will illuminate until the belt is

fastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 9km/h, the

illuminated warning light will start to

blink until you drive under 6km/h.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 20km/h the

seat belt warning chime will sound for

approximately 100 seconds and the

corresponding warning light will blink.

Information

• You can find the front passenger’s

seat belt warning light on the centre

fascia panel.

• Although the front passenger seat is

not occupied, the seat belt warning

light will blink or illuminate for 6

seconds.

• The front passenger's seat belt

warning may operate when luggage

is placed on the front passenger seat.

Rear passenger’s seat belt warning

If the ignition switch is turned ON

(engine is not running) when the rear

passenger's lap/shoulder belt is not

fastened, the corresponding seat

belt warning light will illuminate until

the belt is fastened.

And then, the rear corresponding

seat belt warning light will illuminate

for approximately 35 seconds, if any

of following occurs;

- You start the engine when the rear

belt is not fastened.

- You drive over 9km/h when the rear

belt is not fastened.

- The rear belt is disconnected when

driving under 20km/h.

Riding in an improper position

adversely affects the front pas-

senger's seat belt warning sys-

tem. It is important for the driv-

er to instruct the passenger to

properly be seated as instruct-

ed in this manual.

WARNING

OTLE035082R OTLE035083R

2-27

Safety system of your vehicle

If the rear seat belt is fastened, the

warning light will turn off immediately.

If the rear seat belt is disconnected

when you drive over the 20km/h, the

corresponding seat belt warning light

will blink and warning chime will

sound for 35 seconds.

But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoul-

der belt is/are connected and discon-

nected twice within 9 seconds after

the belt is fastened, the corresponding

seat belt warning light will not operate.

Seat belt restraint system

Lap/shoulder belt

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull it out of the retractor and insert

the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).

There will be an audible "click" when

the tab locks into the buckle.

You should place the lap belt (1) por-

tion across your hips and the shoul-

der belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to

the proper length after the lap belt

portion is adjusted manually so that it

fits snugly around your hips. If you

lean forward in a slow, easy motion,

the belt will extend and move with

you. If there is a sudden stop or

impact, the belt will lock into position.

It will also lock if you try to lean for-

ward too quickly.

ODH034055R

ODH033053/H

2-28

Safety system of your vehicle

If you are not able to smoothly pull

enough of the seat belt out from

the retractor, firmly pull the seat

belt out and release it. After

release, you will be able to pull the

belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the

shoulder belt anchor to one of the

four different positions for maximum

comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be

adjusted so it lies across your chest

and midway over your shoulder near-

est the door, not over your neck.

NOTICE

OAE036074R

Improperly positioned seat

belts may increase the risk of

serious injury in an accident.

Take the following precautions

when adjusting the seat belt:

• Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possible

across your hips, not on your

waist, so that it fits snugly.

This allows your strong pelvic

bones to absorb the force of

the crash, reducing the

chance of internal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the other over

the belt, as shown in the illus-

tration.

• Always position the shoulder

belt anchor into the locked

position at the appropriate

height.

• Never position the shoulder

belt across your neck or face.

2-29

Safety system of your vehicle

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height

adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1).To lower it, push it down (3) whilst

pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has

locked into position.

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the

locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should

automatically draw back into the

retractor. If this does not happen,

check the belt to be sure it is not twist-

ed, then try again.

Rear centre seatbelt

(3-point rear centre seat belt)

1.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the

buckle (A’) until an audible “click" is

heard, indicating the latch is

locked. Make sure the belt is not

twisted.

OAD035027

■ Front seat

OTLE035084

OAE036068L

2-30

Safety system of your vehicle

2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and

insert it into the buckle (B’) until an

audible “click” is heard, indicating

the latch is locked. Make sure the

belt is not twisted.

When using the rear centre seat belt,

the buckle with the “CENTER” mark

must be used.

Information

If you are not able to pull out the safe-

ty belt from the retractor, firmly pull

the belt out and release it. After

release, you will be able to pull the belt

out smoothly.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's

and front passenger's and rear pas-

senger’s (if equipped) Pre-tensioner

Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner).

The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to

make sure the seat belts fit tightly

against the occupant's body in cer-

tain frontal collisions. The pre-ten-

sioner seat belts may be activated in

crashes where the frontal collision is

severe enough, together with the air

bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

if the occupant tries to lean forward

too quickly, the seat belt retractor will

lock into position. In certain frontal

collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-

vate and pull the seat belt into tighter

contact against the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive tension

on the driver or passenger's seat belt

when the pre-tensioner system acti-

vates, the load limiter (if equipped)

inside the retractor pre-tensioner will

release some of the pressure on the

affected seat belt.

OAE036027

OLMB033039/H

2-31

Safety system of your vehicle

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System

consists mainly of the following com-

ponents.Their locations are shown in

the illustration above:

• Always wear your seat belt and

sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

loose or twisted. A loose or

twisted seat belt will not pro-

tect you properly in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything near the

buckle. This may adversely

affect the buckle and cause it

to function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-ten-

sioners after activation or an

accident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair

or replace the pre-tensioners

yourself.This must be done by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Do not hit the seat belt assem-

blies.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies for several

minutes after they have been

activated. When the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt mechanism

deploys during a collision, the

pre-tensioner can become hot

and can burn you.

WARNING

Body work on the front area of

the vehicle may damage the

pre-tensioner seat belt system.

Therefore, we recommend the

system to be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

OLMB033040/Q/H

OPDE037069

2-32

Safety system of your vehicle

(1) SRS air bag warning light

(2) Front retractor pre-tensioner

(3) SRS control module

(4) Rear retractor pre-tensioner

(if equipped)

The sensor that activates the SRS

control module is connected with

the pre–tensioner seat belts. The

SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds after the

ignition switch is placed in the ON

position,and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working

properly, the warning light will illu-

minate even if the SRS control

module is not malfunctioning. If the

warning light does not illuminate

when the vehicle is turned ON,

stays illuminated or illuminates

when the vehicle is being driven,

we recommend the pre-tensioner

seat belts and/or SRS air bags be

inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer as soon as possible.

Information

• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated in certain frontal or side

collisions.

• The pre-tensioners will be activated

even if the seat belts are not worn at

the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts

are activated, a loud noise may be

heard and fine dust, which may

appear to be smoke, may be visible

in the passenger compartment.

These are normal operating condi-

tions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be inhaled for prolonged periods.

Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-

ed.

Additional seat belt safety pre-

cautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used

during pregnancy. The best way to

protect your unborn child is to protect

yourself by always wearing the seat

belt.

Pregnant women should always wear

a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the

shoulder belt across your chest, rout-

ed between your breasts and away

from your neck. Place the lap belt

below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY

across your hips and pelvic bone,

under the rounded part of the belly.

NOTICE

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to an unborn

child during an accident, preg-

nant women should NEVER

place the lap portion of the seat

belt above or over the area of

the abdomen where the unborn

child is located.

WARNING

2-33

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

Most countries have Child Restraint

System laws which require children to

travel in approved Child Restraint

System devices, including booster

seats.The age at which seat belts can

be used instead of Child Restraint

System differs among countries, so

you should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country, and

where you are travelling. Infant and

Child Restraint System must be prop-

erly placed and installed in a rear seat.

For more information refer to the “Child

Restraint Systems” in this chapter.

Small children are best protected

from injury in an accident when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat by a

Child Restraint System that meets the

requirements of the Safety Standards

of your country. Before buying any

Child Restraint System, make sure

that it has a label certifying that it

meets Safety Standard of your coun-

try. The Child Restraint System must

be appropriate for your child's height

and weight. Check the label on the

Child Restraint System for this informa-

tion. Refer to “Child Restraint Systems”

in this chapter.

ALWAYS properly restrain infants

and small children in a Child

Restraint System appropriate for

the child’s height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to a child and

other passengers, NEVER hold a

child in your lap or arms when

the vehicle is moving.The violent

forces created during an acci-

dent will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the interior of the vehicle.

WARNING

2-34

Safety system of your vehicle

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are

too large for a booster seat should

always occupy the rear seat and use

the available lap/shoulder belts. A

seat belt should lie across the upper

thighs and be snug across the shoul-

der and chest to restrain the child

safely. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt

out of position.In the event of an acci-

dent, children are afforded the best

safety restrained by a proper Child

Restraint System in the rear seats.

If a larger child over age 13 must be

seated in the front seat, the child

must be securely restrained by the

available lap/shoulder belt and the

seat should be placed in the rear-

most position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly

touches the child’s neck or face, try

placing the child closer to the centre

of the vehicle.If the shoulder belt still

touches their face or neck, they need

to be returned to an appropriate

booster seat in the rear seat.

Seat belt use and injured people

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific rec-

ommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

During an accident, you could be

thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

• Always make sure larger chil-

dren’s seat belts are worn and

properly adjusted.

• NEVER allow the shoulder

belt to contact the child’s

neck or face.

• Do not allow more than one

child to use a single seat belt.

WARNING

2-35

Safety system of your vehicle

The more the seat back is reclined,

the greater the chance for the pas-

senger's hips to slide under the lap

belt or the passenger's neck to strike

the shoulder belt.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be

disassembled or modified. In addi-

tion, care should be taken to assure

that seat belts and belt hardware are

not damaged by seat hinges, doors

or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected

periodically for wear or damage of

any kind. Any damaged parts should

be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and

dry. If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and

weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an acci-

dent. This should be done even if no

damage is visible.We recommend that

you consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

• Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

• Driver and passengers should

always sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-36

Safety system of your vehicle

Our recommendation:

Children always in the rear

Children under age 13 should always

ride in the rear seats and must

always be properly restrained to min-

imise the risk of injury in an accident,

sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seats than in the front

seat. Children too large for a Child

Restraint System must use the seat

belts provided.

Most countries have regulations which

require children to travel in approved

Child Restraint Systems.

The laws governing the age or

height/weight restrictions at which seat

belts can be used instead of Child

Restraint System differs among coun-

tries, so you should be aware of the

specific requirements in your country,

and where you are travelling.

Child Restraint Systems must be

properly installed in the vehicle seat.

Always use a commercially available

Child Restraint System that meets the

requirements of your country.

Child Restraint System (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be

restrained in an appropriate rearward-

facing or forward-facing CRS that has

first been properly secured to the seat

of the vehicle. Read and comply with

the instructions for installation and use

provided by the manufacturer of the

Child Restraint System.

CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))

Always properly restrain children

in the vehicle.Children of all ages

are safer when riding in the rear

seats. Never place a rearward-

facing Child Restraint System on

the front passenger seat, unless

the air bag is deactivated.

WARNING

2-37

Safety system of your vehicle

Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a Child Restraint

System for your child, always:

• Make sure the Child Restraint

System has a label certifying that it

meets applicable Safety Standards

of your country.

A Child Restraint System may only

be installed if it was approved in

accordance with the requirements of

ECE-R44 or ECE-R129.

• Select a Child Restraint System

based on your child’s height and

weight. The required label or the

instructions for use typically pro-

vide this information.

• Select a Child Restraint System

that fits the vehicle seating position

where it will be used.

• Read and comply with the warn-

ings and instructions for installation

and use provided with the Child

Restraint System.

Child Restraint System types

There are three main types of Child

Restraint Systems: rearward-facing,

forward-facing and booster Child

Restraint Systems.

They are classified according to the

child’s age, height and weight.

•

Always follow the Child Restraint

System manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

• Always properly restrain your

child in the Child Restraint

System.

• Do not use an infant carrier or

a child safety seat that “hooks”

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate protection in an

accident.

• After an accident, we recom-

mend a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer to check the Child

Restraint System, seat belts,

ISOFIX anchorages and top-

tether anchorages.

WARNING

2-38

Safety system of your vehicle

Rearward-facing Child Restraint

System

A rearward-facing Child Restraint

System provides restraint with the

seating surface against the back of

the child. The harness system holds

the child in place, and in an accident,

acts to keep the child positioned in the

Child Restraint Systems and reduce

the stress to the fragile neck and spinal

cord.

All children under the age of one year

must always ride in a rearward-facing

Child Restraint System.There are dif-

ferent types of rearward-facing Child

Restraint Systems: infant-only Child

Restraint Systems can only be used

rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-

1 Child Restraint Systems typically

have higher height and weight limits

for the rearward-facing position, allow-

ing you to keep your child rearward-

facing for a longer period of time.

Keep using Child Restraint Systems

in the rearward-facing position as long

as children fit within the height and

weight limits allowed by the Child

Restraint System's manufacturer.

Forward-facing Child Restraint

System

A forward-facing Child Restraint System

provides restraint for the child’s body

with a harness.Keep children in a for-

ward-facing Child Restraint System

with a harness until they reach the

top height or weight limit allowed by

your Child Restraint System’s manu-

facturer.

Once your child outgrows the forward-

facing Child Restraint System, your

child is ready for a booster seat.

OAE036028OAE036062

2-39

Safety system of your vehicle

Booster seats

A booster seat is a Child Restraint

System designed to improve the fit of

the vehicle’s seat belt system.A boost-

er seat positions the seat belt so that it

fits properly over the stronger parts of

your child’s body.Keep your children in

booster seats until they are big

enough to fit in a seat belt properly.

For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap

belt must lie comfortable across the

upper thighs, not the stomach. The

shoulder belt should lie comfortable

across the shoulder and chest and

not across the neck or face. Children

under age 13 must always be proper-

ly restrained to minimise the risk of

injury in an accident, sudden stop or

sudden manoeuvre.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

After selecting a proper Child Restraint

System for your child and checking

that the Child Restraint System fits

properly on the seating position, there

are three general steps for a proper

installation:

• Properly secure the Child Restraint

System to the vehicle.

All Child

Restraint Systems must be secured

to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap

part of a lap/shoulder belt or with

the ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX

anchorage and/or with the support

leg.

• Make sure the Child Restraint

System is firmly secured. After

installing a Child Restraint System

to the vehicle, push and pull the

seat forward and from side-to-side

to verify that it is securely attached

to the seat. A Child Restraint

System secured with a seat belt

should be installed as firmly as

possible. However, some side-to-

side movement can be expected.

Before installing your Child

Restraint System always:

Read and follow the instructions

provided by the manufacturer of

the Child Restraint System.

Failure to follow all warnings

and instructions could increase

the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle head restraint pre-

vents proper installation of a

Child Restraint System, the

head restraint of the respective

seating position shall be read-

justed or entirely removed.

WARNING

2-40

Safety system of your vehicle

When installing a Child Restraint

System, adjust the vehicle seat and

seatback (up and down, forward and

rearward) so that your child fits in

the Child Restraint System in a con-

fortable manner.

• Secure the child in the Child

Restraint System. Make sure the

child is properly strapped in the

Child Restraint System according

to the Child Restraint System man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

ISOFIX anchorage and top-teth-

er anchorage (ISOFIX anchorage

system) for children

The ISOFIX system holds a Child

Restraint System during driving and in

an accident.This system is designed to

make installation of the Child Restraint

System easier and reduce the possi-

bility of improperly installing your

Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX

system uses anchors in the vehicle

and attachments on the Child

Restraint System. The ISOFIX sys-

tem eliminates the need to use seat

belts to secure the Child Restraint

System to the rear seats.

ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars

built into the vehicle. There are two

lower anchors for each ISOFIX seat-

ing position that will accommodate a

Child Restraint System with lower

attachments.

To use the ISOFIX system in your vehi-

cle, you must have a Child Restraint

System with ISOFIX attachments.

The Child Restraint System manu-

facturer will provide you with instruc-

tions on how to use the Child

Restraint System with its attach-

ments for the ISOFIX anchorages.

A Child Restraint System in a

closed vehicle can become very

hot.To prevent burns, check the

seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the

Child Restraint System.

CAUTION

2-41

Safety system of your vehicle

ISOFIX anchorages have been pro-

vided in the left and right outboard

rear seating positions.Their locations

are shown in the illustration.

ISOFIX anchorages are located

between the seatback and the seat

cushion of the rear seat left and right

outboard seating positions, indicated

by the symbols .

Do not attempt to install a Child

Restraint System using ISOFIX

anchorages in the rear centre

seating position. There are no

ISOFIX anchorages provided for

this seat.Using the outboard seat

anchorages, for the CRS installa-

tion on the rear centre seating

position, can damage the anchor-

ages.

WARNING

OAE036031

ISOFIX Anchorage

Position Indicator

ISOFIX Anchorage

OAE036063

2-42

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a Child Restraint

System with the “ISOFIX

Anchorage System”

To install an ISOFIX-compatible Child

Restraint System in either of the rear

outboard seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away

from the ISOFIX anchorages.

2. Move any other objects away from

the anchorages that could prevent

a secure connection between the

Child Restraint System and the

ISOFIX anchorages.

3. Place the Child Restraint System

on the vehicle seat, then attach the

seat to the ISOFIX anchorages

according to the instructions provid-

ed by the Child Restraint System

manufacturer.

4. Follow the instructions of the Child

Restraint System's manufacturer

for proper installation and connec-

tion of the ISOFIX attachments on

the Child Restraint System to the

ISOFIX anchorages.

Securing a Child Restraint

System seat with “Top-tether

Anchorage” system

Top-tether anchorages for Child

Restraint Systems are located on the

rear of the seatbacks.

OAE036029

Take the following precautions

when using the ISOFIX system:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your Child Restraint System.

• To prevent the child from reach-

ing and taking hold of unre-

tracted seat belts, buckle all

unused rear seat belts and

retract the seat belt webbing

behind the child. Children can

be strangled if a shoulder belt

becomes wrapped around their

neck and the seat belt tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a

single anchorage. This could

cause the anchor or attach-

ment to come loose or break.

• Always have the ISOFIX sys-

tem inspected by your dealer

after an accident. An accident

can damage the ISOFIX system

and may not properly secure

the Child Restraint System.

WARNING

2-43

Safety system of your vehicle

1. Route the Child Restraint System

top-tether strap over the seatback.

Placing the top tether strap, please

follow the instructions of the Child

Restraint System manufacturer.

2. Connect the top-tether strap to the

top-tether anchorage, then tighten

the top-tether strap according to the

instructions of your Child Restraint

System's manufacturer to firmly

attach the Child Restraint System to

the seat.

OAE036030

Take the following precautions

when installing the top-tether:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your Child Restraint System.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a

single ISOFIX top-tether

anchorage. This could cause

the anchorage or attachment

to come loose or break.

• Do not attach the top-tether to

anything other than the cor-

rect top-tether anchorage. It

may not work properly if

attached to something else.

• Child Restraint System anchor-

ages are designed to withstand

only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted Child Restraint

System.

Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat

belts or harnesses or for attach-

ing other items or equipment to

the vehicle.

WARNING

2-44

Safety system of your vehicle

Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX Forward-Facing Child Restraint Systems of

universal category approved for use in the mass group.

IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems given in the

attached list.These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific vehicle",

"restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.

X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX Child Restraint System in

this mass group and/or this size class.

* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost

position of the passenger seat.

* ISOFIX Child Restraint System size classes and fixtures

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

(height 720mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint

System (height 650mm)

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape

Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System

F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

Mass Group Size Class Fixture

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

Front Passenger

Rear Outboard

(Left)

Rear Outboard

(Right)

Rear Centre

Carrycot

F ISO/L1 - X X -

G ISO/L2 - X X -

0 : UP to 10kg E ISO/R1 - IL IL -

0+ : UP to 13kg

E ISO/R1 - IL IL -

D ISO/R2 - IL IL -

C ISO/R3 - IL IL -

I : 9 to 18kg

D ISO/R2 - IL IL -

C ISO/R3 - IL IL -

B ISO/F2 - IUF + IL IUF + IL -

B1 ISO/F2X - IUF + IL IUF + IL -

A ISO/F3 - IUF + IL IUF + IL -

2-45

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a Child Restraint

System with a lap/shoulder belt

When not using the ISOFIX system,

all Child Restraint Systems must be

secured to a rear seat with the lap

part of a lap/shoulder belt.

Installing a Child Restraint System

with a lap/shoulder belt

To install a Child Restraint System

on the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the Child Restraint System

on a rear seat and route the lap/

shoulder belt around or through the

Child Restraint System, following

the Child Restraint System manu-

facturer’s instructions.

Make sure the seat belt webbing is

not twisted.

Information

When using the rear centre seat belt,

you should also refer to the “3-point

Rear Centre Seat Belt” in this chapter.

OLMB033044

2-46

Safety system of your vehicle

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch

into the buckle. Listen for the dis-

tinct “click” sound.

Information

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Remove as much slack from the

belt as possible by pushing down

on the Child Restraint System

whilst feeding the shoulder belt

back into the retractor.

4. Push and pull on the Child Restraint

System to confirm that the seat belt

is holding it firmly in place.

If your Child Restraint System manu-

facturer recommends the use of a

top-tether with the lap/shoulder belt,

see page 2-42.

To remove the Child Restraint System,

press the release button on the buckle

and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out

of the Child Restraint System and

allow the seat belt to retract fully.

OLMB033045

OLMB033046

2-47

Safety system of your vehicle

Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to

ECE regulations

Mass Group

Seating Position

Front Passenger Second Row

Airbag

activated

Airbag

deactivated

Outboard

Left

Centre

(3-point seat belt)

Outboard

Right

Group 0

(0-9months)

up to 10kg X U* U U U

Group 0 +

(0-2years)

up to 13kg X U* U U U

Group I

(9months-4years)

9 to 18kg X U* U U U

Group II

(15 to 25kg)

15 to 25kg UF U* U U U

Group III

(22 to 36kg)

22 to 36kg UF U* U U U

U = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group.

U* = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group (If front passenger seat is not

adjustable for the height, you should adjust the seat to upward properly. (This step is necessary to restrain child seat to your

vehicle.)

❈ Height adjutable device of Front passenger seat is an optional feature.

UF = Suitable for forward facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

L = Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or

"semi-universal" categories.

B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.

2-48

Safety system of your vehicle

i-Size Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations

i-U : Suitable for i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems forward and rearward-facing

i-UF : Suitable for forward-facing i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems only

X : Seat position not suitable for i-size CRS.

Mass Group

Seating Position

Front passenger

Outboard

Second Row

Outboard

Left

Centre

Outboard

Right

i-size Child Restraint Systems X i-U X i-U

Recommended child restraint system

CRS Manufacturer information

Maxi Cosi Cabriofix & Familyfix http://www.maxi-cosi.com

Britax Römmer http://www.britax.com

Mass Group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation

ECE-R44

Approval No.

Group 0+ Cabriofix & Familyfix Maxi Cosi Rearward-facing with ISOFIX E4 04443907

Group I Duo Plus Britax Römer Forward-facing with ISOFIX and top-tether E1 04301133

Group II KidFix II XP

Britax Römer

Forward-facing with ISOFIX and vehicle Belt E1 04301323

Group III KidFix II XP

Britax Römer

Forward-facing with ISOFIX and vehicle Belt E1 04301323

2-49

Safety system of your vehicle

AAIIRR BBAAGG -- SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAE036035R/OAE036073R

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver’s front air bag

2. Passenger’s front air bag

3. Side air bag*

4. Curtain air bag*

5. Knee air bag

6. Front passenger air bag ON/OFF

switch*

* : if equipped

2-50

Safety system of your vehicle

The vehicles are equipped with a

Supplemental Air Bag System for the

driver’s seat and front passenger’s

seats.

The front air bags are designed to

supplement the three-point seat

belts. For these air bags to provide

protection, the seat belts must be

worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed

in an accident if you are not wearing

a seat belt. Air bags are designed to

supplement seat belts, but do not

replace them. Also, air bags are not

designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are

the only restraint protecting you.

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts Child Restraint Systems - every trip, every

time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your

seat belt when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any Child Restraint System or booster seat in

the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.

An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing

serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the

safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older

must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-

tion, centred on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked

and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during

an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags or lean against the door or centre console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, whilst still

maintaining control of the vehicle.

WARNING

2-51

Safety system of your vehicle

Where are the air bags?

Driver’s and passenger’s front

air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both

the driver and passenger seating

positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which

are located in the centre of the steer-

ing wheel, in the driver’s side lower

crash pad below the steering wheel,

and the passenger's side front panel

pad above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide

the vehicle's driver and front passen-

gers with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt system

alone in case of a frontal impact of

sufficient severity.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from inflating front

air bags, take the following pre-

cautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as

possible from front air bags,

whilst still maintaining control

of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE036032R

OAE036033R

■ Driver’s front air bag

■ Driver’s knee air bag

OAE036034R

■ Passenger’s front air bag

2-52

Safety system of your vehicle

Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch (if equipped)

The purpose of the switch is to dis-

able the passenger’s front air bag in

order to transport occupants who are

at increased risk for air bag-related

injury due to age, size, or medical

condition.

To deactivate the passenger’s front

air bag:

Insert the key or a similar rigid device

into the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch and turn it to the

OFF position.The passenger air bag

OFF indicator ( ) will illuminate and

stay on until the passenger’s front air

bag is reactivated.

OAE036073R OAE036070L

(Continued)

• Never lean against the door or

centre console.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs on

the dashboard.

• No objects (such as crash pad

cover, mobile phone holder,

cup holder, perfume or stickers)

should be placed over or near

the air bag modules on the

steering wheel, instrument

panel, windscreen glass, and

the front passenger's panel

above the glove box. Such

objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a crash severe

enough to cause the air bags to

deploy.

• Do not attach any objects on

the front windscreen and inside

mirror.

2-53

Safety system of your vehicle

To reactivate the passenger’s front

air bag:

Insert the key or a similar rigid device

into the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON

position. The passenger air bag ON

indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay

on for 60 seconds.

Information

The passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

Never allow an adult passenger

to ride in the front passenger

seat when the passenger air

bag OFF indicator is illuminat-

ed. During a collision, the air

bag will not inflate if the indica-

tor is illuminated. Turn on the

passenger’s front air bag or

have your passenger move to

the rear seat.

WARNING

If the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch malfunctions,

the following conditions may

occur:

• The air bag warning light ( )

on the instrument panel will

illuminate.

• The passenger air bag OFF

indicator ( ) will not illumi-

nate and the ON indicator ( )

will come on and go off after

approximately 60 seconds.

The passenger’s front air bag

will inflate in a frontal impact

even though the passenger’s

front air bag ON/OFF switch is

set to the OFF position.

• We recommend that a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

inspect the passenger’s front

air bag ON/OFF switch and the

SRS air bag system as soon as

possible.

WARNING

OAE036069L

2-54

Safety system of your vehicle

Side air bags (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air

bag in each front seat.The purpose of

the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s

driver and the front passenger with

additional protection than that offered

by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side impact col-

lisions, depending on the crash

severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

The side air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

side air bag, take the following

precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and seats.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE036037

OAE036038

(Continued)

• Hold the steering wheel at the 9

o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,

to minimise the risk of injuries

to your hands and arms.

• Do not use any accessory

seat covers.This could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness

of the system.

• Do not hang other objects

except clothes. In an accident

it may cause vehicle damage

or personal injury especially

when airbag is inflated.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag or between the air

bag and yourself. Also, do not

attach any objects around the

area the air bag inflates such

as the door, side door glass,

front and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects

between the door and the

seat. They may become dan-

gerous projectiles if the side

air bag inflates.

(Continued)

2-55

Safety system of your vehicle

Curtain air bags (if equipped)

Curtain air bags are located along

both sides of the roof rails above the

front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants

and the rear outboard seat occupants

in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash

severity, angle, speed and impact.

The curtain air bags are not designed

to deploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

• Do not install any accessories

on the side or near the side air

bags.

• Do not put any objects

between the side airbag label

and seat cushion. It could

cause harm if the vehicle is in

a crash severe enough to

cause the air bags to deploy.

• Do not cause impact to the

doors when the ignition switch

is in the ON position or this

may cause the side air bags to

inflate.

• If the seat or seat cover is

damaged, we recommend that

the system be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OAE036041

OAE036042

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

curtain air bag, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• All seat occupants must wear

seat belts at all times to help

keep occupants positioned

properly.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-56

Safety system of your vehicle

How does the air bags system

operate?

The SRS consists of the following

components:

(1) Driver's front air bag module/

Driver's knee air bag module

(2) Passenger's front air bag module

(3) Side air bag modules/

Side impact sensors

(4) Curtain air bag modules

(5) Front retractor pre-tensioner/

Rear retractor pre-tensioner

assemblies (if equipped)

(6) Air bag warning light

(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)

(8) Front impact sensors

(9) Side pressure sensors

(10) Passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF indicator

(front passenger's seat only)

(11) Passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components whilst the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require

air bag deployment or pre-tensioner

seat belt deployment.

(Continued)

• Properly secure Child Restraint

System as far away from the

door as possible.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag. Also, do not attach

any objects around the area the

air bag inflates such as the

door, side door glass, front and

rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang other objects

except clothes, especially

hard or breakable objects. In

an accident, it may cause

vehicle damage or personal

injury.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies

onto doors, put their arms on

the doors, stretch their arms

out of the window, or place

objects between the doors

and seats.

• Do not open or repair the side

curtain air bags.

OAEE036061R

2-57

Safety system of your vehicle

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint

System) air bag warning light on the

instrument panel displays the air bag

symbol depicted in the illustration.The

system checks the air bag electrical

system for malfunctions.The light indi-

cates that there is a potential problem

with your air bag system.

During a moderate to severe frontal

collision, sensors will detect the vehi-

cle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of

deceleration is high enough, the con-

trol unit will inflate the front air bags,

at the time and with the force needed.

The front air bags help protect the driv-

er and front passenger by responding

to frontal impacts in which seat belts

alone cannot provide adequate

restraint. When needed, the side air

bags help provide protection in the

event of a side impact or rollover by

supporting the side upper body area.

• Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-

tain frontal or side collisions to help

protect the occupants from serious

physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which

the air bags will inflate. Generally,

air bags are designed to inflate

based upon the severity of a colli-

sion and its direction. These two

factors determine whether the sen-

sors produce an electronic deploy-

ment/inflation signal.

If your SRS malfunctions, the

air bag may not inflate properly

during an accident increasing

the risk of serious injury or

death.

If any of the following condi-

tions occur, your SRS is mal-

functioning:

• The light does not turn on for

approximately six seconds

when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

• The light stays on after illumi-

nating for approximately six

seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the

engine is running.

We recommend that a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer inspect the

SRS as soon as possible if any

of these conditions occur.

WARNING

2-58

Safety system of your vehicle

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the

density and stiffness of the vehicles

or objects which your vehicle

impacts during a collision. The

determining factors are not limited

to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant. It is

virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an acci-

dent. It is much more likely that you

will simply see the deflated air bags

hanging out of their storage com-

partments after the collision.

• To help provide protection, the air

bags must inflate rapidly.The speed

of air bag inflation is a consequence

of extremely short time in which to

inflate the air bag between the

occupant and the vehicle structures

before the occupant impacts those

structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries and is thus a

necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation

can also cause injuries which can

include facial abrasions, bruises

and broken bones because the

inflation speed also causes the air

bags to expand with a great deal of

force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the air

bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-

cially if the occupant is positioned

excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to reduce the risk

of being injured by an inflating air

bag. The greatest risk is sitting too

close to the air bag.An air bag needs

space to inflate. It is recommended

that drivers sit as far as possible

between the centre of the steering

wheel and the chest whilst still main-

taining control of the vehicle.

2-59

Safety system of your vehicle

When the SRSCM detects a suffi-

ciently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically

deploy the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-

ed directly into the pad covers will

separate under pressure from the

expansion of the air bags. Further

opening of the covers allows full

inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-

tion with a properly worn seat belt,

slows the driver's or the front pas-

senger's forward motion, reducing

the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling

the driver to maintain forward visibili-

ty and the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

OLMB033055/H

■ Driver’s front air bag (2)

OLMB033056/H

■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

OLMB033057/H

■ Passenger’s front air bag

OLMB033054/H

■ Driver’s front air bag (1)

2-60

Safety system of your vehicle

What to expect after an air bag

inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates,

it will deflate very quickly. Air bag

inflation will not prevent the driver

from seeing out of the windscreen or

being able to steer. Curtain air bags

may remain partially inflated for

some time after they deploy.

After an air bag inflates, take

the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors

as soon as possible after

impact to reduce prolonged

exposure to the smoke and

powder released by the inflat-

ing air bag.

• Do not touch the air bag stor-

age area’s internal compo-

nents immediately after an air

bag has inflated. The parts

that come into contact with an

inflating air bag may be very

hot.

• Always wash exposed skin

areas thoroughly with cold

water and mild soap.

• We recommend that a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

replace the air bag immediately

after deployment. Air bags are

designed to be used only once.

WARNING

To prevent objects from becom-

ing dangerous projectiles when

the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any

objects (drink holder, CD hold-

er, stickers, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box where the passen-

ger's air bag is located.

• Do not install a container of

liquid air freshener near the

instrument cluster or on the

instrument panel surface.

WARNING

2-61

Safety system of your vehicle

Noise and smoke from inflating

air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make

a loud noise and may produce smoke

and powder in the air inside of the

vehicle.This is normal and is a result

of the ignition of the air bag inflator.

After the air bag inflates, you may feel

substantial discomfort in breathing

because of the contact of your chest

with both the seat belt and the air

bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. The powder may

aggravate asthma for some people. If

you experience breathing problems

after an air bag deployment, seek

medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are

nontoxic, they may cause irritation to

the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc.If this

is the case, wash and rinse with cold

water immediately and seek medical

attention if the symptoms persist.

Do not install a Child Restraint

System on the front passenger

seat

Never install a Child Restraint System

in the front passenger seat, unless the

air bag is deactivated

OYDESA2042

OLM034310

■ Type A

■ Type B

NEVER use a rearward facing

Child Restraint on a seat pro-

tected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in

front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS

INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

WARNING

2-62

Safety system of your vehicle

Why didn’t my air bag go off in

a collision?

There are certain types of accidents

in which the air bag would not be

expected to provide additional protec-

tion.These include rear impacts, sec-

ond or third collisions in multiple

impact accidents, as well as low

speed impacts.Damage to the vehicle

indicates a collision energy absorp-

tion, and is not an indicator of whether

or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

To reduce the risk of an air bag

deploying unexpectedly and

causing serious injury or death:

•

Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

• Do not perform maintenance

on or around the air bag sen-

sors.If the location or angle of

the sensors is altered, the air

bags may deploy when they

should not or may not deploy

when they should.

• Do not install bumper guards

or replace the bumper with a

non-genuine part. This may

adversely affect the collision

and air bag deployment per-

formance.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Place the ignition switch to

the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-

tion, when the vehicle is being

towed to prevent inadvertent

air bag deployment.

• We recommend that all air bag

repairs are conducted by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

2-63

Safety system of your vehicle

1. SRS control module*

2. Front impact sensor*

3. Side pressure sensor (front)*

4. Side impact sensor (B-pillar)*

* : if equipped

OAE036043R/OAE036044R/OAE036045R/OAE036046R/OAE036047R

2-64

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate

in a frontal collision depending on

the severity, speed or angles of

impact of the front collision.

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the severity, speed or

angles of impact resulting from a

side impact collision.

Although the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s air bags are designed to

inflate in frontal collisions, they also

may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors

detect a sufficient impact. Side and

curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in side impact collisions, but

they may inflate in other collisions if

the side impact sensors detect a suf-

ficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on

surfaces not designed for vehicle

traffic to prevent unintended air bag

deployment.

OAE036049

OAE036050

OAE036048

2-65

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag non-inflation conditions

In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags

are designed not to deploy in such

cases because they may not provide

benefits beyond the protection of the

seat belts.

Front air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because

occupants are moved backward by

the force of the impact. In this case,

inflated air bags would not provide

any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move in the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, front air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags

may inflate depending on the severity,

vehicle speed and angles of impact.

OAE036052

OAE036051

OAE036053

2-66

Safety system of your vehicle

In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would

not be able to provide any additional

benefit, and thus the sensors may

not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often

brake heavily. Such heavy braking

lowers the front portion of the vehicle

causing it to “ride” under a vehicle

with a higher ground clearance. Air

bags may not inflate in this "under-

ride" situation because deceleration

forces that are detected by sensors

may be significantly reduced by such

“underride” collisions.

Front air bags may not inflate in

rollover accidents because front air

bag deployment would not provide

additional occupant protection.

Information

The side and/or curtain air bags may

inflate when the vehicle is rolled over

by a side impact collision, if the vehi-

cle is equipped with side and/or cur-

tain air bags.

OAE036061 OAE036054 OAE036055

2-67

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated and the colli-

sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-

cle structure.

SRS care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-

free and there are no parts you can

safely service by yourself. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illumi-

nate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position, or continuously remains

on, we recommend that the system

be immediately inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

We recommend any work on the SRS

system, such as removing, installing,

repairing, or any work on the steering

wheel, the front passenger's panel,

front seats and roof rails be performed

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Improper handling of the SRS system

may result in serious personal injury.

OAE036056

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death take the follow-

ing precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or

disconnect the SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including the

addition of any kind of badges

to the pad covers or modifica-

tions to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or

near the air bag modules on the

steering wheel, instrument

panel,and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box.

• Clean the air bag pad covers

with a soft cloth moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

• We recommend that inflated

air bags be replaced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-68

Safety system of your vehicle

Additional safety precautions

Passengers should not move out of

or change seats whilst the vehicle

is moving. A passenger who is not

wearing a seat belt during a crash or

emergency stop can be thrown

against the inside of the vehicle,

against other occupants, or be ejected

from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

seat belt can reduce the protection

provided by the seat belt and increase

the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the opera-

tion of the supplemental restraint sys-

tem sensing components and wiring

harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the ignition

switch is in the ON position may cause

the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

• If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, or if

the vehicle must be scrapped,

certain safety precautions must

be observed. We recommend

that you consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer for the nec-

ess

ary information. Failure to

follow these precautions could

increase the risk of personal

injury.

2-69

Safety system of your vehicle

Adding equipment to or modify-

ing your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

Air bag warning labels

Air bag warning labels are attached

to alert the passengers of potential

risks of the air bag system.

Be sure to read all of the information

about the air bags that are installed on

your vehicle in this Owner’s Manual.

OAE036060

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4

Remote key.........................................................................3-4

Smart key ............................................................................3-7

Immobiliser system .........................................................3-11

Door locks.............................................................3-12

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ......3-12

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle .........3-14

Deadlocks..........................................................................3-15

Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-16

Child-protector rear door locks..................................3-16

Theft-alarm system.............................................3-17

Driver position memory system.........................3-18

Storing memory positions.............................................3-18

Recalling memory positions..........................................3-19

Easy access function .....................................................3-19

Steering wheel......................................................3-20

Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-20

Tilt steering / Telescopic steering..............................3-21

Heated steering wheel...................................................3-21

Horn....................................................................................3-22

Mirrors...................................................................3-22

Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-22

Outside rearview mirror ................................................3-24

Windows ................................................................3-27

Power windows................................................................3-27

Sunroof..................................................................3-31

Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-32

Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-32

Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-33

Sunshade...........................................................................3-34

Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-34

Exterior features .................................................3-35

Bonnet................................................................................3-35

Tailgate...............................................................................3-37

Fuel filler door (Hybrid vehicle) ..................................3-38

Fuel filler door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ...................3-41

Instrument cluster................................................3-44

Instrument cluster control ............................................3-46

Gauges and meters.........................................................3-47

Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-53

LCD display messages....................................................3-65

LCD display ...........................................................3-80

LCD display control.........................................................3-80

LCD display modes (for cluster type A) ....................3-81

LCD display modes (for cluster type B) ....................3-90

Trip computer (hybrid vehicle) ..........................3-97

Trip computer (plug-in hybrid vehicle) ..........3-102

Light.....................................................................3-108

Exterior lights ................................................................3-108

Welcome system ...........................................................3-113

Interior lights..................................................................3-115

Wipers and washers ..........................................3-118

Windscreen wipers .......................................................3-118

Windscreen washers ....................................................3-120

Driver Assist System .........................................3-121

Rear view monitor ........................................................3-121

Parking distance warning (Reverse) system..........3-122

Parking distance warning (Reverse/Forward)

system..............................................................................3-124

Automatic climate control system...................3-128

Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-129

Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-130

System operation..........................................................3-137

System maintenance....................................................3-139

Windscreen defrosting and defogging...........3-142

Automatic climate control system ............................3-142

Defogging logic..............................................................3-143

Auto defogging system ...............................................3-144

Defroster.........................................................................3-145

Climate control additional features.................3-146

Automatic ventilation ...................................................3-146

Sunroof inside air recirculation.................................3-146

Storage compartment........................................3-147

Centre console storage ...............................................3-147

Glove box ........................................................................3-147

Sunglass holder .............................................................3-148

Multi box .........................................................................3-148

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior features.................................................3-149

Ashtray ............................................................................3-149

Cup holder.......................................................................3-149

Sunvisor...........................................................................3-150

Power outlet...................................................................3-151

Wireless mobile phone charging system ................3-152

Cigarette lighter ............................................................3-154

Clock.................................................................................3-154

Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-155

Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................3-155

Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-156

3-4

Convenient features of your vehicle

Remote key (if equipped)

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

a door (and tailgate) and even start

the engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3.Tailgate Unlock

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine bonnet

and tailgate.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on

the remote key.

3.The doors will lock. The hazard

warning lights will blink. Also, the

outside rearview mirror will fold, if

the outside rearview mirror folding

switch is in the AUTO position (if

equipped).

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)

on the remote key.

2.The doors will unlock. The hazard

warning lights will blink two times.

Also, the outside rearview mirror

will unfold, if the outside rearview

mirror folding switch is in the

AUTO position (if equipped).

Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE

Do not leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren. Unattended children

could place the key in the igni-

tion switch and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

OHG040006L

3-5

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tailgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Tailgate Unlock button

(3) on the remote key for more

than one second.

2.The hazard warning lights will

blink two times. Once the tailgate

is opened and then closed, the

tailgate will lock automatically.

Information

• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-

gate will lock automatically.

• The word "HOLD" is written on the

button to inform you that you must

press and hold the button for more

than one second.

Start-up

For detailed information refer to “Key

Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.

To prevent damaging the remote

key:

• Keep the remote key away from

water or any liquid and fire. If the

inside of the remote key gets

damp (due to drinks or mois-

ture), or is heated, internal cir-

cuit may malfunction and may

void the vehicle warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

remote key.

• Protect the remote key from

extreme temperatures.

Mechanical key

If the remote key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the key, press the release

button then the key will unfold auto-

matically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually

whilst pressing the release button.

Do not fold the key without press-

ing the release button. This may

damage the key.

NOTICE

OAE046002L

3-6

Remote key precautions

The remote key may not work if any

of the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).

• The remote key battery is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The remote key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the remote

key.

When the remote key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have a

problem with the remote key, it is rec-

ommended that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the remote key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal could

be blocked by your mobile phone's

normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the remote key and your

mobile phone in the same location

and always try to maintain an ade-

quate distance between the two

devices.

Information

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment. If

the keyless entry system is inoperative

due to changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will not

be covered by your manufacturer’s

vehicle warranty.

Keep the remote key away from

electromagnetic materials that

block electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the cover.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

remote key.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

OLM042302

3-7

Convenient features of your vehicle

If you suspect your remote key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your remote key is not work-

ing correctly, it is recommended that

you contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose of the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulations.

Smart key (if equipped)

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

a door (and tailgate) and even start

the engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3.Tailgate Unlock

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine bonnet

and tailgate.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Lock button

(1) on the smart key.

3.The hazard warning lights will

blink. Also, the outside rearview

mirror will fold, if the outside

rearview mirror folding switch is in

the AUTO position (if equipped).

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

OBA043222IN OAE046001/H

3-8

Information

The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is within

0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside

door handle.

Even though you press the outside

door handle button, the doors will not

lock and the chime will sound for

three seconds if any of the following

occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

• Any door except the tailgate is

open.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Unlock but-

ton (2) on the smart key.

3.The doors will unlock. The hazard

warning lights will blink two times.

Also, the outside rearview mirror

will unfold, if the outside rearview

mirror folding switch is in the AUTO

position. (if equipped)

Information

• The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is with-

in 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the out-

side door handle. Other people can

also open the doors without the

smart key in possession.

• After unlocking the doors, the doors

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

Tailgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the tailgate handle

button or press the Tailgate Unlock

button (3) on the smart key for

more than one second.

3.The hazard warning lights will

blink two times.

Once the tailgate is opened and then

closed, the tailgate will lock automat-

ically.

Information

After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-

gate will lock automatically after 30

seconds unless the tailgate is opened.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Do not leave the Smart Key in

your vehicle with unsupervised

children. Unattended children

could press the Engine Start/

Stop button and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

OAE046001/H

3-9

Convenient features of your vehicle

Start-up

You can start the engine without

inserting the key. For detailed infor-

mation refer to the Engine

Start/Stop button in chapter 5.

To prevent damaging the smart

key:

• Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid and fire. If the

inside of the smart key gets

damp (due to drinks or moisture),

or is heated, internal circuit may

malfunction and may void the

vehicle warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

smart key.

• Protect the smart key from

extreme temperatures.

Always have the smart key with

you when leaving the vehicle. If

the smart key is left near the vehi-

cle, the vehicle battery may be dis-

charged.

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

Press and hold the release button (1)

and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the

key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put

the key into the hole and push it until

a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two smart keys can

be registered to a single vehicle. If

you happen to lose your smart key, it

is recommended that you should

immediately take the vehicle and

remaining key to your HYUNDAI

authorised repairer or tow the vehi-

cle, if necessary.

NOTICE

OAE046034L

3-10

Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart key precautions

The smart key may not work if any of

the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the smart

key.

• The smart key is near a mobile two

way radio system or a mobile

phone.

• Another vehicle’s smart key is

being operated close to your vehi-

cle.

When the smart key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the smart key, it is

recommended that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the smart key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your

mobile phone in the same location and

always try to maintain an adequate dis-

tance between the two devices.

Information

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment. If

the keyless entry system is inoperative

due to changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will not

be covered by your manufacturer’s

vehicle warranty.

Keep the smart key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Battery replacement

If the Smart Key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the mechanical key.

2. Use a slim tool to pry open the

rear cover of the smart key.

3. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

4. Reinstall the rear cover of the

smart key.

NOTICE

OLF044008

3-11

Convenient features of your vehicle

If you suspect your smart key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your smart key is not work-

ing correctly, it is recommended that

you contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human health.

Dispose of the battery according

to your local law(s) or regula-

tions.

Immobiliser system

The immobiliser system protects

your vehicle from theft. If an improp-

erly coded key (or other device) is

used, the engine’s fuel system is dis-

abled.

When the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the immobiliser sys-

tem indicator should come on briefly,

then go off. If the indicator starts to

blink, the system does not recognise

the coding of the key.

Place the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, then place the

ignition switch to the ON position

again.

The system may not recognise your

key’s coding if another immobiliser

key or other metal object (i.e., key

chain) is near the key. The engine

may not start because the metal may

interrupt the transponder signal from

transmitting normally.

If the system repeatedly does not

recognise the coding of the key, it is

recommended that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your vehicle inoperable.

The transponder in your key is an

important part of the immobiliser

system. It is designed to give

years of trouble-free service, how-

ever you should avoid exposure to

moisture, static electricity and

rough handling. Immobiliser sys-

tem malfunction could occur.

NOTICE

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobiliser password is a cus-

tomer unique password and

should be kept confidential.

WARNING

3-12

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS

Convenient features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from

outside the vehicle

Mechanical key

Smart key

To remove the cover:

1. Pull out the door handle (1).

2. Press the lock (2) located inside

the bottom part of the cover with a

key or flat-head screwdriver.

3. Push out the cover whilst pressing

the lock.

To install the cover:

1. Pull out the door handle.

2. Install the cover.

Remote key and Smart key

After removing the cover, turn the

key toward the front of the vehicle to

unlock and toward the rear of the

vehicle to lock.

If you lock/unlock the driver's door

with a key, all vehicle doors will

lock/unlock automatically.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Remote key

To lock the doors, press the Door

Lock button (1) on the remote key.

To unlock the doors, press the Door

Unlock button (2) on the remote key.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

OHG040006L

OAEE047188R

■ Smart key

3-13

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operat-

ing temporarily in order to protect

the circuit and prevent damage to

system components.

Smart key

To lock the doors, press the button on

the outside door handle whilst carry-

ing the smart key with you or press

the door lock button on the smart key.

To unlock the doors, press the button

on the outside door handle whilst

carrying the smart key with you or

press the door unlock button on the

smart key.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operat-

ing temporarily in order to protect

the circuit and prevent damage to

system components.

OAE046001/H

OBA043224IN

3-14

Convenient features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from

inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, pull the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position.

The red mark (2) on the door lock

button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Lock” position. If

the door is locked properly, the red

mark (2) on the door lock button

will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-

dle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the dri-

ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is

pulled when the door lock button is

in the lock position, the button is

unlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

key is in the ignition switch and any

front door is open (if equipped with

remote key).

• Doors cannot be locked if the

smart key is in the vehicle and any

door is open (if equipped with

smart key).

Information

If a power door lock ever fails to func-

tion whilst you are in the vehicle try

one or more of the following tech-

niques to exit:

Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and manu-

al) whilst simultaneously pulling on

the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and han-

dles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the

mechanical key to unlock the door

from outside.

With the central door lock

switch

When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of

the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch

and any door is opened, the doors

will not lock even though the lock

button (1) of the central door lock

switch is pressed.

• If the smart key is in the vehicle

and any door is opened, the doors

will not lock even though the lock

button (1) of the central door lock

switch is pressed.

When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of

the switch, all vehicle doors will

unlock.

OAE046005R

OAE046004R

3-15

Convenient features of your vehicle

Deadlocks (if equipped)

Some vehicles are equipped with a

deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent

opening of a door from either inside

or outside the vehicle once the dead-

locks have been activated providing

an additional measure of vehicle

security.

To lock the vehicle using the dead-

lock function, the doors must be

locked by using the remote key or

smart key. To unlock the vehicle, the

remote key or smart key must be

used again.

• The doors should always be

fully closed and locked whilst

the vehicle is in motion. If the

doors are unlocked, the risk of

being thrown from the vehicle

in a crash is increased.

• Do not pull the inner door han-

dle of driver's or passenger's

door whilst the vehicle is mov-

ing.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals

unattended in your vehicle. An

enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

serious injury to unattended

children or animals who cannot

escape the vehicle. Children

might operate features of the

vehicle that could injure them,

or they could encounter other

harm, possibly from someone

gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle

Leaving your vehicle unlocked

can allow theft or entry into the

vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, whilst

depressing the brake, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, engage the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in

the LOCK/OFF position, close

all windows, lock all doors, and

always take the key with you.

WARNING

Opening a door when something

is approaching may cause dam-

age or injury. Be careful when

opening doors and watch for

vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles

or pedestrians approaching the

vehicle in the path of the door.

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a

long time whilst the weather is

very hot or cold, there are risks

of injuries or danger to life. Do

not lock the vehicle from the out-

side when someone is in the

vehicle.

WARNING

3-16

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto door lock/unlock features

Impact sensing door unlock

system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically

unlocked when an impact causes the

air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system

(if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked

when vehicle speed exceeds 15

km/h (9 mph).

You can activate or deactivate the

Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from

the User Settings Mode on the LCD

display. For more information, refer

to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Child-protector rear door locks

The child safety lock is provided to

help prevent children seated in the

rear from accidentally opening the

rear doors.The rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on

the edge of each rear door.When the

child safety lock is in the lock posi-

tion, the rear door will not open if the

inner door handle is pulled.

To lock the child safety lock, insert a

key (or screwdriver) (1) into the hole

and turn it to the lock position.

To allow a rear door to be opened

from inside the vehicle, unlock the

child safety lock.

OAE046006L

If children accidently open the

rear doors whilst the vehicle is

in motion, they could fall out of

the vehicle.The rear door safety

locks should always be used

whenever children are in the

vehicle.

WARNING

Do not lock the doors with the

remote key or the smart key

with anybody left in the vehicle.

The passenger in the vehicle

cannot unlock the doors with

the door lock button. For exam-

ple, if the door is locked with

the remote key, the passenger

in the vehicle cannot unlock the

door without the remote key.

WARNING

3-17

Convenient features of your vehicle

This system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables. The horn will

sound and the hazard warning lights

will blink continuously if any of the

following occur:

- A door is opened without using the

remote key or smart key.

- The tailgate is opened without

using the remote key or smart key.

- The engine bonnet is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds,

then the system resets. To turn off

the alarm, unlock the doors with the

remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automati-

cally sets 30 seconds after you lock

the doors and the tailgate. For the

system to activate, you must lock the

doors and the tailgate from outside

the vehicle with the remote key or

smart key or by pressing the button

on the outside of the door handles

with the smart key in your posses-

sion.

The hazard warning lights will blink

once to indicate the system is

armed.

Once the security system is set, open-

ing any door, the tailgate, or the bon-

net without using the remote key or

smart key will cause the alarm to acti-

vate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if

the bonnet, the tailgate, or any door

is not fully closed. If the system will

not set, check the bonnet, the tail-

gate, or the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it.

Information

• Do not lock the doors until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

remaining passenger leaves the

vehicle when the system is armed,

the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with

the remote key or smart key, open

the doors by using the mechanical

key and place the ignition switch in

the ON position (for remote key) or

start the engine (for smart key) and

wait for 30 seconds.

• When the system is disarmed but a

door or tailgate is not opened within

30 seconds, the system will be

rearmed.

Information

Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm

system will have a label attached to

the vehicle with the following words:

1. WARNING

2. SECURITY SYSTEM

TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM

OJC040170

3-18

Convenient features of your vehicle

The Driver Position Memory System

is provided to store and recall the fol-

lowing memory settings with a sim-

ple button operation.

- Driver's seat position

- Outside rearview mirror position

- Instrument panel illumination intensity

Information

• If the battery is disconnected, the

memory settings will be erased.

• If the Driver Position Memory

System does not operate normally,

we recommend that you have the

system checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Storing memory positions

1. Move the shift lever into P whilst

the ignition switch or the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion.

2. Adjust the driver's seat position,

outside rearview mirror position

and instrument panel illumination

intensity to the desired position.

3. Press the SET button.The system

will beep once and notify you

"Press button to save settings"on

the LCD display.

4. Press one of the memory buttons

(1 or 2) within 4 seconds.The sys-

tem will beep twice when the mem-

ory has been successfully stored.

5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will

appear on the LCD display.

DDRRIIVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE046036R

Never attempt to operate the driv-

er position memory system

whilst the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of con-

trol, and an accident causing

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

WARNING

3-19

Convenient features of your vehicle

Recalling memory positions

1. Move the shift lever into P whilst the

ignition switch or the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion.

2. Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2). The system will beep

once, then the driver’s seat posi-

tion, outside rearview mirror and

instrument panel illumination will

automatically adjust to the stored

position (if equipped).

3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied"

will appear on the LCD display.

Information

• Whilst recalling the "1" memory

position, pressing the SET or 1 but-

ton temporarily stops the adjust-

ment of the recalled memory posi-

tion. Pressing the 2 button recalls

the "2" memory position.

• Whilst recalling the "2" memory

position, pressing the SET or 2 but-

ton temporarily stops the adjust-

ment of the recalled memory posi-

tion. Pressing the 1 button recalls

the "1" memory position.

• Whilst recalling the stored positions,

pressing one of the control buttons

for the driver's seat, outside

rearview mirror, or instrument

panel illumination will cause the

movement of that component to stop

and move in the direction that the

control button is pressed.

Easy access function

(if equipped)

The system will move the driver's

seat automatically as follows:

The shift lever is in P

• Without smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rear-

ward when the ignition key is

removed and the driver’s door is

opened.

- It will move the driver’s seat forward

when the ignition key is inserted.

• With smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rear-

ward when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the OFF position and

the driver’s door is opened.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-

ward when the vehicle is turned

ON or the driver’s door is closed

with the smart key with you.

You can activate or deactivate the

Easy Access Function from the User

Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to

"LCD Display" in this chapter.

3-20

Electric power steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering

the vehicle. If the engine is off or if

the power steering system becomes

inoperative, the vehicle may still be

steered, but it will require increased

steering effort.

Also, the steering effort becomes

heavier as the vehicle’s speed

increases and becomes lighter as

the vehicle’s speed decreases for

better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, we recommend

that the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• If the electric Power Steering

System does not operate nor-

mally, the warning light ( ) will

illuminate or blink on the instru-

ment cluster.The steering wheel

may become difficult to control

or operate.Take your vehicle to a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the system checked as

soon as possible.

(Continued)

• When abnormality is detected in

the electric power steering sys-

tem, to prevent a deadly acci-

dent, the steering assist func-

tion will stop. At this time, the

warning light turns on or blinks

on the cluster. The steering

wheel may become difficult to

control or operate. Have your

vehicle checked immediately,

after moving the vehicle to a

safe zone.

Information

The following symptoms may occur

during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high

immediately after placing the igni-

tion switch or the Engine Start/Stop

button in the ON position.

This happens as the system per-

forms the EPS system diagnostics.

When the diagnostics are complet-

ed, the steering wheel will return to

its normal condition.

(Continued)

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON or LOCK/OFF

position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-

ing speed.

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperatures, abnor-

mal noise may occur. If the temper-

ature rises, the noise will disappear.

This is a normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, if

you turn the steering wheel all the

way to the left or right continuously,

the steering wheel effort increases.

This is not a system malfunction. As

time passes, the steering wheel

effort will return to its normal con-

dition.

NOTICE

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL

Convenient features of your vehicle

3-21

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tilt steering /

Telescopic steering

Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lock-

release lever may not lock the steering

wheel.

It is not a malfunction. This occurs

when two gears are not engaged cor-

rectly. In this case, adjust the steering

wheel again and then lock the steering

wheel.

Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on

the steering wheel column and adjust

the steering wheel angle (2) and posi-

tion (3, if equipped). Move the steer-

ing wheel, so it points toward your

chest, not toward your face.

Make sure you can see the instrument

panel warning lights and gauges.

After adjusting, pull up the lock-

release lever (1) to lock the steering

wheel in place. Push the steering

wheel both up and down to be cer-

tain it is locked in position. Always

adjust the position of the steering

wheel before driving.

Heated steering wheel

(if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position or when the engine is running,

press the heated steering wheel but-

ton to warm the steering wheel. The

indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off,

press the button again.The indicator

on the button will turn off.

Never adjust the steering wheel

whilst driving. You may lose

steering control and cause

severe personal injury, death or

accidents.

WARNING

OAE046007R

OAE046008R

3-22

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

The heated steering wheel will turn off

automatically approximately 30 min-

utes after the heated steering wheel is

turned on.

When the engine is turned off during

the engine and the heated steering

wheel is on, the timer function of heat-

ed steering wheel will be reset.

To reuse heated steering wheel, press

button again.

Do not install any cover or acces-

sory on the steering wheel. This

cover or accessory could cause

damage to the heated steering

wheel system.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol on your

steering wheel.The horn will operate

only when this area is pressed.

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a

sharp-pointed object.

Inside rearview mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the

rearview mirror to the centre on the

view through the rear window.

NOTICE

OAE046009

MMIIRRRROORRSS

Make sure your line of sight is

not obstructed. Do not place

objects in the rear seat, luggage

compartment area, or behind

the rear head restraints which

could interfere with your vision

through the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during

an accident or deployment of

the air bag, do not modify the

rearview mirror and do not

install a wide mirror.

WARNING

3-23

Convenient features of your vehicle

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as that may cause the

liquid cleaner to enter the mirror

housing.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you

start driving and whilst the day/night

lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever towards you

to reduce glare from the headlamps

of the vehicles behind you during

night driving.

Remember that you lose some

rearview clarity in the night position.

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automati-

cally controls the glare from the head-

lamp of the vehicle behind you in

nighttime or low light driving condi-

tions.

When the engine is running, the

glare is automatically controlled by

the sensor mounted in the rearview

mirror. The sensor detects the light

level around the vehicle, and auto-

matically adjusts to control the head-

lamp glare from vehicles behind you.

Whenever the shift lever is placed in

R (Reverse), the mirror will automat-

ically go to the brightest setting in

order to improve the driver's view

behind the vehicle.

NOTICE

NEVER adjust the mirror whilst

driving. This may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

WARNING

OAE046010

Day

Night

3-24

Convenient features of your vehicle

To operate the electric rearview

mirror:

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to

turn the automatic dimming func-

tion off. The mirror indicator light

will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to

turn the automatic dimming func-

tion on. The mirror indicator light

will illuminate.

• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-

tion whenever the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button is in

the ON position.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles

before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both

left-hand and right-hand outside

rearview mirrors.

The mirror can be adjusted remotely

with the remote switch.

The mirror heads can be folded to

prevent damage during an automatic

car wash or when passing through a

narrow street.

OAD045010

OAE046013

• The outside rearview mirror is

convex. Objects seen in the

mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview

mirror or turn your head and

look to determine the actual

distance of following vehicles

when changing lanes.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors whilst driving.

This may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

3-25

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the sur-

face of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice,

do not adjust the mirror by

force. Use an approved spray

de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)

spray, or a sponge or soft cloth

with very warm water, or move

the vehicle to a warm place and

allow the ice to melt.

Adjusting the rearview mirrors:

1. Press either the L (left side) or R

(right side) button (1) to select the

rearview mirror you would like to

adjust.

2. Use the mirror adjustment control

to position the selected mirror up,

down, left or right.

3. After adjustment, put the button

into neutral (centre) position to

prevent inadvertent adjustment.

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate whilst the switch

is pressed. Do not press the

switch longer than necessary,

the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand or

the motor may be damaged.

NOTICE

OAE046014R

3-26

Convenient features of your vehicle

Folding the outside rearview

mirror

Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

grasp the housing of the mirror and

then fold it toward the rear of the

vehicle.

Electric type (if equipped)

Left :The mirror will unfold.

Right :The mirror will fold.

Centre (AUTO) : The mirror will fold

or unfold automatically as follows:

• Without smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by

the remote key.

• With smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by

the smart key.

- The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by

the button on the outside door

handle.

- The mirror will unfold when you

approach the vehicle (all doors

closed and locked) with a smart

key in possession. (if equipped)

The electric type outside rearview

mirror operates even though the

ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion. However, to prevent unnec-

essary battery discharge, do not

adjust the mirrors longer than

necessary whilst the engine is not

running.

Do not fold the electric type out-

side rearview mirror by hand. It

could cause motor failure.

NOTICE

OAE046015

OAE046016R

3-27

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power windows (if equipped)

(1) Driver’s door power window

switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch

(3) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(4) Rear door (left) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window*

(7) Power window lock switch

* : if equipped

WWIINNDDOOWWSS

OAE046019R

3-28

Convenient features of your vehicle

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to be able to raise or lower

the windows. Each door has a Power

Window switch to control that door's

window. The driver has a Power

Window Lock switch which can block

the operation of passenger windows.

The power windows will operate for

approximately 30 seconds after the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC

or OFF position. However, if the front

doors are opened, the Power

Windows will not operate even within

the 30 second period.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, power win-

dows may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• Whilst driving with the rear win-

dows down or with the sunroof (if

equipped) opened (or partially

opened), your vehicle may demon-

strate a wind buffeting or pulsation

noise. This noise is normal and can

be reduced or eliminated by taking

the following actions. If the noise

occurs with one or both of the rear

windows down, partially lower both

front windows approximately one

inch. If you experience the noise

with the sunroof open, slightly close

the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

To open:

Press the window switch down to the

first detent position (5). Release the

switch when you want the window to

stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first

detent position (5). Release the win-

dow switch when you want the win-

dow to stop.

To avoid serious injury or death,

do not extend your head, arms

or body outside the windows

whilst driving.

WARNING

OAE046020

3-29

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto down window (if equipped)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent

position (6) completely lowers the

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position whilst the window is

in operation, pull up or press down

and release the switch.

Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the sec-

ond detent position (6) completely

lowers or lifts the window even when

the switch is released. To stop the

window at the desired position whilst

the window is in operation, pull up or

press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate

normally, the automatic power win-

dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Close the window and continue

pulling up on the power window

switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, it is recom-

mended that the system be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If a window senses any obstacle

whilst it is closing automatically, it will

stop and lower approximately 30 cm

(12 inches) to allow the object to be

cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

whilst the power window switch is

pulled up continuously, the window

will stop upward movement then

lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).

If the power window switch is pulled

up continuously again within 5 sec-

onds after the window is lowered by

the automatic window reverse fea-

ture, the automatic window reverse

will not operate.

OLF044032

The automatic reverse feature

doesn't activate whilst resetting

the power window system. Make

sure body parts or other objects

are safely out of the way before

closing the windows to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage.

WARNING

3-30

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only

active when the “Auto Up” feature is

used by fully pulling up the switch to

the second detent.

Do not install any accessories on

the windows. The automatic

reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

The driver can disable the power

window switches on the rear passen-

gers' doors by pressing the power

window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch

is pressed:

• The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows.

• The front passenger's control can

operate the front passenger's power

window.

• The rear passenger's control can-

not operate the rear passengers'

power window.

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do

not open or close two windows

or more at the same time. This

will also ensure the longevity of

the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposite directions at

the same time. If this is done,the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

NOTICE

Make sure body parts or other

objects are safely out of the way

before closing the windows to

avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 4 mm (0.16

inch) in diameter caught between

the window glass and the upper

window channel may not be

detected by the automatic reverse

window and the window will not

stop and reverse direction.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the driver’s door power window

lock switch in the LOCK posi-

tion. Serious injury or death can

result from unintentional win-

dow operation by a child.

WARNING

OAE046021R

3-31

Convenient features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a

sunroof, you can slide or tilt your

sunroof with the sunroof control

switch located on the overhead con-

sole.

The sunroof can be opened, closed,

or tilted when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The sunroof can be operated for

approximately 30 seconds after the

ignition key is removed or turned to

the ACC or LOCK/OFF position.

However, if the front door is opened,

the sunroof cannot be operated even

within 30 seconds.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in a

rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any

water that is on the sunroof before

operating it.

• NEVER leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised

children, when the engine is

running.

• NEVER leave any child unat-

tended in the vehicle. Even

very young children may inad-

vertently cause the vehicle to

move, entangle themselves in

the windows, or otherwise

injure themselves or others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head

and other obstructions are

safely out of the way before

closing a window.

• Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the driver’s door power window

lock switch in the LOCK posi-

tion (pressed). Serious injury

can result from unintentional

window operation by the child.

• Do not extend your head,

arms or body outside the win-

dows whilst driving.

WARNING

SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAD045022

• Never adjust the sunroof or

sunshade whilst driving. This

could result in loss of control

and an accident that may

cause death, serious injury, or

property damage.

• Make sure heads, other body

parts or objects are out of the

way before using the sunroof.

• Do not extend your head,arms

or body outside the sunroof

whilst driving, to avoid serious

injury.

• Do not leave the engine run-

ning and the key in your vehi-

cle with unsupervised children.

(Continued)

WARNING

3-32

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Do not continue to move the sun-

roof control lever after the sun-

roof is fully opened, closed, or

tilted. Damage to the motor or

system components could occur.

• Make sure the sunroof is closed

fully when leaving your vehicle.

If the sunroof is open, rain or

snow may leak through the sun-

roof and wet the interior as well

as allow theft.

Sunroof opening and closing

To open:

Press the sunroof control lever back-

ward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want

the sunroof to stop.

To close:

Press the sunroof control lever for-

ward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want

the sunroof to stop.

Sliding the sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever

rearward or forward momentarily to

the second detent position completely

opens or closes the sunroof even

when the switch is released. To stop

the sunroof at the desired position

whilst the sunroof is in operation,

press the sunroof control lever rear-

ward or forward and release the

switch.

Information

To reduce wind noise whilst driving, it

is recommended that you drive with

the sunroof slightly closed (stop the

sunroof about 7 cm before the maxi-

mum slide open position).

NOTICE

OAD045023

(Continued)

Unattended children could

operate the sunroof, which

could result in serious injury.

• Do not sit on the top of the

vehicle.It may cause injuries or

vehicle damage.

3-33

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If the sunroof senses any obstacle

whilst it is closing automatically, it will

reverse direction then stop to allow

the object to be cleared.

The auto reverse function does not

work if a small obstacle is between

the sliding glass and the sunroof

sash.

You should always check that all pas-

sengers and objects are away from

the sunroof before closing it.

Tilting the sunroof

Tilt the sunroof open:

Push the sunroof control lever

upward until the sunroof moves to

the desired position.

To close the sunroof:

Press the sunroof lever forward until

the sunroof moves to the desired

position.

OAD045024OLFC044035CN

Small objects that can get

caught between the sunroof

glass and the front glass chan-

nel may not be detected by the

automatic reverse system. In

this case, the sunroof glass will

not detect the object and

reverse will not direction.

WARNING

3-34

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the sunroof

guide rail or between the sun-

roof and roof panel, which can

make a noise.

• Do not try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice, other-

wise the motor could be dam-

aged.In cold and wet climates,the

sunroof may not work properly.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatical-

ly with the sunroof when the glass

panel moves. If you want it closed,

move the sunshade manually.

The sunroof is made to slide

together with the sunshade. Do

not leave the sunshade closed

whilst the sunroof is open.

Resetting the sunroof

The sunroof may need to be reset if

the following conditions occur:

- The battery is discharged or dis-

connected or the sunroof fuse has

been replaced or disconnected

- The sunroof control lever is not

operating correctly

To reset the sunroof, perform the fol-

lowing steps:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON

position or start the engine.It is rec-

ommended to reset the sunroof

whilst the engine is running.

2. Push the control lever forward. The

sunroof will close completely or tilt

depending on the condition of the

sunroof.

3. Release the control lever until the

sunroof does not move.

NOTICE

OAD045037

3-35

Convenient features of your vehicle

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

4.Push the control lever forward

about 10 seconds.

- When the sunroof is in the close

position :

The glass will tilt and slightly move

up and down.

- When the sunroof is in the tilt posi-

tion:

The glass will slightly move up

and down.

Do not release the lever until the

operation is completed.

If you release the lever during opera-

tion, try again from step 2.

5.Within 3 seconds, push the control

lever forward until the sunroof

operates as follows:

Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide

Close.

Do not release the lever until the

operation is completed.

If you release the lever during opera-

tion, try again from step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control lever

after all operation has completed.

The sunroof system has been

reset.

Information

• If the sunroof does not reset when

the vehicle battery is disconnected

or discharged, or related fuse is

blown, the sunroof may not operate

normally.

• For more detailed information, we

recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Bonnet

Opening the bonnet

1. Park the vehicle and set the park-

ing brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch

the bonnet. The bonnet should

pop open slightly.

OAEPH047026R

3-36

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise

the bonnet slightly, push the sec-

ondary latch up (1) inside of the

bonnet centre and lift the bonnet

(2).

4. Pull out the support rod.

5. Hold the bonnet open with the

support rod (1).

Closing the bonnet

1. Before closing the bonnet, check

the following:

• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the bonnet halfway (lifted

approximately 30cm from the

closed position) and push down to

securely lock in place. Then double

check to be sure the bonnet is

secure. If the bonnet can be raised,

slightly it is not securely locked.

Open it again and close it with more

force.

OAE046027 OAD045039

• Grasp the support rod in the

area wrapped in rubber. The

rubber will help prevent you

from being burned by hot

metal when the engine is hot.

• The support rod must be

inserted completely into the

hole provided whenever you

inspect the engine compart-

ment. This will prevent the

bonnet from falling and possi-

bly injuring you.

WARNING

3-37

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park) and set the parking brake.

Then do one of the following:

1. Unlock all doors with the Door

Unlock button on your remote key

or smart key. Press the tailgate

handle button and open the tail-

gate.

2. Press and hold the Tailgate Unlock

button on the remote key or smart

key. Press the tailgate handle but-

ton and open the tailgate.

3.With the Smart Key in your pos-

session, press the tailgate handle

button and open the tailgate.

Closing the tailgate

Lower the tailgate lid and press down

until it locks. To be sure the tailgate

lid is securely fastened, always

check by trying to pull it up again.

• Before closing the bonnet,

ensure all obstructions are

removed from around the

bonnet opening.

• Always double check to be

sure that the bonnet is firmly

latched before driving away.

Check there is no bonnet open

warning light or message dis-

played on the instrument clus-

ter. If the bonnet is not latched

whilst the vehicle is moving,

the chime will sound to warn

the driver the bonnet is not

fully latched. Driving with the

bonnet opened may cause a

total loss of visibility, which

might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with

the bonnet in the raised posi-

tion, as vision is obstructed,

which might result in an acci-

dent, and the bonnet could fall

or be damaged.

WARNING

OAE046022

Always keep the tailgate lid com-

pletely closed whilst the vehicle

is in motion. If it is left open or

ajar, poisonous exhaust gases

containing carbon monoxide

(CO) may enter the vehicle and

serious illness or death may

result.

WARNING

OAE046031

3-38

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

To prevent damage to the tailgate lift

cylinders and the attached hardware,

always close the tailgate before driving.

In cold and wet climates, tailgate

lock and tailgate mechanisms may

not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

Fuel filler door

(Hybrid vehicle)

Opening the fuel filler door

1.Turn the vehicle off.

2. Push the fuel filler door opener

button.

NOTICE

• NEVER allow anyone to occu-

py the luggage compartment

of the vehicle at any time. If

the tailgate is partially or

totally latched and the person

is unable to get out, serious

injury or death could occur

due to lack of ventilation,

exhaust fumes and rapid heat

build-up, or because of expo-

sure to cold weather condi-

tions. The luggage compart-

ment is also a highly danger-

ous location in the event of a

crash because it is not a pro-

tected occupant space but is

a part of the vehicle’s crush

zone.

• Your vehicle should be kept

locked and keys should be

kept out of the reach of chil-

dren. Parents should teach

their children about the dan-

gers of playing in luggage

compartment.

WARNING

OAEPH047566R

Do not hold the part (gas lifter)

that supports the tailgate. Be

aware that the deformation of the

part may cause vehicle damage

and a risk of safety accident.

WARNING

OHYK047009

3-39

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to

fully open.

4.To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it anticlockwise.You may hear

a hissing noise as the pressure

inside the tank equalizes.

5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

Information

If the fuel filler door does not open

because ice has formed around it, tap

lightly or push on the door to break

the ice and release the door. Do not

pry on the door. If necessary, spray

around the door with an approved de-

icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-

freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm

place and allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1.To install the fuel tank cap, turn it

clockwise until it “clicks” one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is

latched securely.

Petrol is highly flammable and

explosive. Failure to follow

these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refuelling, note the

location of the Emergency

Petrol Shut-Off, if available, at

the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle, you should eliminate the

potential build-up of static

electricity by touching a metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE046025

(Continued)

• Do not use mobile phones

whilst refuelling. Electric cur-

rent and/or electronic interfer-

ence from mobile phones can

potentially ignite fuel vapours

and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refu-

elling. You can generate a

build-up of static electricity by

touching, rubbing or sliding

against any item or fabric capa-

ble of producing static electric-

ity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapours causing

a fire. If you must re-enter the

vehicle, you should once again

eliminate potentially danger-

ous static electricity discharge

by touching a metal part of the

vehicle,away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle or other petrol

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

3-40

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel Requirements"

suggested in the Introduction chapter.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted sur-

faces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction

of the fuel system or emission

control system.

NOTICE

(Continued)

• When refuelling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Sparks produced by

electrical components related

to the engine can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure

to place the container on the

ground prior to refuelling.Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire. Once

refuelling has begun, contact

between your bare hand and

the vehicle should be main-

tained until the filling is com-

plete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store petrol.

(Continued)

• Do not use matches or a

lighter and do not smoke or

leave a lit cigarette in your

vehicle whilst at a gas station,

especially during refuelling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

petrol spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

elling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately con-

tact the manager of the gas

station and then contact the

local fire department. Follow

any safety instructions they

provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes or

skin and thus subject you to

the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap

carefully and slowly. If the cap

is venting fuel or if you hear a

hissing sound, wait until the

condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

(Continued)

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to prevent

fuel spillage in the event of an

accident.

3-41

Convenient features of your vehicle

Fuel filler door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

Opening the fuel filler door

1.Turn the vehicle off.

2. Push the fuel filler door opener

button.

3. Wait until the fuel tank is depres-

surized.

The message ''Fuel door open'' is

displayed when the fuel filler door

opens after the fuel tank is

depressurized.

Information

• It may take up to 20 seconds to open

the fuel filler door.

• When the fuel filler door is frozen

and does not open after 20 seconds

at freezing temperature, slightly tap

the fuel filler door and then attempt

to open it.

4. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to

fully open.

5.To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it anticlockwise.You may hear

a hissing noise as the pressure

inside the tank equalizes.

6. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

OAEPH047024R

OAEPH047025LOLFP045236N/OAEPH047525L

3-42

Closing the fuel filler door

1.To install the fuel tank cap, turn it

clockwise until it “clicks” one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is

latched securely.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Petrol is highly flammable and

explosive. Failure to follow

these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refuelling, note the

location of the Emergency

Petrol Shut-Off, if available, at

the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle, you should eliminate the

potential build-up of static

electricity by touching a metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not use mobile phones

whilst refuelling. Electric cur-

rent and/or electronic interfer-

ence from mobile phones can

potentially ignite fuel vapours

and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refu-

elling. You can generate a

build-up of static electricity by

touching, rubbing or sliding

against any item or fabric capa-

ble of producing static electric-

ity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapours causing

a fire. If you must re-enter the

vehicle, you should once again

eliminate potentially danger-

ous static electricity discharge

by touching a metal part of the

vehicle,away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle or other petrol

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

• Add fuel into the fuel tank

within 20 minutes after open-

ing the fuel filler door. After 20

minutes, the fuel tank may

shut off, causing fuel to over-

flow. In this case, re-press the

fuel filler door opening but-

ton.

• Do not leave the fuel filler

door opened for an extended

period of time. It may dis-

charge the battery.

• Close the fuel filler door after

fuelling the vehicle. If you

start the vehicle with the fuel

filler door opened, the mes-

sage, "Check fuel door", illu-

minates on the LCD display.

•

Avoid refuelling the vehicle

whilst charging the (high-volt-

age) hybrid battery. It may

cause a fire or an explosion

due to static electricity.

WARNING

3-43

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel Requirements"

suggested in the Introduction chapter.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted sur-

faces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction

of the fuel system or emission

control system.

NOTICE

(Continued)

• When refuelling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Sparks produced by

electrical components related

to the engine can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure

to place the container on the

ground prior to refuelling.Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire. Once

refuelling has begun, contact

between your bare hand and

the vehicle should be main-

tained until the filling is com-

plete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store petrol.

(Continued)

• Do not use matches or a

lighter and do not smoke or

leave a lit cigarette in your

vehicle whilst at a gas station,

especially during refuelling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

petrol spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

elling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately con-

tact the manager of the gas

station and then contact the

local fire department. Follow

any safety instructions they

provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes or

skin and thus subject you to

the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap

carefully and slowly. If the cap

is venting fuel or if you hear a

hissing sound, wait until the

condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

(Continued)

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to prevent

fuel spillage in the event of an

accident.

3-44

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Power gauge

2. Speedometer

3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5.Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

OAE048100E/OAE048187E

• Type B

■■

Hybrid vehicle

• Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

For more information, refer to the

"Gauges and meters" in this chapter.

3-45

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Power gauge

2. Speedometer

3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5.Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

OAEPH048100E/OAEPH048187E

• Type B

■■

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

• Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

For more information, refer to the

"Gauges and meters" in this chapter.

3-46

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instrument cluster control

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle's position lights or

headlamps are on, press the illumi-

nation control button to adjust the

brightness of the instrument panel

illumination.

When pressing the illumination con-

trol button, the interior switch illumi-

nation intensity is also adjusted.

• The brightness

of the instrument panel illumination

is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches to the

maximum or minimum level, a

chime will sound.

Never adjust the instrument

cluster whilst driving.This could

result in loss of control and lead

to an accident that may cause

death, serious injury, or vehicle

damage.

WARNING

OAE046167L/OAE046113L

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAEPH047412R

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-47

Convenient features of your vehicle

Gauges and meters

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the

speed of the vehicle and is calibrated

in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or

miles per hour (MPH).

The speedometer for cluster type B

is displayed differently according to

the mode selected, ECO or SPORT.

If the shift lever is in S (Sport),

SPORT mode is selected and if the

shift lever is in D (Drive), ECO mode

is selected.

For more information, refer to

“Dual Clutch Transmission” in

chapter 5.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approx-

imate number of engine revolutions

per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the cor-

rect shift points and to prevent lug-

ging and/or over-revving the engine.

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE. This

may cause severe engine damage.

NOTICE

OAE046102N

OAE046103N

■ Type A

■ Type B

• ECO mode selected

OAE046104N

■ Type B

• SPORT mode selected

OAE046106N

■ Type B

• SPORT mode selected

3-48

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power gauge

The power gauge indicates whether

the current driving condition is fuel

efficient or not.

• CHARGE :

Shows that the energy made by the

vehicle is being converted to elec-

trical energy. (Regenerated energy)

• ECO :

Shows that the vehicle is being

driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

• POWER :

Shows that the vehicle is exceed-

ing the Eco-friendly range.

Information

Accordance to the power gauge area

the “EV” indicator comes on or off.

- “EV” indicator ON : Vehicle is driv-

en using the electric motor or the

petrol engine is stopped.

- “EV” indicator OFF : Vehicle is

driven using the petrol engine.

Fuel gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the

fuel tank.

OAEQ046008

OAE046107L

OAE046108L

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-49

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a

low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is

nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier

than usual due to the movement of

fuel in the tank.

Avoid driving with an extremely

low fuel level. Running out of fuel

could cause the engine to misfire

damaging the catalytic converter.

Hybrid battery SOC

(State of Charge) gauge

This gauge indicates the remaining

hybrid battery power. If the SOC is

near the "0" level, the vehicle auto-

matically operates the engine to

charge the battery.

However, if the Service Indicator

( ) and Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the

SOC gauge is near the "0" level, we

recommend the vehicle be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Never try to start the vehicle if the

fuel tank is empty. In this condi-

tion, the engine cannot charge the

high voltage battery of the hybrid

system. If you try to start the vehi-

cle when the fuel is empty, the

high voltage battery will become

discharged and be damaged.

NOTICE

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addi-

tional fuel as soon as possible

after the warning light comes

on or when the gauge indicator

comes close to the "0 (Empty)"

level.

WARNING

OAEQ046009L

OAEPH047522L

■ Hybrid vehicle

■ Plug-in hybrid vehicle

3-50

Convenient features of your vehicle

Plug-in hybrid mode indicator

• CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)

mode : The high-voltage (hybrid)

battery is used to drive the vehicle.

• CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)

mode : The high-voltage (hybrid)

battery and petrol engine is used to

drive the vehicle.

Information

Even when the battery charging rate

is high and driving in electric mode is

possible, engine may turn on in some

areas to protect the system.

Outside temperature gauge

This gauge indicates the current out-

side air temperatures either in

Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.

- Temperature range :

-40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F ~ 140°F)

The outside temperature on the dis-

play may not immediately change

like a general thermometer not to

distract the driver.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F

or from °F to °C) can be changed by:

- User Settings mode in the Cluster :

You can change the temperature

unit in the “Other Features -

Temperature unit” .

- Automatic climate control system :

Whilst pressing the OFF button,

press the AUTO button for 3 sec-

onds or more.

The temperature unit of the instrument

cluster and climate control system will

change at once.

OAE046135/OAE046109

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAEPH047519N

■ CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)

OAEPH047520N

■ CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)

3-51

Convenient features of your vehicle

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driv-

en and should be used to determine

when periodic maintenance should

be performed.

Distance to empty

• The distance to empty is the esti-

mated distance the vehicle can be

driven with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "----" as distance to empty.

• The distance to empty for cluster

type B is displayed differently

according to the mode selected,

ECO or SPORT. If the shift lever is

in S (Sport), SPORT mode is

selected and if the shift lever is in D

(Drive), ECO mode is selected.

For more information, refer to

“Dual Clutch Transmission” in

chapter 5.

• The Distance to Empty for cluster

type A is mentioned in “Trip

Computer” in this chapter.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the distance to empty func-

tion may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ

from the actual driving distance as

it is an estimate of the available

driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.5 gallon

(6 litres) of fuel are added to the

vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to

empty may vary significantly based

on driving conditions, driving habits,

and condition of the vehicle.

OAE046138N/OAE046112N

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046475N/OAE046126N

■ Type B

• ECO mode selected

• SPORT mode selected

3-52

Convenient features of your vehicle

Dual clutch transmission shift

indicator

This indicator displays which shift

lever position is selected.

Dual clutch transmission shift indi-

cator in Manual shift mode

(if equipped)

In the Manual shift mode, this indica-

tor informs which gear is recom-

mended whilst driving, to save fuel.

- Shifting up :

▲

- Shifting down :

▼

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is recommended (cur-

rently the shift lever is in the

2nd or 1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to

the 3rd gear is recommended

(currently the shift lever is in the

4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working

properly, the indicator is not dis-

played.

Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up indicates the current

gear position displayed in the cluster

for about 2 seconds when shifting

into other positions (P/R/N/D).

OAE046136L/OAE046110L

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046185/OAE046184

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046137/OAE046111

■ Type B

■ Type A

3-53

Convenient features of your vehicle

Warning and indicator lights

Information

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the engine. If any

light is still ON, this indicates a situa-

tion that needs attention.

Ready Indicator

This indicator illuminates :

When the vehicle is ready to be driven.

- ON : Normal driving is possible.

- OFF : Normal driving is not possible,

or a problem has occurred.

- Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the ready indicator goes OFF

or blinks, there is a problem with the

system. In this case, we recommend

that you have your vehicle inspected

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

EV Mode Indicator

This indicator illuminates when the

vehicle is driven by the electric motor.

Service Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

• When the ignition switch or the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a problem with the

hybrid vehicle control system or

hardware.

When the warning light illuminates

whilst driving, or does not go OFF

after starting the vehicle, we recom-

mend that you have your vehicle

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Charging Cable

Connection Indicator

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This indicator illuminates in red when

the charging cable is connected.

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

3-54

Convenient features of your vehicle

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver

that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more information, refer to

“Seat Belts” in chapter 2.

Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it

indicates the brake fluid level in

the reservoir is low.

• When the regenerative brake does

not operate.

If the brake fluid level in the reser-

voir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and

add fluid as required (For more

information, refer to “Brake

Fluid” in chapter 7). After adding

brake fluid, check all brake compo-

nents for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid

leak is found, or if the warning light

remains on, or if the brakes do not

operate properly, do not drive the

vehicle. We recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-

diagonal braking systems. This

means you still have braking on two

wheels even if one of the dual sys-

tems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems

working, more than normal pedal

travel and greater pedal pressure is

required to stop the vehicle.

(red colour)

3-55

Convenient features of your vehicle

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail whilst you are driv-

ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-

al engine braking and stop the vehi-

cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Regenerative Brake

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the regenerative brake does

not operate and the brake does not

perform well. This causes the Brake

Warning light (red) and Regenerative

Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu-

minate simultaneously.

In this case, drive safely and we rec-

ommend that you have your vehicle

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

The operation of the brake pedal may

be more difficult than normal and the

braking distance can increase.

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational without

the assistance of the anti-lock

brake system).

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with

the parking brake released, it

indicates that the brake fluid

level is low.

In this case, we recommend

that you have the vehicle

inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

WARNING

3-56

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate

at the same time whilst driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Information

- Electronic

Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or

both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the

speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter

may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering

effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, we recommend you have

the vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer as soon as possi-

ble.

Electric Power Steering

(EPS)Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

•When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) System

Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system

will not work normally and you

may experience an unexpected

and dangerous situation during

sudden braking.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

In this case, avoid high speed

driving and abrupt braking.

We recommend you have the

vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

as soon as possible.

3-57

Convenient features of your vehicle

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the emission control system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may

cause damage to the emission

control system which could affect

drivability and/or fuel economy.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-

ic converter damage is possible

which could result in loss of

engine power.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

Charging System

Warning Light

When this warning light illuminates

whilst running the engine, the battery

is not being charged. Immediately

turn OFF all electrical accessories.

Try not to use electrically operated

controls, such as the power windows.

Keep running the engine.

We recommend that you have the

vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer as soon as possi-

ble.

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

engine oil level (For more informa-

tion, refer to “Engine Oil”in chap-

ter 7). If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on

after adding oil or if oil is not avail-

able, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

NOTICE

3-58

Convenient features of your vehicle

• If the engine does not stop

immediately after the Engine Oil

Pressure Warning Light is illumi-

nated, severe damage could

result.

• If the warning light stays on

whilst the engine is running, it

indicates that there may be seri-

ous engine damage or malfunc-

tion. In this case:

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2.Turn off the engine and check

the oil level. If the oil level is

low, fill the engine oil to the

proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the

warning light stays on after the

engine is started, turn the

engine off immediately. In this

case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er.

Low Fuel Level

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the Low Fuel Level

warning light on or with the fuel

level below "0" can cause the

engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter (if equipped).

Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the engine coolant temper-

ature is above 120°C (248°F).This

means that the engine is overheat-

ed and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to “Overheating” in chapter 6.

Overspeed Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light blinks:

• When you drive the vehicle more

than 120 km/h.

- This is to prevent you from driving

your vehicle with overspeed.

- The overspeed warning chime

also sounds for approximately 5

seconds.

NOTICE

120

km/h

3-59

Convenient features of your vehicle

Master Warning Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction in oper-

ation in any of the following systems:

- Low washer fluid (if equipped)

- Exterior lamp malfunction

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- Smart cruise control malfunction

(if equipped)

- Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS, if equipped)

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System malfunction (if equipped)

- Service reminder

To identify the details of the warning,

look at the LCD display.

Low Tyre Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When one or more of your tyres

are significantly underinflated.

For more information, refer to

“Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)” in chapter 6.

This warning light remains ON

after blinking for approximately 60

seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON

and OFF in 3 second intervals:

• When there is a malfunction with

the TPMS.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

For more information, refer to

“Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)” in chapter 6.

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tyre dam-

age caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle insta-

bility, immediately take your

foot off the accelerator pedal,

apply the brakes gradually with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road.

WARNING

3-60

Convenient features of your vehicle

Exhaust System (GPF)

Warning Light

(for petrol engine,

if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction with

the Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate

Filter (GPF) system.

When this warning light illumi-

nates, it may turn off after driving

the vehicle:

- At more than 50 mph (80 km/h) for

about 30 minutes

(above 3rd gear with 1500 ~ 4000

engine rpm)

If this warning light blinks in spite of

the procedure (at this time LCD

warning message will be displayed),

we recommend that you have the

GPF system checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

If you continue to drive with the

GPF warning light blinking for a

long time, the GPF system can be

damaged and fuel consumption

can worsen.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light blinks:

• Whilst the ESC is operating.

For more information, refer to

“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”

in chapter 5.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately

3 seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-

ton.

For more information, refer to

“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”

in chapter 5.

NOTICE

3-61

Convenient features of your vehicle

Immobiliser Indicator

Light

(without smart key)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the vehicle detects the

immobiliser in the key with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobiliser system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Immobiliser Indicator

Light (with smart key)

This indicator light illuminates for

up to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the

smart key in the vehicle with the

Engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC or ON position.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few

seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the

vehicle.

- At this time, you cannot start the

engine.

This indicator light illuminates for

2 seconds and goes off:

• If the smart key is in the vehicle

and the Engine Start/Stop button is

ON, but the vehicle cannot detect

the smart key.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the battery voltage of the

smart key is low.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can start

the engine if you press the

Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key. (For more informa-

tion, refer to "Starting the

Engine" in chapter 5).

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobiliser system.

In this case, we recommend that

you have the vehicle inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

3-62

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

This indicator light blinks:

• When you operate the turn signals.

If any of the following occur, there may

be a malfunction with the turn signal

system.

- The turn signal indicator light illumi-

nates but does not blink

- The turn signal indicator light blinks

rapidly

- The turn signal indicator light does

not illuminate at all

If any of these conditions occur, we

recommend that you have your vehi-

cle inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Low Beam Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on.

High Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlamps are on and in

the high beam position.

• When the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the tail lights or headlamps

are on.

Rear Fog Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the rear fog lights are on.

Exterior Light Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When one of the exterior bulbs

(headlamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, etc.)

is not operating properly. One of the

bulbs may need to be replaced.

Information

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same

wattage rating.

3-63

Convenient features of your vehicle

LED Headlamp Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you turn the ignition switch

or the Engine Start/Stop button to

the ON position.

• When there is a malfunction with

the LED headlamp.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an

authorised HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a

LED headlamp related part.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by an

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Continuous driving with the LED

Headlamp Warning Light on or

blinking can reduce LED head-

lamp life.

Cruise

Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is

enabled.

For more information, refer to

“Cruise Control System” in chap-

ter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control speed is

set.

For more information, refer to

“Cruise Control System” in chap-

ter 5.

Speed Limiter Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates

when:

• When the speed limiter is enabled.

NOTICE

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-64

Convenient features of your vehicle

SPORT Mode Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates

• When the driver moves the shift

lever to S (Sport).

For more information, refer to

"Dual Clutch Transmission" in

chapter 5.

ECO Mode Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the driver moves the shift

lever to D (Drive).

For more information, refer to

"Dual Clutch Transmission" in

chapter 5.

Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA)

system warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates :

• When the FCA system is turned

off.

• When the radar sensor or cover is

blocked with dirt or snow. Check

the sensor and cover and clean

them by using a soft cloth.

• When there is a malfunction with

FCA. In this case, we recommend

that you have your vehicle inspected

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information, refer to

“Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system’’in chapter 5.

Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) system indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• [Green] When the system operat-

ing conditions are satisfied for

LKA.

• [White] When the system operat-

ing conditions are not satisfied or

when the sensor does not detect

the lane line.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-

tion with the lane keeping assist

system.

In this case, we recommend you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to “Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system” in

chapter 5.

3-65

Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD display messages

Shift to P

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed

if you try to turn off the vehicle with

the shift lever the N (Neutral) posi-

tion.

At this time, the Engine Start/Stop

button turns to the ACC position (If

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton once more, it will turn to the ON

position).

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the battery of the smart key is dis-

charged whilst changing the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF posi-

tion.

Press START button while turn-

ing wheel

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the steering wheel does not unlock

normally when the Engine Start/Stop

button is pressed.

You should press the Engine

Start/Stop button whilst turning the

steering wheel right and left.

Check Steering Wheel Lock

System (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the steering wheel does not lock nor-

mally whilst the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton changes to the OFF position.

Press brake pedal to start vehi-

cle (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the Engine Start/Stop button changes

to the ACC position twice by pressing

the button repeatedly without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depressing

the brake pedal.

Key not in vehicle

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the smart key is not in the vehicle

when you press the Engine Start/Stop

button.

When attempting to start the vehicle,

always have the smart key with you.

3-66

Convenient features of your vehicle

Key not detected

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the smart key is not detected when you

press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Press START button again

(for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you

were unable to start the vehicle when

the Engine Start/Stop button was

pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the

engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button again.

If the warning message appears

each time you press the Engine

Start/Stop button, we recommend

that you have your vehicle inspected

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Press START button with key

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton whilst the warning message “Key

not detected” is displayed.

At this time, the immobiliser indicator

light blinks.

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the brake switch fuse is disconnected.

You need to replace the fuse with a

new one before starting the engine.

If that is not possible, you can start the

engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the

ACC position.

Shift to P to start vehicle

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

you try to start the engine with the

shift lever not in the P (Park) position.

Door, Bonnet,Tailgate Open

This warning is displayed indicating

which door, or bonnet, or tailgate is

open.

OAE046165

Before driving the vehicle, you

should confirm that the door/

bonnet/tailgate is fully closed.

Also, check there is no door

/bonnet/tailgate open warning

light or message displayed on

the instrument cluster.

CAUTION

3-67

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the door/tailgate open warning is

blocked with another warning mes-

sage, an icon will appear on the top

of the LCD display.

Sunroof Open (if equipped)

This warning is displayed if you turn

off the engine when the sunroof is

open.

Icy Road Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light is to warn the driver

the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the out-

side temperature gauge is approxi-

mately below 4°C (40°F), the Icy

Road Warning Light and Outside

Temperature Gauge blinks, and then

illuminates. Also, the warning chime

sounds 1 time.

Information

If the icy road warning light appears

whilst driving, you should drive more

attentively and safely refraining from

over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-

den braking or sharp turning, etc.

OAD045136

■ Type A

OAEE046114

■ Type B■ Type A

OAE046461L/OAE046099L

3-68

Convenient features of your vehicle

Low Pressure

This warning message is displayed if

the tyre pressure is low. The corre-

sponding tyre on the vehicle will be

illuminated.

For more information, refer to

"Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"

This warning message is displayed if

the fuse switch located on the fuse

box under the steering wheel is OFF.

You should turn the fuse switch on.

For more information, refer to

“Fuses” in chapter 7.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning message is displayed if

the washer fluid level in the reservoir

is nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir

refilled.

Low Fuel

This warning message is displayed if

the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the

low fuel level warning light in the

cluster will come on.

It is recommended to look for the

nearest fuelling station and refuel as

soon as possible.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046114L/OAE046115L OLFH044149L

3-69

Convenient features of your vehicle

Engine has overheated

This warning message is displayed

when the engine coolant tempera-

ture is above 120°C (248°F). This

means that the engine is overheated

and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

Check exhaust system

(if equipped)

This warning message illuminates if

the GPF system has a malfunction.

at this time, GPF warning light also

blinks.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the GPF system checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

GPF : Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate

Filter

For more details, refer to "Warning

lights" in this chapter.

Lights Mode

This indicator displays which exterior

light is selected using the lighting

control.

Wiper

This indicator displays which wiper

speed is selected using the wiper

control.

OAE046182L OAE046183L

3-70

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check headlight (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

the headlamps are not operating

properly. A headlamp bulb may need

to be replaced.

Information

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same wattage

rating.

Parking distance warning

(Reverse/Forward) system

(if equipped)

This warning is displayed if there is a

problem with the Parking Distance

Warning (Reverse/Forward) System.

We recommend you to have the vehi-

cle inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

For more details, refer to “Driver

Assist System” in chapter 3.

Check Active Air Flap System

This message is displayed in the fol-

lowing situations:

- There is a malfunction with the

actuator flap

- There is a malfunction with the

actuator air flap controller

- The air flap does not open

When all of the above conditions are

fixed, the warning will disappear.

OLFH044262LOAD045142L

■ Front and rear■ Rear

OAE046462L/OAEE046116

3-71

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check Hybrid system

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the hybrid

control system.

Refrain from driving when the warn-

ing message is displayed.

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check Hybrid system.

Turn off engine

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the hybrid

system.The " " indicator will blink

and a warning chime will sound until

the problem is solved.

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check Hybrid system.

Do not start engine

This message is displayed when the

hybrid battery power (SOC) level is

low. A warning chime will sound until

the problem is solved.

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OLFH044228L OLFH044240L

OLFH044248L

3-72

Convenient features of your vehicle

Stop vehicle and check power

supply

This message is displayed when a

failure occurs in the power supply

system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and we recommend

that you tow your vehicle to the near-

est HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the vehicle inspected.

Stop vehicle to charge battery

This message is displayed when the

hybrid battery power (SOC) level is

low.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and wait until the hybrid

battery is charged.

Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery

damage

This message is displayed when the

fuel tank is nearly empty.

You should refill the fuel tank to pre-

vent hybrid battery damage.

OLFH044232L

OLFH044242LOLFH044230L

3-73

Convenient features of your vehicle

Refill inverter coolant

This message is displayed when the

inverter coolant is nearly empty.

You should refill the inverter coolant.

Stop vehicle and check brakes

This message is displayed when a

failure occurs in the brake system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and recommend that

you tow your vehicle to the nearest

HYUNDAI authorised repairer and

have the vehicle inspected.

Check brakes

This message is displayed when the

brake performance is low or the

regenerative brake does not work

properly due to a failure in the brake

system.

In this case, it may take longer for the

brake pedal to operate and the brak-

ing distance may become longer.

OLFH044234L OLFH044250LOLFH044244L

3-74

Check Virtual Engine Sound

System

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the Virtual

Engine Sound System (VESS).

In this case, we recommend that you

have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Unplug vehicle to start

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when you

start the engine without unplugging

the charging cable. Unplug the

charging cable, and then start the

vehicle.

Remaining charge time

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed to notify

the remaining time to fully charge the

battery.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OLFP045258N

OAEPH047193L

OLFH044543L

3-75

Convenient features of your vehicle

Wait until fuel door opens

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when you

attempt to open the fuel filler door

with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait

until the fuel tank is depressurized.

Information

It may take up to 20 seconds to open

fuel filler door.

Check fuel door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the fuel filler

door. Such as, when the fuel filler

door does not open after 20 seconds

at freezing temperature.

Information

When the fuel filler door is frozen and

does not open after 20 seconds at

freezing temperature, slightly tap the

fuel filler door and then attempt to

open it. In other cases, we recommend

that you have your vehicle inspected

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuel door open

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

fuel filler door opens after the fuel

tank is depressurized. If this mes-

sage is displayed, you can refuel the

fuel tank.

OAEPH047201L

OAEPH047526L

OAEPH047525L

3-76

Check fuel door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle is driven with the fuel filler

door opened. Close the fuel filler

door and then start driving.

Check DAW (Driver Attention

Warning) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system.We

recommend that you have the vehi-

cle inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

For more information, refer to

“Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system” in chapter 5.

Shift to P to charge

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

charging connector is plugged with

the shift lever in R (Reverse), N

(Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift

lever to P (Park) and re-start the

charging process.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAEPH047202L

OAEPH047526L OAEPH058237N

3-77

Convenient features of your vehicle

Charger Error!

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the charger.

Aux. Battery Saver+ used while

parked (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

Aux. Battery Saver+ function has

been completed when the vehicle is

turned ON.

For more information, refer to

“Hybrid System Overview”provided

in the front of the owner’s manual.

Switching to Hybrid mode to

allow heating or air condition-

ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle automatically switches to

HEV mode to allow heating or air

conditioning. It is when the coolant

temperature is low (below -14°C)

and the driver turns on the heating or

cooling system.

If the coolant temperature gets high-

er than -14°C or the driver turns off

the heating or cooling system the

vehicle returns to its default (EV)

mode.

OAEE046134

OAEE046143L

OAEPH047207L

3-78

Maintaining Hybrid mode to

allow heating or air condition-

ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle maintains the HEV mode to

allow heating or air conditioning.The

mode does not change when the

driver presses the [EV/HEV] button

to switch from the HEV mode to EV

mode whilst the heating and cooling

system is on and the coolant temper-

ature is below -14°C.

Low/High System Temp.

Maintaining Hybrid mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

temperature of the high-voltage

(hybrid) battery is too low or too high.

This warning message is to protect

the battery and the hybrid system.

Low/High System Temp.

Switching to Hybrid mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

temperature of the high-voltage

(hybrid) battery is too low or high.

This warning message is to protect

the battery and the hybrid system.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAEPH047205L/OAEPH047206L

OAEPH047203L/OAEPH047204L

OAEPH047527L

3-79

Convenient features of your vehicle

Switching to Hybrid mode to

lubricate engine

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle is automatically switched to

the HEV mode to lubricate engine

whilst the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Maintaining Hybrid mode to pro-

tect engine

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

[EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is

impossible to switch from the HEV

mode to EV mode due to engine

lubrication.

Exit SPORT to switch to electric

mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

[EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is

impossible to switch from the HEV

mode to EV mode because the

SPORT mode is engaged.

OAEPH047530L

OAEPH047528L

OAEPH047531L

3-80

Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD display control

The LCD display modes can be

changed by using the control buttons.

(1) : MODE button for changing

modes

(2) , : MOVE switch for

changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for

setting or resetting the select-

ed item

LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY

OAE046402

■■

3-81

Convenient features of your vehicle

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

This mode displays the state of :

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

- Smart Cruise Control

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system",

"Smart Cruise Control (SCC)", "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system"

in chapter 5

A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Information

This mode displays the service interval (mileage or days) and warning mes-

sages related to the Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) system, etc.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

or or

LCD display modes (for cluster type A)

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-82

Convenient features of your vehicle

Edit settings after shifting to P

This warning message appears if

you try to adjust the User Settings

whilst driving.

For your safety, change the User

Settings after parking the vehicle,

applying the parking brake and mov-

ing the shift lever to P (Park).

Quick guide (Help)

This mode provides quick guides for

the systems in the User Settings

mode.

Select an item, press and hold the

OK button.

For more information about each

system, refer to this Owner’s

Manual.

Trip computer mode

The trip computer mode displays

information related to vehicle driving

parameters including fuel economy,

tripmeter information and vehicle

speed.

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

OAE046463N

OTL045174

3-83

Convenient features of your vehicle

Assist mode (if equipped)

SCC/LKA/DAW (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) and Driver

Attention Warning (DAW).

For more information, refer to

each system information in chap-

ter 5.

A/V mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

A/V system.

Information mode

This mode displays the service inter-

val (mileage and days).

Service interval

Service in

It calculates and displays the mainte-

nance schedule (mileage or days),

as set in the system.

When the set mileages or days

passed, "Service in" message is dis-

played for several seconds each time

ignition switch is turned ON.

OAD055080N OTL045178

OTLA045182

3-84

Convenient features of your vehicle

Service required

If you exceed the specified service

interval, a message indicating,

"Service required" will be displayed

each time you turn ON the vehicle.

To reset the service interval in

mileages or days that you initially

set, press the OK button for more

than 1 second.

Service in OFF

If the service interval is not set,

"Service in OFF" message is dis-

played on the LCD display.

Information

If any of the following conditions

occur, the mileage and number of days

to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

Warning message

If one of followings occurs, warning

messages will be displayed in the

information mode for several sec-

onds.

- Low washer fluid (if equipped)

- Exterior lamp malfunction

(if equipped)

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- Smart cruise control malfunction

(if equipped)

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System malfunction (if equipped)

- Service reminder (if equipped)

OTLA045297 OTL045299L

3-85

Convenient features of your vehicle

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the

settings of the instrument cluster,

doors, lamps, etc.

1. Driver assistance

2. Door

3. Lights

4. Sound

5. Convenience

6. Service Interval

7. Other Features

8. Reset

The information provided may differ

depending on which functions are

applicable to your vehicle.

1. Driver assistance

• Lane safety

- LDW (Lane Departure

Warning)/Standard LKA (Lane

Keep Assist)/Active LKA (Lane

Keep Assist

To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system.

For more information, refer to the

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System" in chapter 5.

• DAW (Driver Attention Warning)

- High sensitivity/Normal sensitivi-

ty/Off

To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver

Attention Warning.

For more information, refer to the

"Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System" in chapter 5.

• SCC (Smart Cruise Control)

- Response (Fast/Normal/Slow)

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Smart Cruise Control system.

For more information, refer to the

"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter

• FCA (Forward Collision Avoidance

Assist)

To activate or deactivate the FCA

system.

For more information, refer to

“Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system”in chapter 5.

• FCW (Forward Collision Warning)

- Early/Normal/Late

To adjust the initial warning alert

time for Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA) system.

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

3-86

• Rear Collision Warning

- RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

To activate or deactivate the Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision Warning

function.

- BCW sound (Blind-Spot Collision

Warning)

To activate or deactivate the Blind-

Spot Collision Warning sound.

For more information, refer to

"Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system" in chapter 5.

• Coasting guidance

- Coasting guidance: To activate or

deactivate the Coasting Guide sys-

tem.

- Sound: To activate or deactivate

the Coasting Guide system sound.

- Coasting timing (Early/Normal/

Late)

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Coasting Guide.

For more information, refer to

"Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.

2. Door

• Auto Lock

- Disable: The auto door lock opera-

tion will be cancelled.

- Enable on Speed: All doors will be

automatically locked when the vehi-

cle speed exceeds 9.3mph

(15km/h).

- Enable on Shift: All doors will be

automatically locked if the automat-

ic transmission shift lever is shifted

from the P (Park) position to the R

(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)

position.

• Auto Unlock

- Disable:The auto door unlock oper-

ation will be cancelled.

- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the

Engine Start/Stop button is set to

the OFF position. (if equipped with

smart key)

- On Key Out: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the igni-

tion key is removed from the igni-

tion switch.(if equipped with remote

key)

- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked if the automatic

transmission shift lever is shifted to

the P (Park) position.

• Horn Feedback

To activate or deactivate the horn

feedback.

If the horn feedback is activated,

after locking the door by pressing the

lock button on the remote key, and

pressing it again within 4 seconds,

the horn feedback sound will operate

once to indicate that all doors are

locked.

Convenient features of your vehicle

3-87

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Lights

• One Touch Turn Signal

- Off:The one touch turn signal func-

tion will be deactivated.

- 3, 5, 7 Flashes:The turn signal indi-

cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when

the turn signal lever is moved

slightly.

For more information, refer to

"Light" in this chapter.

• Headlamp Delay

To activate or deactivate the head-

lamp delay function.

For more information, refer to

"Light" in this chapter

4. Sound

• Volume for PDW (Parking Distance

Warning)

- Level 1~3

To adjust the Park Assist System

volume.

5. Convenience

• Seat Easy Access

- None: The seat easy access func-

tion is deactivated.

- Normal/Extended: When you turn

off the engine, the driver's seat will

automatically move rearward short

(Normal) or long (Extended) for you

to enter or exit the vehicle more

comfortably.

For more information, refer to

"Driver Position Memory System"

in this chapter.

• Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless

charging system in the front seat.

For more information, refer to

"Wireless Charging System" in

this chapter.

• Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/

Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display

shows the selected Wiper/Light

mode whenever you change the

mode.

• Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear

position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position

will be displayed on the LCD display.

3-88

Convenient features of your vehicle

6. Service Interval

• Service Interval

To activate or deactivate the service

interval function.

• Adjust Interval

If the service interval menu is acti-

vated, you may adjust the time and

distance.

Information

To use the service interval menu, we

recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If the service interval is activated and

the time and distance is adjusted,

messages are displayed in the fol-

lowing situations each time the vehi-

cle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the

remaining mileage and days to

service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and

days to service has been reached

or passed.

Information

If any of the following conditions

occur, the mileage and number of days

to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

7. Other Features

• Aux. Battery Saver+

To activate or deactivate the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function.

When activated, the high voltage bat-

tery is used to keep the 12V battery

charged.

For more information, refer to the

"Hybrid System Overview" provid-

ed in the front of the owner’s man-

ual.

3-89

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Fuel Economy Auto Reset

- Off: The average fuel economy will

not reset automatically whenever

refuelling.

- After Ignition: When the engine has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refuelling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 litres) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

• Fuel Economy Unit

To select the fuel economy unit.

(km/L, L/100, MPG)

• Temperature Unit

To select the temperature unit.

(°C,°F)

• Tyre Pressure Unit

To select the tyre pressure unit.

(psi, kPa, bar)

• Language

To select language.

8. Reset

You can reset the menus in the User

Settings Mode.All menus in the User

Settings Mode are reset to factory

settings, except language and serv-

ice interval.

3-90

Convenient features of your vehicle

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

This mode displays the state of :

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

- Smart Cruise Control

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

- Tyre pressure

For more information, refer to " Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system” , " Smart

Cruise Control (SCC)”, “Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system” in chapter 5

and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

Warning

This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system, etc.

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

LCD display modes (for cluster type B)

3-91

Convenient features of your vehicle

Edit settings after shifting to P

This warning message appears if

you try to adjust the User Settings

whilst driving.

For your safety, change the User

Settings after parking the vehicle,

applying the parking brake and mov-

ing the shift lever to P (Park).

Quick guide help

This mode provides quick guides for

the systems in the User Settings

mode.

Select an item, press and hold the

OK button.

For more information about each

system, refer to this Owner’s

Manual.

Trip computer mode

The trip computer mode displays

information related to vehicle driving

parameters including fuel economy,

tripmeter information and vehicle

speed.

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

OAE046132L OAE046121N

3-92

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

Assist mode

SCC/LKA/DAW

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) and Driver

Attention Warning (DAW).

For more information, refer to

each system information in chap-

ter 5.

Tyre Pressure

This mode displays information relat-

ed to Tyre Pressure.

For more information, refer to

"Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

OAE046133N OAE056183N

OAE066030L

3-93

Convenient features of your vehicle

Warning mode

If one of followings occurs, warning

messages will be displayed on the

LCD display for several seconds.

- Lower washer fluid (if equipped)

- Exterior lamp malfunction

(if equipped)

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- Smart cruise control malfunction

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System malfunction (if equipped)

- Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the

settings of the instrument cluster,

doors, lamps, etc.

1. Driver assistance

2. Door

3. Lights

4. Sound

5. Convenience

6. Service Interval

7. Other Features

8. Reset

The information provided differs

according to the items applied to your

vehicle.

1. Driver assistance

• Lane safety

- LDW (Lane Departure Warning)/

Standard LKA (Lane Keep Assist)/

Active LKA (Lane Keep Assist)

To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system.

For more information, refer to the

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-

tem" in chapter 5.

• DAW (Driver Attention Warning)

- High sensitivity/Normal sensitivi-

ty/Off

To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW).

For more information, refer to the

"Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system " in chapter 5.

• SCC response

- Fast/Normal/Slow

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Smart Cruise Control system.

For more information, refer to the

"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter

• FCA (Forward Collision Avoidance

Assist)

To activate or deactivate the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA).

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA)" in chapter 5.

3-94

Convenient features of your vehicle

• FCW (Forward Collision Warning)

- Early/Normal/Late

To adjust the initial warning alert

time for Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA) system.

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

• BCW sound (Blind-Spot Collision

Warning)

To activate or deactivate the Blind-

Spot Collision Warning Sound.

For more information, refer to

"Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system" in chapter 5.

• RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning

To activate or deactivate the Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision Warning func-

tion system.

For more information, refer to

"Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system" in chapter 5.

• Coasting guidance

- Coasting guidance: To activate or

deactivate the Coasting Guide sys-

tem.

- Sound: To activate or deactivate

the Coasting Guide system sound.

For more information, refer to

"Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.

• Coasting timing (Early/Normal/Late)

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Coasting Guide.

For more information, refer to

"Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.

2. Door

• Automatically Lock

- Disable: The auto door lock opera-

tion will be cancelled.

- Enable on Speed: All doors will be

automatically locked when the vehi-

cle speed exceeds 9.3mph

(15km/h).

- Enable on Shift: All doors will be

automatically locked if the automat-

ic transmission shift lever is shifted

from the P (Park) position to the R

(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)

position.

• Automatically Unlock

- Disable:The auto door unlock oper-

ation will be cancelled.

- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the

Engine Star/Stop button is set to

the OFF position. (if equipped with

smart key)

- On Key Out: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the igni-

tion key is removed from the igni-

tion switch.(if equipped with remote

key)

- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked if the automatic

transmission shift lever is shifted to

the P (Park) position.

• Horn Feedback

To activate or deactivate the horn

feedback.

If the horn feedback is activated,

after locking the door by pressing the

lock button on the remote key, and

pressing it again within 4 seconds,

the horn feedback sound will operate

once to indicate that all doors are

locked.

3-95

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Lights

• One Touch Turn Signal

- Off:The one touch turn signal func-

tion will be deactivated.

- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-

cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when

the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more information, refer to

"Light" in this chapter.

• Headlamp Delay

To activate or deactivate the head-

lamp delay function.

For more information, refer to

"Light" in this chapter

4. Sound

• Volume for PDW (Parking Distance

Warning)

- Level 1~3

To adjust the Park Assist System

volume.

5. Convenience

• Seat Easy Access

- None: The seat easy access func-

tion is deactivated.

- Normal/Extended: When you turn

off the engine, the driver's seat will

automatically move rearward short

(Normal) or long (Extended) for you

to enter or exit the vehicle more

comfortably.

For more information, refer to

"Driver Position Memory System"

in this chapter.

• Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless

charging system in the front seat.

For more information, refer to

"Wireless Charging System" in

this chapter.

• Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/

Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display

shows the selected Wiper/Light

mode whenever you changed the

mode.

• Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear

position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position

will be displayed on the LCD display.

6. Service Interval

• Service Interval

To activate or deactivate the service

interval function.

• Adjust Interval

If the service interval menu is acti-

vated, you may adjust the time and

distance.

Information

To use the service interval menu, con-

sult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

3-96

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the service interval is activated and

the time and distance is adjusted,

messages are displayed in the fol-

lowing situations each time the vehi-

cle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the

remaining mileage and days to

service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and

days to service has been reached

or passed.

Information

If any of the following conditions

occur, the mileage and number of days

to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

7. Other Features

• Aux. Battery Saver+

To activate or deactivate the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function.

When activated, the high voltage bat-

tery is used to keep the 12V battery

charged.

For more information, refer to the

“Hybrid System Overview”provided

in the front of the owner’s manual.

• Fuel Economy Auto Reset

- Off: The average fuel economy will

not reset automatically whenever

refuelling.

- After Ignition: When the engine has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refuelling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 litres) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

• Fuel Economy Unit

To select the fuel economy unit.

(km/L, L/100, MPG)

• Temperature Unit

To select the temperature unit.

(°C,°F)

• Tyre Pressure Unit

To select the tyre pressure unit.

(psi, kPa, bar)

• Language

To select language.

8. Reset

You can reset the menus in the User

Settings Mode.All menus in the User

Settings Mode are reset to factory

settings, except language and serv-

ice interval.

3-97

Convenient features of your vehicle

TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR ((HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

Information

Some driving information stored in the

trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Trip modes

To change the trip mode, toggle the

“ , ”switch on the steering wheel.

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Elapsed Time

• Distance to Empty

(Only for cluster type A)

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Digital Speedometer

Driving Style

Energy Flow

Engine Coolant Temperature

(Only for cluster type B)

OAE046402

■■

3-98

Convenient features of your vehicle

Distance to empty/

Average fuel economy/

Instant fuel economy

Distance to Empty (1)

• The distance to empty is the esti-

mated distance the vehicle can be

driven with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "----" as distance to empty.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the distance to empty func-

tion may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ

from the actual driving distance as

it is an estimate of the available

driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 2 gallon (6

litres) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to

empty may vary significantly based

on driving conditions, driving habits,

and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calcu-

lated by the total driving distance

and fuel consumption since the last

average fuel economy reset.

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the OK button on the

steering wheel for more than 1 sec-

ond when the average fuel economy

is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average

fuel economy, select between "After

Ignition" or "After Refuelling" in the

User Settings mode on the LCD dis-

play.

- After Ignition: When the engine has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refuelling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 litres) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a min-

imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instanta-

neous fuel economy whilst driving.

OAE046465N/OAE046464N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-99

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/

Elapsed time

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving

distance since the last tripmeter

reset.

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

OK button on the steering wheel

for more than 1 second when the

tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-

tance and driving time since the

last average vehicle speed reset.

• To reset the average vehicle speed,

press the OK button on the steering

wheel for more than 1 second when

the average vehicle speed is dis-

played.

Information

• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is less

than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the

driving time is less than 10 seconds,

after resetting the vehicle speed.

• The average vehicle speed will con-

tinue to be calculated and will start

to decrease if the vehicle is stopped

whilst the engine is still running (for

example, when the vehicle is in traf-

fic or stopped at a stop light.)

Elapsed Time (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driv-

ing time since the last elapsed time

reset.

• To reset the elapsed time, press the

OK button on the steering wheel for

more than 1 second when the

elapsed time is displayed.

Information

The elapsed time will continue to be

counted whilst the engine is still run-

ning (for example, when the vehicle is

in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

OAE046463N/OAE046121N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-100

Convenient features of your vehicle

Digital speedometer

This message shows the speed of

the vehicle (km/h, MPH).

Drive Info display

At the end of each driving cycle, the

Driving Info message is displayed.

This display shows the trip distance

(1), the average fuel economy (2), and

the remaining vehicle range (3).

This information is displayed for a few

seconds when you turn off the igni-

tion, and then goes off automatically.

The information is calculated for each

ignition cycle.

If the estimated remaining vehicle

range is below 1 mi. (1 km), the dis-

tance to empty will display as "----" and

a "Low Fuel" warning message (4) will

be displayed.

Information

If sunroof open warning is displayed

in the cluster, the Driving Info mes-

sage will not be displayed.

OTLA045194/OAEE046153R

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046479N

■ Type A

3-101

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driving style

The driving style is displayed when

you are driving in ECO mode.

When you drive in SPORT mode,

each driving category will be dis-

played with “--”.

Energy flow

The hybrid system informs the driv-

ers its energy flow in various operat-

ing modes.Whilst driving, the current

energy flow is specified in 11 modes.

For more information, refer to HEV

Energy Flow in the “Hybrid System

Overview” provided in front of the

owner’s manual.

Engine coolant temperature

This gauge indicates the tempera-

ture of the engine coolant when the

engine is running.

When the gauge indicator gets out

of the normal range, toward the “H

(Hot)” position, it indicates over-

heating of the engine. It may dam-

age the engine.

Do not continue driving with the

overheated engine. For further

information, refer to “If the Engine

Overheats” in the chapter 6.

NOTICE

OAE046148L/OAE046124L

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046125L

■ Type B

OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L

3-102

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

Information

Some driving information stored in the

trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Trip modes

For cluster type A

For cluster type B

TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR ((PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Elapsed Time

• Distance to Empty

(Only for cluster type A)

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Digital Speedometer

Range

(Electric/Petrol)

Driving Style

Energy Flow

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Elapsed Time

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Range

(Electric/Petrol)

Digital Speedometer

Driving Style

Energy Flow

Engine Coolant Temperature

3-103

Convenient features of your vehicle

To change the trip mode, toggle the

“ , ”switch on the steering wheel.

Total range/Range

The range is the estimated distance

the vehicle can be driven with the

remaining fuel in the fuel tank

(Petrol) and high-voltage (hybrid)

battery (Electric).

If the estimated distance is below 1

mile (1km), the trip computer will dis-

play “---” as the range.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the range function may not

operate correctly.

• The range may differ from the actu-

al driving distance as it is an esti-

mate of the available driving dis-

tance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 2 gallon (6

litres) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The range may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

OAE046402

■■

OAEPH047534R/OAEPH047153R

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-104

Distance to empty/

Average fuel economy/

Instant fuel economy

Distance to Empty (1)

• The distance to empty is the esti-

mated distance the vehicle can be

driven with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "----" as distance to empty.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the distance to empty func-

tion may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ

from the actual driving distance as

it is an estimate of the available

driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 2 gallon (6

litres) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to

empty may vary significantly based

on driving conditions, driving habits,

and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calcu-

lated by the total driving distance

and fuel consumption since the last

average fuel economy reset.

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the OK button on the

steering wheel for more than 1 sec-

ond when the average fuel economy

is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average

fuel economy, select between "After

Ignition" or "After Refuelling" in the

User Settings mode on the LCD dis-

play.

- After Ignition: When the engine has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refuelling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 litres) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a min-

imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAE046465N/OAE046464N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-105

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instanta-

neous fuel economy whilst driving.

Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/

Elapsed time

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving

distance since the last tripmeter

reset.

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

OK button on the steering wheel

for more than 1 second when the

tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-

tance and driving time since the

last average vehicle speed reset.

• To reset the average vehicle speed,

press the OK button on the steering

wheel for more than 1 second when

the average vehicle speed is dis-

played.

Information

• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is less

than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the

driving time is less than 10 seconds,

after resetting the vehicle speed.

• The average vehicle speed will con-

tinue to be calculated and will start

to decrease if the vehicle is stopped

whilst the engine is still running (for

example, when the vehicle is in traf-

fic or stopped at a stop light.)

OAE046463N/OAE046121N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-106

Elapsed Time (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driv-

ing time since the last elapsed time

reset.

• To reset the elapsed time, press the

OK button on the steering wheel for

more than 1 second when the

elapsed time is displayed.

Information

The elapsed time will continue to be

counted whilst the engine is still run-

ning (for example, when the vehicle is

in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

Digital speedometer

This message shows the speed of

the vehicle (km/h, MPH).

Drive Info display

At the end of each driving cycle, the

Driving Info message is displayed.

This display shows the trip distance

(1), average fuel economy (2), remain-

ing vehicle range (3), and charging

status (4).

This information is displayed for a few

seconds when you turn off the vehicle,

and then goes off automatically. The

information is calculated for each time

the vehicle is turned on

Information

If sunroof open warning is displayed

in the cluster, the Drive Info message

will not be displayed.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045194/OAEE046153R

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAEPH047537R/OAEPH047538R

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-107

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driving style

The driving style is displayed when

you are driving in ECO mode.

When you drive in SPORT mode,

each driving category will be dis-

played with “--”.

Energy flow

The hybrid system informs the driv-

ers its energy flow in various operat-

ing modes.Whilst driving, the current

energy flow is specified in 11 modes.

For more information, refer to HEV

Energy Flow in the “Hybrid System

Overview” provided in front of the

owner’s manual.

Engine coolant temperature

This gauge indicates the tempera-

ture of the engine coolant when the

engine is running.

When the gauge indicator gets out

of the normal range, toward the “H

(Hot)” position, it indicates over-

heating of the engine. It may dam-

age the engine.

Do not continue driving with the

overheated engine. For further

information, refer to “If the Engine

Overheats” in the chapter 6.

NOTICE

OAE046148L/OAE046124L

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046125L

■ Type B

OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L

3-108

Convenient features of your vehicle

Exterior lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at

the end of the control lever to one of

the following positions:

(1) O (OFF) position

(2) AUTO light position

(3) Position lamp position

(4) Headlamp position

AUTO light position

When the light switch is in the AUTO

position, the position lamp and head-

lamp will be turned ON or OFF auto-

matically depending on the amount

of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in

operation, it is recommended to

manually turn ON the lamps when

driving at night or in fog, or when you

enter dark areas, such as tunnels

and parking facilities.

• Do not cover or spill anything on

the sensor (1) located on the

instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a

window cleaner, the cleanser

may leave a light film which

could interfere with sensor oper-

ation.

• If your vehicle has window tint

or other types of metallic coat-

ing on the front windscreen, the

AUTO light system may not work

properly.

NOTICE

LLIIGGHHTT

OAE046449L

OAE046451L

3-109

Convenient features of your vehicle

Position lamp position ( )

The position lamp, license plate lamp

and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, position lamp,

license plate lamp and instrument

panel lamp are turned ON.

Information

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlamp.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlamp,

push the lever away from you. The

lever will return to its original posi-

tion.

The high beam indicator will light

when the headlamp high beams are

switched on.

OAE046469L

OAE046467L

OAE046453L

3-110

Convenient features of your vehicle

To turn off the high beam headlamp,

pull the lever towards you. The low

beams will turn on.

To flash the high beam headlamp,

pull the lever towards you, then

release the lever. The high beams

will remain ON as long as you hold

the lever towards you.

Turn signals and lane change

signals

To signal a turn, push down on the

lever for a left turn or up for a right

turn in position (A). To signal a lane

change, move the turn signal lever

slightly and hold it in position (B).

The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released or when the turn

is completed.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one

of the turn signal bulbs may be

burned out and will require replace-

ment.

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles approaching

you. Using high beam could

obstruct the other driver's vision.

WARNING

OAE046455L

OAE046457L

3-111

Convenient features of your vehicle

One-touch turn signal function

To activate a one-touch turn signal

function, move the turn signal lever

slightly and then release it. The lane

change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7

times.

You can activate/deactivate the One

Touch Turn Signal function or choose

the number of blinks (3, 5, or 7) from

the User Settings Mode on the LCD

display. For more information, refer

to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Rear fog lamp

To turn on the rear fog lamp:

Position the light switch in the head-

lamp position, and then turn the light

switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.

To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one

of the following:

• Turn off the headlamp switch.

• Turn the light switch to the rear fog

lamp position again.

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the position lamp when the

driver turns the engine off and opens

the driver-side door.

With this feature, the position lamps

will turn off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on

when the engine is turned off, perform

the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the position lamps OFF and

ON again using the light switch on

the steering column.

OAE046459L

3-112

Convenient features of your vehicle

Headlamp delay function

(if equipped)

If you place the ignition switch to the

ACC or OFF position with the head-

lamps ON, the headlamps (and/or

position lamps) remain on for about 5

minutes.However, with the engine off

if the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the headlamps (and/or posi-

tion lamps) are turned off after 15

seconds.

The headlamps (and/or position

lamps) can be turned off by pressing

the lock button on the remote key or

smart key twice or turning the light

switch to the OFF or AUTO position.

However, if you turn the light switch

to the AUTO position when it is dark

outside, the headlamps will not be

turned off.

You can activate or deactivate the

Headlamp Delay function from the

User Settings Mode on the LCD dis-

play. For more information, refer to

"LCD Display" in this chapter.

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors (except dri-

ver's door), the battery saver func-

tion does not operate and the

headlamp delay function does not

turn off automatically. Therefore, It

causes the battery to be dis-

charged. In this case, make sure to

turn off the lamp before getting out

of the vehicle.

Daytime running light (DRL)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

can make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day, especially after dawn and before

sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedi-

cated lamp OFF when:

1.The headlamps are in the ON

position.

2.The engine is turned off.

Headlamp levelling device

Manual type

To adjust the headlamp beam level

according to the number of the pas-

sengers and loading weight in the

luggage area, turn the beam levelling

switch.

The higher the number on the switch

position, the lower the headlamp

beam level. Always keep the head-

light beam at the proper levelling

position, or headlamps may dazzle

other road users.

NOTICE

OAE046408R

3-113

Convenient features of your vehicle

Listed below are examples of appro-

priate switch settings for varying

loads. For loading conditions other

than those listed, adjust the switch

position to the most similar situation.

Automatic type

It automatically adjusts the head-

lamp beam level according to the

number of passengers and loading

weight in the luggage area.

It also adjusts to the appropriate head-

lamp beam level for various situations.

Welcome system (if equipped)

Welcome light (if equipped)

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and tailgate) are

closed and locked, the puddle lamp

will come on for about 15 seconds if

any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the remote key or

smart key.

• When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed with the

smart key in possession.

• When the vehicle is approached

with the smart key in possession.

(if equipped)

Loading condition

Switch

position

Driver only 0

Driver + Front passenger 0

Full passengers (including driver) 1

Full passengers (including driver)

+ Maximum permissible loading

Driver + Maximum permissible

If the function does not work

properly, we recommend that

the system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the wiring yourself.

WARNING

OAE046409

3-114

Convenient features of your vehicle

Also, if the outside rearview mirror

folding switch is in the AUTO position,

the outside rearview mirror will unfold

automatically.

Door handle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and tailgate) are

closed and locked, the door handle

lamp will come on for about 15 sec-

onds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the remote key or smart

key.

• When the button of the outside door

handle is pressed with the smart

key in possession.

• When the vehicle is approached

with the smart key in possession.

Headlamp and Position lamp

When the headlamp (lamp switch in

the headlamp or AUTO position) is

on and all doors (and tailgate) are

locked and closed, the position lamp

and headlamp will come on for 15

seconds if/or any of the below is per-

formed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the remote key or smart

key.

At this time, if you press the door lock

or unlock button, the position lamp and

headlamp will turn off immediately.

You can activate or deactivate the

Welcome Light from the User

Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to

"LCD Display" in this chapter.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in

the DOOR position and all doors (and

tailgate) are closed and locked, the

room lamp will come on for 30 sec-

onds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the remote key or

smart key.

• When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock

or unlock button, the room lamp will

turn off immediately.

3-115

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior lights

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is turned off or the battery will dis-

charge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically

go off approximately 20 minutes after

the engine is turned off and the

doors are closed.If a door is opened,

the lamp will go off 40 minutes after

the engine is turned off. If the doors

are locked by the remote key or

smart key and the vehicle enters the

armed stage of the theft alarm sys-

tem, the lamps will go off five sec-

onds later.

Front lamps

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Door Lamp

(3) Front Room Lamp

Front Map Lamp :

Press either lens to turn the map

lamp on or off. This light produces a

spot beam for convenient use as a

map lamp at night or as a personal

lamp for the driver and the front pas-

senger.

Front Door Lamp ( ):

The front or rear room lamps come on

when the front or rear doors are

opened if the engine is running or not.

When doors are unlocked by the

remote key or smart key, the front and

rear lamps come on for approximate-

ly 30 seconds as long as any door is

not opened. The front and rear room

lamps go out gradually after approxi-

mately 30 seconds if the door is

closed. However, if the ignition switch

is in the ON position or all doors are

locked, the front and rear lamps will

turn off. If a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ACC position or

the OFF position, the front and rear

lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

Front room lamp

•:

Press the button to turn ON the

room lamp for the front/rear seats.

•:

Press the button to turn OFF the

room lamp for the front/rear seats.

NOTICE

OAEPH047539L

3-116

Convenient features of your vehicle

Rear lamps

Rear Room Lamp Switch ( ):

Press this button to turn the room

lamp on and off.

Do not leave the lamp switches on

for an extended period of time

when the engine is turned off.

Luggage compartment lamp

The luggage compartment lamp

comes on when the tailgate is

opened.

The luggage compartment lamp

comes on as long as the tailgate

is open. To prevent unnecessary

charging system drain, close the

tailgate securely after using the

tailgate.

NOTICE

OAE046418

OAE046445

OAEE046421

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-117

Convenient features of your vehicle

Vanity mirror lamp

Push the switch to turn the light on or

off.

• :The lamp will turn on if this

button is pressed.

• :The lamp will turn off if this

button is pressed.

Always have the switch in the off

position when the vanity mirror

lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor

is closed without the lamp off, it

may discharge the battery or dam-

age the sunvisor.

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

Welcome light

When all doors (and tailgate) are

closed and locked, the puddle lamp

will come on for 15 seconds if the

door is unlocked by the remote

key/smart key or outside door handle

button.

For more information, refer to

"Welcome System" in this chapter.

Escort light

When the ignition switch is in the

LOCK/OFF position and the driver's

door is opened, the puddle lamp will

come on for 30 seconds. If the dri-

ver's door is closed within the 30

seconds, the puddle lamp will turn off

after 15 seconds. If the driver's door

is closed and locked, the puddle

lamp will turn off immediately.

The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will

turn on only the first time the driver's

door is opened after the engine is

turned off.

NOTICE

OAD045410/H OAE046419

3-118

Convenient features of your vehicle

WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS

A :Wiper speed control

· MIST /

– Single wipe

· OFF / O – Off

· AUTO* – Auto control wipe

· INT / --- – Intermittent wipe

· LO / 1 – Low wiper speed

· HI / 2 – High wiper speed

B : Auto control wipe time adjust-

ment

C :Wash with brief wipes

* : if equipped

Windscreen wipers

Operates as follows when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

MIST (

) : For a single wiping cycle,

push the lever upward (or

downward) and release.

The wipers will operate

continuously if the lever

is held in this position.

OFF (O) : Wiper is not in operation.

INT (---) :Wiper operates intermit-

tently at the same wiping

intervals.To vary the speed

setting, turn the speed

control knob (B).

AUTO : The rain sensor located on

the upper end of the wind-

screen glass senses the

amount of rainfall and con-

trols the wiping cycle for the

proper interval. The more it

rains, the faster the wiper

operates. When the rain

stops, the wiper stops.To

vary the speed setting, turn

the speed control knob (B).

LO (1) :The wiper runs at a lower

speed.

HI (2) :The wiper runs at a higher

speed.

Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windscreen, defrost the

windscreen for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windscreen wipers to

ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or

ice before using the wiper and washer,

it may damage the wiper and washer

system.

OAD045437L

OAD045438L

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-119

Convenient features of your vehicle

AUTO (Automatic) control

(if equipped)

The rain sensor located on the upper

end of the windscreen glass senses

the amount of rainfall and controls

the wiping cycle for the proper inter-

val. The more it rains, the faster the

wiper operates.

When the rain stops, the wiper stops.

To vary the speed setting, turn the

speed control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO

mode when the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the wiper will oper-

ate once to perform a self-check of

the system. Set the wiper to OFF

position when the wiper is not in use.

• When washing the vehicle, set

the wiper switch in the OFF (O)

position to stop the auto wiper

operation. The wiper may oper-

ate and be damaged if the switch

is set in the AUTO mode whilst

washing the vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensor cover

located on the upper end of the

passenger side windscreen

glass. Damage to system parts

could occur and may not be cov-

ered by your vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

OAE046480N

To avoid personal injury from

the windscreen wipers, when

the engine is running and the

windscreen wiper switch is

placed in the AUTO mode:

• Do not touch the upper end of

the windscreen glass facing

the rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of

the windscreen glass with a

damp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the

windscreen glass.

WARNING

Rain Sensor

(O)

3-120

Convenient features of your vehicle

Windscreen washers

In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever

gently toward you to spray washer

fluid on the windscreen and to run the

wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and

wiper operation will continue until you

release the lever. If the washer does

not work, you may need to add wash-

er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

When the outside temperature is

below freezing, ALWAYS warm

the windscreen using the

defroster to prevent the washer

fluid from freezing on the wind-

screen and obscuring your

vision which could result in an

accident and serious injury or

death.

WARNING

• To prevent possible damage

to the washer pump, do not

operate the washer when the

fluid reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windscreen,

do not operate the wipers

when the windscreen is dry.

• To prevent damage to the

wiper arms and other compo-

nents, do not attempt to move

the wipers manually.

• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers and washer sys-

tem, use anti-freezing washer

fluids in the winter season or

cold weather.

CAUTION

OAEE046500R

3-121

Convenient features of your vehicle

Rear View Monitor

The Rear View Monitor will activate

when the engine is running and the

shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion.

This is a supplemental system that

provides a view of the area behind

the vehicle through the A/V display

whilst the vehicle is in the R

(Reverse) position.

Information

Always keep the camera lens clean. The

camera may not work normally if the

lens is covered with dirt or snow.

DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

The Rear View Monitor is not a

safety device. It only serves to

assist the driver in identifying

objects directly behind the mid-

dle of the vehicle. The camera

does NOT cover the complete

area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use any cleanser con-

taining acid or alkaline deter-

gents when cleaning the lens.

Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughly

with water.

CAUTION

• Never rely solely on the rear

camera display when backing-

up.

• ALWAYS look around your

vehicle to make sure there are

no objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any

direction to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention

when the vehicle is driven close

to objects,particularly pedestri-

ans, and especially children.

WARNING

OAE046407R

OAE046406

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-122

Convenient features of your vehicle

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system (if equipped)

The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system assists the driver

during reverse movement of the vehi-

cle by chiming if any object is sensed

within approximately 120 cm (50 in)

behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that senses objects within the

range and location of the sensors, it

cannot detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed.

Operation of the Parking

Distance Warning (Reverse)

System

Operating condition

• This system will activate when

backing up with the ignition switch

in the ON position. However, if the

vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5

km/h), the system may not detect

objects.

• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

(10 km/h), the system will not warn

you even though objects are detect-

ed.

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the clos-

est one will be recognised first.

Types of warning sound and indicator

OAEE046413

Sensors

• ALWAYS look around your vehi-

cle to make sure there are not

any objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any direc-

tion to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention

when the vehicle is driven close

to objects,particularly pedestri-

ans, and especially children.

• Be aware that some objects

may not be visible on the

screen or be detected by the

sensors, due to the objects

distance, size or material, all of

which can limit the effective-

ness of the sensor.

WARNING

Types of warning sound Indicator

When an object is approximately

60 to 120 cm (24 to 47 in) from

the rear bumper, the warning

sound beeps intermittently.

When an object is approximately

30 to 60 cm (12 to 24 in) from

the rear bumper, the warning

sound beeps more frequently.

When an object is within approx-

imately 30 cm (12 in) from the

rear bumper, the warning sound

beeps continuously.

3-123

Convenient features of your vehicle

• The indicator may differ from the

illustration as objects or sen-

sors status. If the indicator

blinks, we recommend that you

have your vehicle checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• If the audible warning does not

sound or if the buzzer sounds

intermittently when shifting into

R (Reverse) position, this may

indicate a malfunction with the

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system. If this occurs,

we recommend that you have

your vehicle checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

To turn off the Parking Distance

Warning (Reverse) system

(if equipped)

Push the button to turn off the

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse)

system. The indicator light on the

button will turn on.

Non-operational conditions of

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system

The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system may not operate

normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with dirt or

debris such as snow or ice, or the

sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of the Rear

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system malfunction

when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces

such as unpaved roads, gravel,

bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive noise

such as vehicle horns, loud motor-

cycle engines, or truck air brakes

can interfere with the sensor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is present.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are present near the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or acces-

sories have been installed, or if the

vehicle bumper height or sensor

installation has been modified.

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is extreme-

ly hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

1 m (40 inches) and narrower than

14 cm (6 inches) in diameter.

NOTICE

OAEE046415RQ

3-124

Convenient features of your vehicle

The following objects may not be

recognised by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-

sor frequency such as clothes,

spongy material or snow.

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system precautions

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system may not operate

consistently in some circum-

stances depending on the speed of

the vehicle and the shapes of the

objects detected.

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system may malfunction

if the vehicle bumper height or sen-

sor installation has been modified

or damaged. Any non-factory

installed equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor

performance.

• The sensor may not recognise

objects less than 40 cm (15 in)

from the sensor, or it may sense an

incorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is blocked with

snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system may be inopera-

tive until the snow or ice melts, or

the debris is removed. Use a soft

cloth to wipe debris away from the

sensor.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the

sensor with any hard objects that

could damage the surface of the

sensor. Sensor damage could

occur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-

rounding area directly with a high

pressure washer. Doing so may

cause the sensors to fail to operate

normally.

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system

(if equipped)

The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system assists the

driver during movement of the vehicle

by chiming if any object is sensed with-

in approximately 100 cm (40 in) in front

and 120 cm (47 in) behind the vehicle.

Your new vehicle warranty does

not cover any accidents or dam-

age to the vehicle or injuries to

its occupants related to a

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) system. Always drive

safely and cautiously.

WARNING

OAEE046414

OAEE046413

■ Front sensor

■ Rear sensor

Sensors

3-125

Convenient features of your vehicle

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that senses objects within the

range and location of the sensors, it

cannot detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed.

Operation of the Parking

Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system

Operating condition

• This system will activate when the

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system button

is pressed with the vehicle on.

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system button

turns on automatically and acti-

vates the Parking Distance

Warning (Reverse/Forward) sys-

tem when you shift to the R

(Reverse) position. However, if the

vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10

km/h), the system will not warn you

even though objects are detected,

and if the vehicle speed exceeds

12 mph (20 km/h), the system will

turn off automatically. To turn on

the system, press the Parking

Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system button.

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the clos-

est one will be recognised first.

• ALWAYS look around your

vehicle to make sure there are

not any objects or obstacles

before moving the vehicle in

any direction to prevent a col-

lision.

• Always pay close attention

when the vehicle is driven close

to objects,particularly pedestri-

ans, and especially children.

• Be aware that some objects

may not be visible on the

screen or be detected by the

sensors, due to the objects

distance, size or material, all

of which can limit the effec-

tiveness of the sensor.

WARNING

OAEE046415R

3-126

Convenient features of your vehicle

Non-operational conditions of

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system may not

operate normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with dirt or

debris such as snow or ice, or the

sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of Parking

Distance Warning (Reverse/

Forward) system malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces

such as unpaved roads, gravel,

bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive noise

such as vehicle horns, loud motor-

cycle engines, or truck air brakes

can interfere with the sensor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is present.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are present near the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or

accessories have been installed, or

if the vehicle bumper height or sen-

sor installation has been modified.

Distance

from object

Warning indicator

Warning sound

When driving

forward

When driving

rearward

61 ~ 100

(24 ~39)

Front -

Buzzer beeps

intermittently

61 ~ 120

(24 ~47)

Rear -

Buzzer beeps

intermittently

31 ~ 60

(12 ~24)

Front

Buzzer beeps

frequently

Rear -

Buzzer beeps

frequently

(12)

Front

Buzzer sounds

continuously

Rear -

Buzzer sounds

continuously

• The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors

status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-

mittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a

malfunction with the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward)

system. If this occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Types of warning sound and indicator

cm (in)

3-127

Convenient features of your vehicle

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is

extremely hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

1 m and narrower than 14 cm in

diameter.

The following objects may not be

recognised by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-

sor frequency such as clothes,

spongy material or snow.

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system pre-

cautions

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system may not

operate consistently in some cir-

cumstances depending on the

speed of the vehicle and the

shapes of the objects detected.

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system may

malfunction if the vehicle bumper

height or sensor installation has

been modified or damaged. Any

non-factory installed equipment or

accessories may also interfere with

the sensor performance.

• The sensor may not recognise

objects less than 40 cm (15 in)

from the sensor, or it may sense an

incorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is blocked with

snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system may be

inoperative until the snow or ice

melts, or the debris is removed.

Use a soft cloth to wipe debris

away from the sensor.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the

sensor with any hard objects that

could damage the surface of the

sensor.Sensor damage could occur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-

rounding area directly with a high

pressure washer. Doing so may

cause the sensors to fail to operate

normally.

Your new vehicle warranty does

not cover any accidents or dam-

age to the vehicle or injuries to

its occupants related to a

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse/Forward) system.

Always drive safely and cau-

tiously.

WARNING

3-128

Convenient features of your vehicle

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAEPH047300R

1. Driver’s temperature control knob

2. Passenger’s temperature control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Rear window defrost button

6. Front windscreen defrost button

7. Air conditioning button

8. Air intake control button

9. Fan speed control button

10. Mode selection button

11. Driver only button

12. SYNC button

13. Climate control information screen

3-129

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air con-

ditioning

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake

and air-conditioning will be controlled

automatically according to the tem-

perature setting.

2.Turn the temperature control knob

to set the desired temperature.

Information

• To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windscreen defrost button

(Press the button one more time to

deselect the front windscreen

defroster function. The 'AUTO'

sign will illuminate on the infor-

mation display once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually whilst other func-

tions operate automatically.

• For your convenience, use the

AUTO button and set the tempera-

ture to 23°C (73°F).

OAE046303R

OAE046302R

3-130

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Never place anything near the sensor

to ensure better control of the heating

and cooling system.

Manual heating and air condi-

tioning

The heating and cooling system can

be controlled manually by pushing

buttons other than the AUTO button.

In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons selected.When pressing any

button except the AUTO button whilst

using automatic operation, the func-

tions not selected will be controlled

automatically.

1.Start the engine.

2.Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling, select:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3.Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4.Set the air intake control to the out-

side (fresh) air position.

5.Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6.If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button to convert to

full automatic control of the system.

OAE046304

3-131

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAE046306R

(if equipped)

Mode selection

3-132

Convenient features of your vehicle

The mode selection button controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted

as follows:

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windscreen with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windscreen and

side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windscreen with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

OAE046305 OAE046307

■ MODE DOWN ( )

■ MODE UP ( )

3-133

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed ( ) using the vent control

lever.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivery from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

Turn the temperature control knob to

set the desired temperature.

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature equally

• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust

the driver and passenger side tem-

perature equally.

The passenger side temperature

will be set to the same temperature

as the driver side temperature.

• Turn the driver side temperature

control knob. The driver and pas-

senger side temperature will be

adjusted equally.

OAE046308R

OAE046309

■ Front

■ Rear (if equipped)

OAE046310

■ Front passenger’s side ■ Driver’s side

OAE046311R

3-134

Convenient features of your vehicle

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually

Press the “SYNC” button again to

adjust the driver and passenger side

temperature individually. The button

indicator will turn off.

Temperature unit conversion

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode

display will reset to Centigrade.

To change the temperature unit from

°C to °F or °F to °C :

- Automatic climate control system

Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-

onds whilst pressing the OFF but-

ton.

- Instrument cluster

Go to User Settings Mode → Other

Features → Temperature Unit.

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside

(fresh) air position or recirculated air

position.

To change the air intake control posi-

tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger

compartment will be

drawn through the heat-

ing system and heated

or cooled according to

the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

OAE046312R

3-135

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Using the system in the fresh air posi-

tion is recommended.

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (without

air conditioning selected) may cause

fogging of the windscreen and side

windows and the air within the passen-

ger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in exces-

sively dry air in the passenger com-

partment.

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the

desired speed by pushing the fan

speed control button.

The higher the fan speed is, the

more air is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the

fan.

Operating the fan speed when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion could cause the battery to dis-

charge. Operate the fan speed

when the engine is running.

NOTICE

• Continued climate control

system operation in the recir-

culated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside

the vehicle which may fog the

glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with

the air conditioning or heating

system on. It may cause seri-

ous harm or death due to a

drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control sys-

tem operation in the recirculat-

ed air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and

loss of vehicle control. Set the

air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible whilst driving.

WARNING

OAE046313

3-136

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driver Only

If you press the DRIVER ONLY but-

ton( ) and the indicator light

illuminates, air mostly blows in the

direction of the driver’s seat.

However, some of the air may come

out of other seating position ducts to

keep indoor air pleasant.

If you use the button with no passen-

ger in the front passenger seat, ener-

gy consumption will be reduced.

DRIVER ONLY button will be turned

off under the following conditions:

1) Defrost on (the DRIVER ONLY

button indicator is not turned off)

2) SYNC on

3) Adjusted front passenger seat

temperature

4) DRIVER ONLY button re-push

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air

conditioning system on (indicator

light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air

conditioning system off.

DRIVER

ONLY

OAE046314R OAE046315R

3-137

Convenient features of your vehicle

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn the cli-

mate control system off. However,

you can still operate the mode and air

intake buttons as long as the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on.

• If the windscreen fogs up, set the

mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the vehicle through

the ventilation system, temporarily

set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. Be sure to

return the control to the fresh air

position when the irritation has

passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle.This will help keep the driv-

er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system

is drawn in through the grilles just

ahead of the windscreen. Care

should be taken that these are not

blocked by leaves, snow, ice or

other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

screen, set the air intake control to

the fresh air position and fan speed

to the desired position, turn on the

air conditioning system, and adjust

the temperature control to desired

temperature.

OAE046316R

3-138

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with R-134a or R1234yf

refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the out-

side air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

Information

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or

R-1234yf according to the regulation

in your country at the time of produc-

tion. You can find out which air condi-

tioning refrigerant is applied to your

vehicle on the label located inside of

the bonnet.

• The refrigerant system should

only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians to insure

proper and safe operation.

• The refrigerant system should

be serviced in a well-ventilated

place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be

repaired or replaced with one

removed from a used or sal-

vaged vehicle and new replace-

ment MAC evaporators shall be

certified (and labelled) as meet-

ing SAE Standard J2842.

Information

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely whilst driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine

overheating. Continue to use the fan

but turn the air conditioning system

off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in

humid weather, air conditioning

may create water droplets inside the

vehicle. Since excessive water

droplets may cause damage to elec-

trical equipment, air conditioning

should only be used with the win-

dows closed.

NOTICE

3-139

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation

tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• Use air conditioning to reduce

humidity and moisture inside the

vehicle on rainy or humid days.

• During air conditioning system

operation, you may occasionally

notice a slight change in engine

speed as the air conditioning com-

pressor cycles. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month only for a few minutes

to ensure maximum system per-

formance.

• When using the air conditioning

system, you may notice clear water

dripping (or even puddling) on the

ground the vehicle.This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-

tem in the recirculated air position

provides maximum cooling, how-

ever, continual operation in this

mode may cause the air inside the

vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and

humid air intake. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

System maintenance

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust

or other pollutants that come into the

vehicle from the outside through the

heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate

in the filter over a period of time, the

air flow from the air vents may

decrease, resulting in moisture accu-

mulation on the inside of the wind-

screen even when the outside (fresh)

air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, we recommend that the cli-

mate control air filter be replaced by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

3-140

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough

roads, more frequent climate con-

trol air filter inspections and

changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and com-

pressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

reduces the performance of on the

air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refriger-

ant is at very high

pressure, the air con-

ditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and certified

technicians. It is important that

the correct type and amount of

oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage

to the vehicle and personal injury.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with

R-1234yf

Because the refriger-

ant is mildly inflam-

mable at very high

pressure, the air con-

ditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and

certified technicians.

It is important that the

correct type and amount of oil

and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause dam-

age to the vehicle and personal

injury.

WARNING

3-141

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air Conditioning refrigerant

label

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant

label in the vehicle may differ from the

illustration.

Each symbols and specification on

air conditioning refrigerant label

means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubri-

cant

You can find out which air condition-

ing refrigerant is applied to your vehi-

cle on the label located inside of the

bonnet.

ODH044365R

ODH043366

■ Example

• Type B

• Type A

3-142

Convenient features of your vehicle

• For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired

whilst defrosting or defogging, set

the mode to the floor-defrost posi-

tion.

• Before driving, clear all snow and

ice from the windscreen, rear win-

dow, outside rear view mirrors, and

all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the

bonnet and air inlet in the cowl grill

to improve heater and defroster

efficiency and to reduce the proba-

bility of fogging up inside of the

windscreen.

Automatic climate control

system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select the desired fan speed.

2. Select the desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4.The air-conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient

temperature, outside (fresh) air

position and higher fan speed will

be selected automatically.

WWIINNDDSSCCRREEEENN DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG

Windscreen heating

Do not use the or posi-

tion during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temper-

ature of the outside air and that

of the windscreen could cause

the outer surface of the wind-

screen to fog up, causing loss

of visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan

speed control knob or button to

lower speed.

WARNING

OAE046317R

3-143

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)

air position and higher fan speed are

not selected automatically, adjust the

corresponding button or knob manu-

ally.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is controlled to higher fan

speed.

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-

tion.

2. Set temperature to the extreme

hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4.The air-conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient

temperature and outside (fresh)

air position will be selected auto-

matically.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is controlled to higher fan

speed.

Defogging logic (if equipped)

To reduce the probability of fogging

up the inside of the windscreen, the

air intake or air conditioning are con-

trolled automatically according to

certain conditions such as or

positions. To cancel or return the

defogging logic, do the following.

1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Press the defroster button ( ).

3.Whilst pressing the air condition-

ing button (A/C), press the air

intake control button at least 5

times within 3 seconds.

The climate control information

screen will blink 3 times. It indicates

that the defogging logic is cancelled

or returned to the programmed sta-

tus.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, it resets to the defog

logic status.

OAE046318R

3-144

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto defogging system

(if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the possibili-

ty of fogging up the inside of the wind-

screen by automatically sensing the

moisture on inside the windscreen.

The auto defogging system operates

when the heater or air conditioning is

on.

Information

The auto defogging system may not

operate normally, when the outside

temperature is below -10 °C.

When the Auto Defogging

System operates, the indi-

cator will illuminate.

If high levels of moisture are sensed

in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging

System will operate in the following

order:

Step 1 : Outside air position

Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-

screen

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward

the windscreen

If the air conditioning is off or recircu-

lated air position is manually selected

whilst Auto Defogging System is ON,

the Auto Defogging System Indicator

will blink 3 times to signal that the

manual operation has been can-

celled.

To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging

System

Press the front windscreen defroster

button for 3 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

When the Auto Defogging System is

cancelled, the ADS OFF symbol will

blink 3 times and the ADS OFF will

be displayed on the climate control

information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is

reset, the ADS OFF symbol will blink

6 times without a signal.

Information

• When the air conditioning is turned

on by Auto defogging system, if you

try to turn off the air conditioning, the

indicator will blink 3 times and the air

conditioning will not be turned off.

• For efficiency, do not select recircu-

lated air position whilst the Auto

defogging system is operating.

Do not remove the sensor cover

located on the upper end of the

windscreen glass.

Damage to system parts could

occur and may not be covered by

your vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

OAE046320

3-145

Convenient features of your vehicle

Defroster

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface

of the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

Information

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windscreen, refer to

“Windscreen Defrosting and

Defogging” in this chapter.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from

the interior and exterior of the rear

window, whilst the engine is running.

• To activate the rear window

defroster, press the rear window

defroster button located in the cen-

tre facia switch panel.The indicator

on the rear window defroster but-

ton illuminates when the defroster

is ON.

• To turn off the defroster, press the

rear window defroster button again.

Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it off

before operating the rear defroster.

• The rear window defroster automati-

cally turns off after approximately 20

minutes or when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the OFF position.

NOTICE

OAE046301

3-146

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic ventilation

(if equipped)

To increase cabin air quality and

reduce windscreen misting, air recir-

culation mode switches off automati-

cally after about 5 to 30 minutes,

depending on outside temperature,

and the air intake will change to out-

side (fresh) mode.

To cancel or set the automatic venti-

lation feature, select Face level mode

and whilst pressing the A/C but-

ton, press the air intake control but-

ton 5 times within 3 seconds.

When the automatic ventilation is

set, the air recirculation indicator will

blink 6 times. When cancelled, the

indicator will blink 3 times.

Sunroof inside air recirculation

(if equipped)

If the sunroof opens whilst the heater

or Air Conditioning system operates,

the outside (fresh) air will be select-

ed automatically for ventilating the

car.Then, if you select the recirculat-

ed air position, the outside (fresh) air

will be selected automatically after 3

minutes.

If you close the sunroof, the intake

mode will be changed to the previous

selected mode.

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS

3-147

Convenient features of your vehicle

ALWAYS close the glove box

door after use.

An open glove box door can

cause serious injury to the pas-

senger in an accident, even if the

passenger is wearing a seat belt.

WARNING

SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartments.

Centre console storage

To open :

Grab and hold the latch (1) on the

armrest then lift the lid.

Glove box

To open:

Pull the lever (1).

NOTICE

Never store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other

flammable/explosive materials

in the vehicle. These items may

catch fire and/or explode if the

vehicle is exposed to hot tem-

peratures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage com-

partment covers closed secure-

ly whilst driving. Items inside

your vehicle are moving as fast

as the vehicle. If you have to

stop or turn quickly, or if there

is a crash, the items may fly out

of the compartment and may

cause an injury if they strike the

driver or a passenger.

WARNING

OAE046420

OAE046421R

3-148

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open:

Press the cover and the holder will

slowly open. Place your sunglasses

in the compartment door with the

lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is

closed whilst driving.

Multi box (if equipped)

Use the multi box to keep small

objects.

OAD045413

• Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun-

glass holder. Such objects can

be thrown from the holder in

the event of a sudden stop or

an accident, possibly injuring

the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass

holder whilst the vehicle is

moving. The rear view mirror

of the vehicle can be blocked

by an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder. It may

cause personal injury if you

try to open it forcibly when the

glasses are jammed in holder.

WARNING

OAE046470R

Do not keep objects that can be

thrown from the multi box and

severely injure passengers in

the vehicle in the event of a sud-

den stop or an accident.

WARNING

3-149

Convenient features of your vehicle

IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

Ashtray (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean the ashtray:

The plastic receptacle should be

removed by lifting the plastic ashtray

receptacle upward after turning the

cover counterclockwise and pulling it

out.

Cup holder

Cups may be placed in the cup hold-

ers.

Rear

Pull the armrest down to use the cup

holders.

OAE046471L

Ashtray use

Putting lit cigarettes or matches

in an ashtray with other com-

bustible materials may cause a

fire.

WARNING

OAE046424

■ Front

■ Rear

OAE046423

• Avoid abrupt starting and

braking when the cup holder

is in use to prevent spilling

your drink. If hot liquid spills,

you could be burned. Such a

burn to the driver could cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Do not place uncovered or

unsecured cups, bottles,

cans, etc., in the cup holder

containing hot liquid whilst

the vehicle is in motion.

Injuries may result in the

event of a sudden stop or col-

lision.

• Only use soft cups in the cup

holders. Hard objects can

injure you in an accident.

WARNING

3-150

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Keep your drinks sealed whilst

driving to prevent spilling your

drink. If liquid spills, it may get

into the vehicle's electrical/elec-

tronic system and damage elec-

trical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids, do

not dry the cup holder at high

using hot temperatures.This may

damage the cup holder.

Sunvisor

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window,

pull it downward, unsnap it from the

bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Use the ticket holder (4) to hold tick-

ets.

Information

Close the vanity mirror cover securely

and return the sunvisor to its original

position after use.

Do not put several tickets in the

ticket holder at one time. This

could cause damage to the ticket

holder.

NOTICE

Keep cans or bottles out of

direct sun light and do not put

them in a hot vehicle. It may

explode.

WARNING

OAE046425R

For your safety, do not block your

view when using the sunvisor.

WARNING

3-151

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or

other devices designed to operate

with vehicle electrical systems. The

devices should draw less than 180

W(Watts) with the engine running.

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the battery

to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 180 W(Watts)

in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet.These devices may

cause excessive audio static

and malfunctions in other elec-

tronic systems or devices used

in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will

go. If good contact is not made,

the plug may overheat and the

fuse may open.

• Plug in battery equipped electri-

cal/electronic devices with

reverse current protection. The

current from the battery may

flow into the vehicle's electri-

cal/electronic system and cause

system malfunction.

NOTICE

OAE046426R

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not

place your fingers or foreign

objects (pin, etc.) into a power

outlet or touch the power outlet

with a wet hand.

WARNING

3-152

Convenient features of your vehicle

Wireless mobile phone charg-

ing system (if equipped)

There is a wireless mobile phone

charger inside the front console.

The system is available when all

doors are closed, and when the igni-

tion switch is in the ACC, ON or

START position.

To charge a mobile phone

The wireless mobile phone charging

system charges only the Qi-enabled

mobile phones ( ). Read the label

on the mobile phone accessory

cover or visit your mobile phone

manufacturer’s website to check

whether your mobile phone supports

the Qi technology.

The wireless charging process starts

when you put a Qi-enabled mobile

phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the

smart key, from the wireless charg-

ing unit. If not, the wireless charg-

ing process may be interrupted.

Place the mobile phone on the

centre of charging pad.

2.The indicator light is orange when

the mobile phone is chargeing.

The indicator light turns green

when phone charging is complet-

ed.

3.You can turn ON or OFF the wire-

less charging function in the user

settings mode on the instrument

cluster. For further information,

refer to the “LCD Modes” in this

chapter.

If your mobile phone is not charging:

- Slightly change the position of the

mobile phone on the charging pad.

- Make sure the indicator light is

orange.

The indicator light will blink orange

for 10 seconds if there is a malfunc-

tion in the wireless charging system.

In this case, temporarily stop the

charging process, and re-attempt to

wirelessly charge your mobile phone

again.

The system warns you with a mes-

sage on the LCD display if the mobile

phone is still on the wireless charg-

ing unit after the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

Information

For some manufacturers' mobile

phones, the system may not warn you

even though the mobile phone is left

on the wireless charging unit. This is

due to the particular characteristic of

the mobile phone and not a malfunc-

tion of the wireless charging.

OAE046444R

3-153

Convenient features of your vehicle

• The wireless mobile phone

charging system may not sup-

port certain mobile phones,

which are not verified for the Qi

specification ( ).

• When placing your mobile

phone on the charging mat,

position the phone in the middle

of the mat for optimal charging

performance. If your mobile

phone is off to the side, the

charging rate may be less and in

some cases the mobile phone

may experience higher heat con-

duction.

• In some cases, the wireless

charging may stop temporarily

when the Smart Key is used,

either when starting the vehicle

or locking/unlocking the doors,

etc.

• When charging certain mobile

phones, the charging indicator

may not change to green when

the mobile phone is fully

charged.

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop, when tem-

perature abnormally increases

inside the wireless mobile

phone charging system. The

wireless charging process

restarts, when temperature falls

to a certain level.

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop when

there is any metallic item, such

as a coin, between the wireless

mobile phone charging system

and a mobile phone.

• For certain mobile phones with

their own protection, the wire-

less charging speed may

decrease and the wireless

charging may stop.

• If the mobile phone has a thick

cover, the wireless charging may

not be possible.

• If the mobile phone is not com-

pletely contacting the charging

pad, wireless charging may not

operate properly.

• Some magnetic items like credit

cards,phone cards or rail tickets

may be damaged if left with the

mobile phone during the charg-

ing process.

• If the mobile phone without the

wireless charging function or

the metallic items are placed on

the charging pad, it may cause

slight noise.This noise does not

affect the mobile phone and the

vehicle, because this noise is an

operating sound during deter-

mining the item on the charging

pad.

• If the ignition switch is in the

OFF position, the charging also

stops.

NOTICE

3-154

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

To use the cigarette lighter, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the cigarette lighter all the way

into its socket. When the element is

heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

We recommend that you use

replacement parts from a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter

should be used in the cigarette

lighter socket. The use of plug-in

accessories (shavers, hand-held

vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.)

may damage the socket or cause

electrical failure.

Clock

Vehicles with Audio system

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].

• Set time: Set the time displayed on

the audio screen.

• Time format: Choose between 12-

hour and 24-hour time formats.

Vehicles with Navigation system

Select the Settings menu on the

Navigation system ➟ Select

[Date/Time].

• GPS time: Displays time according

to the received GNSS time.

• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24

hour.

NOTICE

Do not adjust the clock whilst

driving.You may lose your steer-

ing control and cause severe

personal injury or accidents.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after

it is already heated because it

will overheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out

within 30 seconds, remove it

to prevent overheating.

• Do not insert foreign objects

into the socket of the cigarette

lighter. It may damage the cig-

arette lighter.

WARNING

OAE046472R

3-155

Convenient features of your vehicle

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

These hangers are not designed to

hold large or heavy items.

Floor mat anchor(s)

(if equipped)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors

to attach the front floor mats to the

vehicle. The anchors on the front

floor carpet keep the floor mats from

sliding forward.

OAEE046434

OAE046430

Do not hang other objects such

as hangers or hard objects

except clothes. Also, do not put

heavy, sharp or breakable

objects in the clothes pockets.

In an accident or when the cur-

tain air bag is inflated, it may

cause vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

WARNING

OPD046048

Do not overlay additional mats

or liners over the floor mats. If

using All Weather mats, remove

the carpeted floor mats before

installing them. Only use floor

mats designed to connect to the

anchors.

WARNING

3-156

Convenient features of your vehicle

Luggage net (holder)

(if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the

cargo area, you can use the four

holders located in the cargo area to

attach the luggage net.

If necessary, we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer to obtain a luggage net.

To avoid eye injury, DO NOT

overstretch the luggage net.

ALWAYS keep your face and

body out of the luggage net’s

recoil path.DO NOT use the lug-

gage net when the strap has vis-

ible signs of wear or damage.

WARNING

To prevent damage to the goods

or the vehicle, care should be

taken when carrying fragile or

bulky objects in the luggage

compartment.

CAUTION

OAE046431AU

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat

to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehi-

cle's floor mat anchor(s)

before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to

the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top

of one another (e.g. all-weath-

er rubber mat on top of a car-

peted floor mat). Only a single

floor mat should be installed

in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver's side

floor mat anchors that are

designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place. To avoid any

interference with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that the

HYUNDAI floor mat designed for

use in your vehicle be installed.

WARNING

Multimedia System

Multimedia system.................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod

port ...............................................4-2

Antenna ...............................................................................4-2

Steering wheel audio controls .......................................4-3

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology hands-free............4-4

Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) ..................4-5

How vehicle radio works.................................................4-5

Audio (With Touch Screen) ..................................4-8

Feature of Your Audio..........................................4-9, 4-11

Radio...................................................................................4-16

Media..................................................................................4-18

Phone .................................................................................4-32

Setup ..................................................................................4-40

Declaration of Conformity..................................4-42

CE for EU ..........................................................................4-42

4-2

Multimedia System

Information

• If you install an aftermarket HID

headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and

electronic devices may malfunction.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,

cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-

er, and air freshener from contacting

the interior parts because they may

cause damage or discolouration.

AUX, USB and iPod

port

You can use an AUX port to connect

audio devices and an USB port to plug

in an USB and an iPod

port.

Information

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise

may occur during playback. If this

happens, use the power source of the

portable audio device.

❈ iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Antenna

Roof antenna (Type A)

The roof antenna receives both AM

and FM broadcast signals.

Rotate the roof antenna in a counter-

clockwise direction to remove it.

Rotate it in a clockwise direction to

reinstall it.

OAE046481L

OAE046439R

MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM

4-3

Multimedia System

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,

remove the antenna by rotating it

counterclockwise. If not, the

antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna,

it is important that it is fully

tightened and adjusted to the

upright position to ensure prop-

er reception.

Shark fin antenna (Type B)

The shark fin antenna receives

transmitted data. (for example:

AM/FM, DAB, GPS/ GNSS)

Avoid adding metallic coatings

such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These

can degrade the received AM and

FM broadcast signals.

Steering wheel audio controls

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio control

switches are installed for your con-

venience.

OAE046437

OAE046474L

NOTICE

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

OAE046321L

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Move the VOLUME toggle switch

up to increase volume.

• Move the VOLUME toggle switch

down to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch

is moved up or down and held for 0.8

seconds or more, it will function in

the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK

select switch. It will SEEK until you

release the switch.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/REW switch.

If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch

is moved up or down, it will function

in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION UP/DOWN switch.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN switch.

MODE ( ) (3)

Press the MODE button to select

Radio, Disc, or AUX.

MUTE ( ) (4)

• Press the button to mute the

sound.

• Press the button again to activate

the sound.

Information

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the following

pages in this chapter.

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

hands-free

You can use the phone wirelessly by

using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology.

(1)Call / Answer button

(2)Call end button

(3)Microphone

OAE046440

OAE046447

NOTICE

4-4

Multimedia System

• Audio : For detailed information,

refer to “AUDIO” in this chapter.

• AVN : Detailed information for the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

hands-free is described in the man-

ual supplied separately.

Audio / Video / Navigation sys-

tem (AVN) (if equipped)

Detailed information for the AVN sys-

tem is described in a separately sup-

plied manual.

How vehicle radio works

FM reception

AM and FM radio signals are broad-

cast from transmitter towers located

around your city. They are intercept-

ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-

cle. This signal is then received by

the radio and sent to your vehicle

speakers.

When a strong radio signal has

reached your vehicle, the precise

engineering of your audio system

ensures the best possible quality

reproduction. However, in some

cases the signal coming to your vehi-

cle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as

the distance from the radio station,

closeness of other strong radio sta-

tions or the presence of buildings,

bridges or other large obstructions in

the area.

OJF045308L

4-5

Multimedia System

4-6

Multimedia System

AM (MW, LW) reception

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broad-

casts. This is because AM radio

waves are transmitted at low fre-

quencies.These long, low frequency

radio waves can follow the curvature

of the earth rather than travelling

straight out into the atmosphere. In

addition, they curve around obstruc-

tions so that they can provide better

signal coverage.

FM radio station

FM broadcasts are transmitted at

high frequencies and do not bend to

follow the earth's surface. Because

of this, FM broadcasts generally

begin to fade at short distances from

the station.Also, FM signals are eas-

ily affected by buildings, mountains,

or other obstructions. These can

result in certain listening conditions

which might lead you to believe a

problem exists with your radio. The

following conditions are normal and

do not indicate radio trouble :

• Fading - As your vehicle moves

away from the radio station, the

signal will weaken and sound will

begin to fade. When this occurs,

we suggest that you select another

stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the

transmitter and your radio can dis-

turb the signal causing static or

fluttering noises to occur.Reducing

the treble level may lessen this

effect until the disturbance clears.

¢¢¢

JBM004

OJF045310LOJF045309L

4-7

Multimedia System

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal

weakens, another more powerful

signal near the same frequency

may begin to play. This is because

your radio is designed to lock onto

the clearest signal. If this occurs,

select another station with a

stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio

signals being received from sever-

al directions can cause distortion

or fluttering.This can be caused by

a direct and reflected signal from

the same station, or by signals

from two stations with close fre-

quencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition

has passed.

Using a mobile phone or a two-

way radio

When a mobile phone is used inside

the vehicle, noise may be produced

from the audio system. This does not

mean that something is wrong with the

audio equipment. In such a case, use

the mobile phone at a place as far as

possible from the audio equipment.

When using a communication

system such as a mobile phone or

a radio set inside the vehicle, a

separate external antenna must be

fitted. When a mobile phone or a

radio set is used with an internal

antenna alone, it may interfere

with the vehicle's electrical sys-

tem and adversely affect safe

operation of the vehicle.

iPod

is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by HYUNDAI is under

license.

Other trademarks and trade names

are those of their respective owners.

NOTICE

OJF045311L

Do not use a mobile phone

whilst driving. Stop at a safe

location to use a mobile phone.

WARNING

4-8

Multimedia System

G2H4G0002EE

■ Type A

(With

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology)

G2H4G0000EE

AAUUDDIIOO ((WWiitthh TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn))

Multimedia System

4-9

Multimedia System

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

❈ The actual features in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

(1) LCD screen

• Tap the screen to select a button.

(2) POWER/VOL knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.

• Press to turn the device on or off.

(3) RADIO

• Start FM, AM or DAB* radio.

* if equipped

(4) MEDIA

• Select USB(iPod

), Bluetooth

Audio, AUX and My Music.

• Display the media menu when two

or more media are connected or

when the [MEDIA] button is

pressed in media mode.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in FM or AM

radio mode.

• Search for next station in DAB*

radio mode.

• Change the current song in media

mode.

* if equipped

(6) RESET

• Shutdown and restart the system.

(7) PHONE

• Start Bluetooth

Phone mode.

(8) SETUP

• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screensaver

and Display Off settings.

(9) TUNE knob

• Turn to navigate through the sta-

tions/songs list.

• Press to select an item.

4-10

Multimedia System

G2H4G0001EE/G2H4G0002EE

■

Type B

(With

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology)

■ Type C

4-11

Multimedia System

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

❈ The actual features in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

(1) LCD screen

• Tap the screen to select a button.

(2) POWER/VOL knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.

• Press to turn the device on or off.

(3) RADIO

• Start FM, AM.

(4) MEDIA

• Select Disc, USB(iPod

), Bluetooth

Audio, AUX and My Music.

• Display the media menu when two

or more media are connected or

when the [MEDIA] button is

pressed in media mode.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in FM or AM

radio mode.

• Change the current song in media

mode.

(6) RESET

• Shutdown and restart the system.

(7) EJECT

• Eject the inserted disc.

(8) Disc slot

• Insert a disc.

(9) DISP

• Turn the display on or off.

4-12

Multimedia System

(10) PHONE

• Start Bluetooth

Phone mode.

(11) SETUP

• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screensaver

and Display Off settings.

(12) TUNE knob

• Turn to navigate through the sta-

tions/songs list.

• Press to select an item.

■ Type C

■ Type B

4-13

Multimedia System

Steering wheel remote control

❈ The actual features in the may dif-

fer from the illustration.

(1) MUTE

• Press to mute audio output.

(2)MODE

• Press the button to change the

mode in the following order: Radio

➟ Media.

• Press and hold the button to turn off.

(with Type B, Type C)

(3) VOLUME

• Press to adjust the volume.

(4) UP/DOWN

• Press the button in radio mode to

search Presets.

• Press and hold the button in radio

mode to search frequencies.

• Press the button in media mode to

change the current song.

• Press and hold the button in media

mode to quick search through

songs.

(5)CALL

• Pressing the button

- If not in Bluetooth

Handsfree

mode or receiving a phone call.

First press: Display Dial Number

screen.

Second press: Automatically dis-

play the most recently Dialed

Call number.

Third press: Dial the phone num-

ber entered.

- Press in the Incoming Call notifi-

cation screen to accept the

phone call.

- Press in Bluetooth

Handsfree

mode to switch to the waiting call.

• Pressing and holding the button

- If not in Bluetooth

Handsfree

mode or receiving a phone call,

the most recently Dialed Call

number is dialed.

- Press in Bluetooth

Handsfree

mode to transfer the call to your

cell phone.

- Press in cell phone mode to

switch to Bluetooth

Handsfree

mode.

(6) END

• Press in Bluetooth

Handsfree

mode to end the phone call.

• Press in the incoming call screen

to reject the call.

4-14

Multimedia System

• Do not stare at the screen

whilst driving. Staring at the

screen for prolonged periods

of time could lead to traffic

accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assem-

ble, or modify the audio sys-

tem. Such acts could result in

accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

• Using the phone whilst driv-

ing may lead to a lack of atten-

tion of traffic conditions and

increase the likelihood of

accidents. Use the phone fea-

ture after parking the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill water

or introduce foreign objects

into the device. Such acts

could lead to smoke, fire, or

product malfunction.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound

can be heard as these signs

may indicate product malfunc-

tion. Continued use in such

conditions could lead to acci-

dents (fires, electric shock) or

product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna dur-

ing thunder or lightening as

such acts may lead to light-

ning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in park-

ing-restricted areas to operate

the product. Such acts could

lead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehi-

cle ignition turned on.

Prolonged use with the igni-

tion turned off could result in

battery discharge.

Driving whilst distracted can

result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol that may lead to an acci-

dent, severe personal injury,

and death. The driver’s primary

responsibility is in the safe and

legal operation of a vehicle, and

use of any handheld devices,

other equipment, or vehicle sys-

tems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a

vehicle or which are not permis-

sible by law should never be

used during operation of the

vehicle.

WARNING

4-15

Multimedia System

• Operating the device whilst driv-

ing could lead to accidents due

to a lack of attention to external

surroundings. First park the

vehicle before operating the

device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that

allow the driver to hear sounds

from outside of the vehicle.

Driving in a state where external

sounds cannot be heard may

lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume set-

ting when turning the device on.

A sudden output of extreme vol-

ume upon turning the device on

could lead to hearing impair-

ment. (Adjust the volume to a

suitable levels before turning off

the device.)

• If you want to change the posi-

tion of device installation,

please inquire with your place of

purchase or service mainte-

nance centre. Technical expert-

ise is required to install or dis-

assemble the device.

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not oper-

ate the audio system for long

periods of time with the ignition

turned off as such operations

may lead to battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause damage

to the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make

sure to turn off the device and

use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials,

chemical cloths, or solvents

(alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.)

as such materials may damage

the device panel or cause

colour/quality deterioration

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. Spilling bever-

ages may lead to system mal-

function.

(Continued)

• In case of product malfunction,

please contact your place of pur-

chase or After Service centre.

• Placing the audio system within

an electromagnetic environment

may result in noise interference.

NOTICE

4-16

Multimedia System

Information on status icons

Icons showing audio status are shown

in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Radio

FM/AM (with RDS)

DAB (if equipped)

(1) Radio

Switch between FM, AM and DAB*.

* if equipped.

(2) List

View all available stations.

(3) Presets

View all presets.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

Switching between FM, AM and DAB*

• Press the [RADIO] button on the

audio system to switch between

FM, AM and DAB*.

• Press the [Radio] on the screen to

switch between FM, AM and DAB*.

* if equipped

Searching stations

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to

search stations.

Icon Description

Mute Mute engaged

Battery

Remaining battery life of

a connected Bluetooth

device

Handsfree +

Audio stream-

ing connection

Bluetooth

Handsfree

call and audio stream-

ing available

Handsfree

connection

Bluetooth

Handsfree

call available

Bluetaooth

audio streaming

Bluetooth

audio

streaming available

Downloading

contacts

Downloading contacts

through Bluetooth

wire-

less communications

Downloading

call history

Downloading call history

through Bluetooth

wire-

less communications

Line busy Phone call in progress

Mute mic

Mic muted during a

call (caller cannot

hear your voice)

Phone signal

strength

Display the phone signal

strength for a cell phone

connected by Bluetooth

4-17

Multimedia System

List

A list of all available stations in the

vehicle’s current location is dis-

played. Press the desired station.

Favourite stations can be saved to

[Presets] by pressing the [+].

Presets

Save up to 40 frequently used stations.

To listen to a preset, press the

desired station list.

Press and hold the desired slot from

1 through 40. This saves the current

station in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply pressing

saves the station to the slot.

Press the [Menu], and select the

desired function.

• Traffic Announcement (TA): Enable

or disable Traffic Announcements.

• Scan: All available stations are

played for five seconds each.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

FM/AM (without RDS)

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM.

(2) Presets

View all presets.

(3) List

View all available stations.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

Switching between FM, AM

• Press the [RADIO] button on the

audio system to switch between

FM, AM.

• Press the [Band] on the screen to

switch between FM, AM.

Searching stations

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to

search stations.

List

A list of all available stations in the

vehicle’s current location is dis-

played. Press the desired station.

Favourite stations can be saved to

[Presets] by pressing the [save].

4-18

Multimedia System

Presets

Save up to 40 frequently used stations.

To listen to a preset, press the

desired station list.

Press and hold the desired slot from

1 through 40. This saves the current

station in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply pressing

saves the station to the slot.

Press the [Menu], and select the

desired function.

• Scan: All available stations are

played for five seconds each.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Media

Information

- Using the Discs

• Do not clean discs with chemical

solutions, such as record sprays,

antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,

benzene, or thinners.

• After using a disc, put the disc back

in its original case to prevent disc

scratches.

• Hold discs by their edges or within

the centre hole to prevent damages

to disc surfaces.

• Do not introduce foreign substances

into the disc insert/eject slot.

Introducing foreign substances

could damage the device interior.

• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.

(Continued)

• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,

differences in disc reading and play-

ing times may occur depending on

the disc manufacturer, production

method and the recording method

as used by the user.

• Clean fingerprints and dust off the

disc surface (coated side) with a soft

cloth.

• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs

attached with labels may result in

disc slot jams or difficulties in disc

removal. Such discs may also result

in noise whilst playing.

• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not

properly operate depending on the

disc manufacturer, production

method and the record method as

used by the user. If problems persist,

trying using a different CD as con-

tinued use may result in malfunc-

tions.

• The performance of this product

may differ depending on the CDRW

Drive Software.

(Continued)

4-19

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Copy-protected CDs such as Stype

CDs may not function in the device.

DATA discs cannot be played.

(However, such discs may still oper-

ate but will do so abnormally.)

• Do not use abnormally shaped discs

(8cm, heart-shaped, octagonshaped)

as such discs could lead to malfunc-

tions.

• If the disc is straddled on the disc

slot without removal for 10 seconds,

the disc will automatically be re-

inserted into the disc player.

• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-

ported. Other discs may result in

recognition failure (e.g. copy CDR,

CDs with labels)

Disc CD (Type B,Type C)

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button and

select [Disc CD].

• When a disc is inserted in the

audio system, disc playback

begins automatically.

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast-forward the

song that is currently playing.

• Search songs by turning the TUNE

knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Press the [List] to view a list of songs

available to play.

Select and play the desired song.

4-20

Multimedia System

Repeat play

Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-

able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current

song’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song:The song

that is currently playing is repeated.

Shuffle play

Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in a

random order.

Press the [Menu] and select the

desired function.

• Information: Detailed information

on the song that is currently play-

ing is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed

Information

- Using MP3

Supported audio formats

File formats other than the formats

above may not be recognised or

playable. Information such as file-

name may not be displayed.

Range of supported compressed file

types

1. Bitrate range (Kbps)

BIT RATE(kbps)

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA

Layer3

High Range

32 8 8 48

40 16 16 64

48 24 24 80

56 32 32 96

64 40 40 128

80 48 48 160

96 56 56 192

112 64 64

128 80 80

160 96 96

192 112 112

224 128 128

256 144 144

320 160 160

NOTICE

File System

ISO 9660 Level 1

ISO 9660 Level 2

Romeo / Juliet (128 characters)

Compressed

audio formats

MPEG1 Audio Layer3

MPEG2 Audio Layer3

MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3

Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X

& 8.X

4-21

Multimedia System

2. Sampling frequency (Hz)

• The sound quality of MP3/WMA

compressed files may vary depend-

ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate

can have better sound quality.)

• The product only recognises files

with the MP3 or WMA extension.

Files without one of these exten-

sions are not recognised.

3. Number of recognizable folders

and files

• Folders: 2,000 for USB

• Files: 6,000 for USB

• No recognition limit for folder hier-

archies

4. Character display range (Unicode)

• Filenames: Up to 64 English char-

acters (64 Korean characters)

• Foldername: Up to 32 English

characters (32 Korean characters)

The scroll feature can be used to

display file and folder names that

are too long to display on the

screen. (if equipped)

Languages supported (Unicode sup-

port)

• Korean: 2,604 characters

• English: 94 characters

• Common Chinese characters:

4,888 characters

• Special symbols: 986 characters

Japanese/Simplified Chinese char-

acters are not supported.

Disc MP3 (Type B,Type C)

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

NOTICE

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA

44100 22050 11025 32000

48000 24000 12000 44100

32000 16000 8000 48000

4-22

Multimedia System

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button and

select [Disc MP3].

• When a disc is inserted in the

audio system, disc playback

begins automatically.

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast-forward the

song that is currently playing.

• Search songs by turning the TUNE

knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Press the [List] to view a list of songs

available to play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-

able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current

song’ or ‘Repeat folder’.

• Repeat all: Repeat all songs in

the playlist.

• Repeat current song:The song

that is currently playing is repeated.

• Repeat folder: All songs in the

current folder are repeated.

Shuffle play

Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in a

random order.

• Shuffle folder: Songs within

the current folder are played in ran-

dom order.

Press the [Menu] and select the

desired function.

• Information: Detailed information

on the song that is currently play-

ing is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Information

- Using the USB Devices

• Starting the vehicle whilst a USB

device is connected can damage the

device. Please disconnect USB

devices before starting the vehicle.

• Starting the vehicle or stopping the

engine whilst an external USB

device is connected can result in fail-

ure of the external USB device to

operate.

• Be cautious of static electricity when

connecting/disconnecting external

USB devices.

• An encrypted MP3 player is not

recognised when connected as an

external device.

• External USB devices may not be

recognised, depending on the state

of the external USB device.

• Only products with byte/sectors for-

matted at 4 KB or lower are recog-

nised.

• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32

format are recognised; NTFS and

ExFAT file systems are not recog-

nised.

(Continued)

4-23

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Some USB devices are not recog-

nised due to compatibility issues.

• Do not touch the USB connections.

• Connecting and disconnecting USB

devices rapidly over a short period

of time can cause equipment failure.

• Abnormal sounds may be audible

when the USB device is disconnected.

• Turn the audio off before connecting

or disconnecting external USB

devices.

• Recognition may take longer

depending on the type, capacity or

file format of the external USB

device. This is not a product mal-

function.

• Use of USB devices for purposes

other than playing music files is pro-

hibited.

• Image display and video playback

are not supported.

(Continued)

• Use of USB accessories, including

charge and heat though the USB I/F,

can lead to reduced product per-

formance or malfunctions. Do not

use USB devices or accessories for

these purposes.

• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and

extension cables can result in the

vehicle’s audio system failing to

recognise your USB device. Connect

the USB device directly to the multi-

media port of your vehicle.

• When using high-capacity USB

devices with logical drive divisions,

only files saved on the highest level

logical drive can be played.

If applications are loaded on a USB

drive, file playback may fail.

• Some MP3 players, cell phones, dig-

ital cameras, etc. (USB devices that

are not recognised as mobile stor-

age) may not operate normally

when connected.

• USB charging may not be supported

by some mobile devices.

(Continued)

• Operation is guaranteed only for

standard (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory drives.

• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and

memory stick devices is not guaran-

teed.

• DRM (Digital Rights Management)

files cannot be played.

• SD-type USB memory, CF-type

USB memory, and other USB mem-

ory devices that require adapters

for connection are not supported.

• Proper operation of USB HDDs or

USB drives with connectors that

loosen due to vehicle vibrations is

not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)

• USB products that are

used as key chains or

cell phone accessories

may damage the USB

jack and affect proper file playback.

Please refrain from use. Use only

products with plug connectors, as

shown in the following illustration.

• When MP3 devices or cell phones

are connected simultaneously

through AUX, BT Audio and USB

modes, a popping noise or malfunc-

tion may occur.

4-24

Multimedia System

USB

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [USB].

• Connect a USB drive to the USB

port to automatically play files on

the USB drive.

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the

currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning TUNE

knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Press the [List] to see a list of songs

available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-

able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current

song’, ‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat

category’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

• Repeat folder: All songs in the

current folder are repeated.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

4-25

Multimedia System

Information

The repeat folder function is available

only when songs are playing from the

[File] category under [List].

Shuffle play

Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle

category’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order.

• Shuffle folder: Songs within

the current folder are played in ran-

dom order

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Press the [Menu], and select the

desired function.

• Save to My Music: Songs on your

USB device can be saved to My

Music.

(1)File: Select a file to save

(2)Mark all: Select all files.

(3)Unmark all: Deselect all files.

(4)Save: Save the selected file(s)

- Select the files you want to save,

and press the [Save]. This saves

the selected files to My Music.

- Saving is cancelled if phone calls

are received or made whilst saving.

- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.

- The currently playing file on the

USB device cannot be changed

whilst saving.

- My Music cannot be used whilst

saving.

- Up to 700 MB can be saved.

• Information: Detailed information

on the currently playing song is dis-

played.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

4-26

Multimedia System

Information

- Using the iPod

Devices

• To use the audio system’s iPod

con-

trol function, use the dedicated

cable provided with your iPod

• Connecting the iPod

to the vehicle

during play may result in a loud

noise that lasts about one to two sec-

onds. Connect the iPod

to the vehi-

cle after stopping or pausing play.

• Connect the iPod

with the vehicle in

the ACC ON state to begin charging.

• When connecting the iPod

cable,

be sure to fully push the cable into

the port.

• When EQ effects are enabled simul-

taneously on external devices, such

as iPod

s and the audio system, the

EQ effects may overlap, causing

sound quality deterioration or dis-

tortion. Deactivate the EQ function

for all external devices, if possible.

• Noise may occur when your iPod

or the AUX port is connected.

Disconnect and store separately

when not in use.

(Continued)

• There may be noise if the audio sys-

tem is used with an iPod

or AUX

external device connected to the

power jack. In these cases, discon-

nect the iPod

or external device

from the power jack.

• Play may be interrupted, or device

malfunctions may occur depending

on the characteristics of your

iPod

/iPhone

• Play may fail if your iPhone

is con-

nected through both Bluetooth

and

USB. In this case, select Dock con-

nector or Bluetooth

on your

iPhone

to change the sound output

settings.

• If your software version does not

support the communication proto-

col or your iPod

is not recognised

due to device failure, anomalies or

defects, iPod

mode cannot be used.

• iPod

nano (5th generation) devices

may not be recognised if the battery is

low. Charge sufficiently before use.

(Continued)

• The search and song play order in

the iPod

device may be different

from the search order in the audio

system.

• If the iPod

has failed due to an

internal defect, please reset the

iPod

(consult your iPod

manual).

• Depending on the software version,

the iPod

may fail to sync with the

system. If the media is removed or

disconnected before recognition, the

previous mode may not be restored

(iPad

cannot be charged).

• Cables other than the 1-meter cable

provided with iPod

/iPhone

prod-

ucts may not be recognised.

• When other music apps are used on

your iPod

, the system sync func-

tion may fail due to malfunction of

the iPod

application.

4-27

Multimedia System

iPod

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Connect your iPod

to the audio

USB port, press the [MEDIA] but-

ton, and select [iPod].

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the

currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning the TUNE

knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Press the [List] to see a list of songs

available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Press the [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat current

song’.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

Shuffle play

Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle category’ play.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Press the [Menu], and select the

desired function.

• Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

4-28

Multimedia System

When other music programs are

running

When songs saved on your iPod

are playing through a separate music

app, the following screen is dis-

played.

(1)Play/Pause: Pause or play music

(2)Play iPod files: Play music saved

on your iPod

(3)Album Image:View playback info

Information

Operation cannot be carried out cor-

rectly due to iPod

application mal-

function.

Playing iPod files

• Select [Play iPod files] to play

songs saved on your iPod

If there are no songs saved on your

iPod

, the [Play iPod files] is dis-

abled.

Information

- Using Bluetooth

(BT) Audio

• Bluetooth

Audio mode can only be

used if a Bluetooth

-enabled phone

is connected. Only devices that sup-

port Bluetooth

audio can be used.

• If the Bluetooth

-enabled phone is

disconnected during play, the music

stops.

• When the TRACK UP/DOWN but-

tons are used during Bluetooth

audio streaming, a popping noise or

sound interruptions may occur,

depending on the cell phone device.

• Depending on the cell phone model,

the audio streaming function may

not be supported.

• If a phone call is made or received

when music is playing in Bluetooth

Audio mode, the call may mix with

the music.

• When returning to Bluetooth

Audio mode after ending a call, play

might not resume automatically for

some cell phone models.

4-29

Multimedia System

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree is a feature that

enables drivers to practice safe

driving. Connecting the car

audio system with a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone

allows the user to conveniently

make calls, receive calls, and

manage the phone book. Before

using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology, carefully read the

contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations

whilst driving may lead to negli-

gent driving practices and be

the cause of accidents.

• Do not operate the device exces-

sively whilst driving.

• Viewing the screen for pro-

longed periods of time is dan-

gerous and may lead to acci-

dents.

• When driving, view the screen

only for short periods of time.

BT Audio

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(4) Play/Pause

Pause or play music.

Information

• Some cell phone models may not

support particular functions.

• Bluetooth

audio volume is synced

with cell phone media volume.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [BT Audio].

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

Information

Some cell phones may not support this

function.

Repeat play

Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-

able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’

or ‘Repeat category’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

NOTICE

4-30

Multimedia System

Information

The repeat play function is engaged,

depending on the operation of the con-

nected Bluetooth device.

Shuffle play

Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Information

The shuffle function is engaged,

depending on the operation of the con-

nected Bluetooth device.

Press the [Menu], and select the

desired function.

• Connections:The currently connected

Bluetooth

device can be changed.

• Information: Detailed information on

the currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

AUX

Running AUX

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [AUX].

• Connect the external device con-

nection jack to the AUX terminal to

run AUX.

(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

My Music

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

4-31

Multimedia System

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [My Music].

• My Music cannot be selected if it

does not contain music.

• Check the content of your USB

drive before saving music to My

Music.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to

play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the

currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning the TUNE

knob and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Press the [List] to see a list of songs

available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-

able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current

song’ or ‘Repeat category’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Shuffle play

Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Press the [Menu], and select the

desired function.

• Delete files: You can delete files

from My Music.

(1)File: Select saved file

(2)Mark all: Select all files.

(3)Unmark all: Deselect all files.

4-32

Multimedia System

(4)Delete: Delete the selected file(s)

- Select the file to delete, then

press the [Delete] to delete it.

- Delete is cancelled if phone calls

are received or made during

delete.

• Add to playlist: Frequently played

songs can be paired in a [Playlist].

- Songs can be played from the

[Playlist].

• Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Delete from playlist

When a song in the playlist is play-

ing, press the [Menu] and select

[Delete from playlist].

Select the song to delete, then press

[Delete].

Phone

Information

- Using the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Mobile

Phone

• Bluetooth

is a near-field wireless

networking technology that uses the

2.4 GHz frequency to connect vari-

ous devices within a certain distance

wirelessly.

• The technology is used in PCs,

peripherals, Bluetooth

phones,

tablet PCs, household appliances

and automobiles. Devices support-

ing Bluetooth

can exchange data at

high speeds without physical cable

connections.

• Bluetooth

Handsfree devices enable

convenient access to phone functions

through cell phones equipped with

Bluetooth

• Some Bluetooth

devices may not

be supported by the Bluetooth

Handsfree function.

(Continued)

• When Bluetooth

is connected and

calls are attempted through a con-

nected cell phone from outside the

vehicle, the call is connected

through the Bluetooth

Handsfree

function of the vehicle.

• Please be sure to disconnect the

Bluetooth

Handsfree function through

your Bluetooth

device or the audio

screen.

4-33

Multimedia System

Safety precautions

• The Bluetooth

Handsfree function

helps drivers to drive safely. By

connecting a Bluetooth

-enabled

phone to the vehicle’s audio sys-

tem, phone calls can be made and

received through the audio system

and contacts can be managed.

Consult the user manual before

use.

• Excessive manipulation of controls

whilst driving, making it difficult to

pay attention to the road ahead,

can lead to accidents.Do not oper-

ate the device excessively whilst

driving.

• Looking at the screen for a pro-

longed time increases the risk of

accidents. Keep time spent looking

at the screen to a minimum.

Precautions when connecting

Bluetooth

devices

• The vehicle supports the following

Bluetooth

functions. Some

Bluetooth

devices may not sup-

port some functions.

1) Bluetooth

Handsfree phone calls

2)Operations during a call

(Private, Switch, Mic Vol. con-

trols)

3) Download call history saved to

the Bluetooth

device

4) Download contacts saved to the

Bluetooth

device

5) Automatic contacts/call history

download when Bluetooth

connected

6)Automatic Bluetooth

device

connection when the vehicle is

started

7) Bluetooth

audio streaming play-

back

• Before connecting the audio sys-

tem to your device, make sure your

device supports Bluetooth

• Even if your device supports

Bluetooth

, a Bluetooth

connec-

tion cannot be established if the

device’s Bluetooth

function is

switched off. Search and connect

with the Bluetooth

function

enabled.

• Pair or connect Bluetooth

devices

to the audio system with the vehi-

cle at a standstill.

• If a Bluetooth

connection is lost

due to abnormal conditions whilst

a Bluetooth

device is connected

(communication range exceeded,

device power OFF, communication

errors, etc.), the disconnected

Bluetooth

device is searched for

and automatically reconnected.

• If you want to disable the

Bluetooth

device auto-connect

function, turn the Bluetooth

func-

tion OFF on your device. Consult

the user manuals for individual

devices to see whether Bluetooth

is supported.

• Handsfree call quality and volume

may vary depending on the type of

Bluetooth

device.

4-34

Multimedia System

• Some Bluetooth

devices are sub-

ject to intermittent Bluetooth

con-

nection failures. In this case, use

the following method.

1) Turn the Bluetooth

function off

on your Bluetooth

device ➟

Turn it on and try again.

2) Delete the paired device from

both the audio system and

Bluetooth

device, then pair

again.

3)Power down your Bluetooth

device ➟ Turn it on and try

again.

4) Completely remove the battery

from your Bluetooth

device;

reinsert it, reboot, and attempt

connection.

5) Restart the vehicle and reat-

tempt connection.

Pairing a Bluetooth

device

Information on pairing Bluetooth

devices

• Pairing refers to the process of

pairing Bluetooth

cell phones or

devices with the system prior to

connection. This is a necessary

procedure for Bluetooth

connec-

tion and usage.

• Up to five devices can be paired.

• Pairing Bluetooth

device is not

allowed whilst vehicle is moving.

Pairing the first Bluetooth

device

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio system or the [CALL] button

on the steering wheel remote control

➟ Search for the vehicle from the

Bluetooth

device, and pair ➟ Enter

the passkey on the Bluetooth

device or approve passkey ➟

Bluetooth

pairing completed.

1. When the [PHONE] button on the

audio or the [CALL] button on the

steering wheel remote control is

pressed, the following screen is dis-

played. Devices can now be paired.

(1) Device name: Searched name in

Bluetooth

device.

Information

The device name in the image above is

an example. Refer to your device for

the actual name of your device.

2. Search for available Bluetooth

devices in the Bluetooth

menu of

your Bluetooth

device (cell

phone, etc.).

3. Confirm that the device name in your

Bluetooth

device matches the

device name shown on the audio

screen, then select it.

4-35

Multimedia System

4. For devices that require passkey

confirmation, the following screen

is shown on the audio system. A

6-digit passkey input screen is

shown in the Bluetooth

device.

- After confirming that the 6-digit

passkey on the audio screen and

the Bluetooth

device are identi-

cal, press [OK] in your

Bluetooth

device.

Information

The 6-digit passkey in the image

above is an example. Refer to your

vehicle for the actual passkey.

Pairing a second Bluetooth

device

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth] ➟

Select [Connections] ➟ Select [Add

new].

- The pairing procedure from this

point is identical to [Pairing the first

Bluetooth device].

Information

• Bluetooth

standby mode lasts for

three minutes. If a device is not

paired within three minutes, pairing

is cancelled. Start over from the

beginning.

• For most Bluetooth

devices, a con-

nection is established automatically

after pairing. Some devices, howev-

er, require separate confirmation

when connecting after pairing. Be

sure to check your Bluetooth

device after pairing to confirm that

it has connected.

4-36

Multimedia System

Connecting Bluetooth

devices

If there are no connected devices

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio system or the [CALL] button in

the steering wheel remote control ➟

List of paired Bluetooth

devices ➟

Select the desired Bluetooth

device

from the list ➟ Connect Bluetooth

If there are connected devices

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Settings] ➟

Select [Connections] ➟ Select

Bluetooth

device to connect ➟ Select

[Connect] ➟ Connect Bluetooth

Information

• Only one Bluetooth

device can be

connected at a time.

• When a Bluetooth

device is con-

nected, other devices cannot be

paired.

Accepting/rejecting phone calls

Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth

connected.

(1)Caller name: If the caller number

is in your contacts, the correspon-

ding name is displayed.

(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming

phone number is displayed.

(3)Accept: Accept call.

(4)Reject: Reject call.

4-37

Multimedia System

Information

• When the incoming call screen is

displayed, audio mode and the set-

tings screen cannot be shown. Only

call volume control is supported.

• Some Bluetooth

devices may not

support the call reject function.

• Some Bluetooth

devices may not

support the phone number display

function.

Operation during calls

Incoming call with Bluetooth

con-

nected ➟ Select [Accept].

(1) Call duration: Call duration display.

(2) Caller name: If the caller number is

in your contacts, the corresponding

name is displayed.

(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming

phone number is displayed.

(4) Keypad: Number keypad for

Automatic Response Service input

is displayed.

(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell

phone.

(6)Microphone Volume (Outgoing

Volume): Adjust outgoing voice

volume.

(7)End: End call.

Information

• Some Bluetooth

devices may not

support the Private function.

• The outgoing voice volume may vary

depending on the type of Bluetooth

device. If the outgoing voice volume is

too high or low, adjust the

Microphone Volume(Outgoing Volume).

4-38

Multimedia System

Favourites

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select

[Favourites(Favorites)] ➟

Favourites(Favorites) list displayed.

(1)Favourites(Favorites) list: A list of

paired favourites(favorites) is dis-

played.

Connect a call when selected.

(2)Add to favourites(Favorites): Add

a downloaded phone number to

favourites(favorites).

(3) Delete: Delete a saved

Favourites(Favorites).

Information

• Up to 20 favourites can be paired

for each paired Bluetooth

device.

• Favourites can be accessed when the

Bluetooth

device they were paired

from is connected.

• The audio system does not down-

load favourites from Bluetooth

devices. Favourites must be newly

saved before use.

• To add to favourites, contacts must

be downloaded first.

• Saved favourites are not updated

even if the contacts of the connected

Bluetooth

device are changed. In

this case, favourites need to be delet-

ed and added again.

Call history

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Call history]

➟ Call history is displayed.

(1)Call history: Display the down-

loaded call history list.

Connect a call when selected.

(2)Sort by: Sort by all calls, dialed

calls, received calls or missed

calls.

(3)Download: Download call history

from connected Bluetooth

devices.

Information

• Up to 50 dialed, received and missed

calls are saved.

• When the latest call history is

received, the existing call history is

deleted.

4-39

Multimedia System

Contacts

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟

Select letter (ABC) ➟ Contacts dis-

played.

(1)Contacts: Display downloaded

contacts.

Connect a call when selected.

(2) Download:Download contacts from

connected Bluetooth

devices.

Information

• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.

• In some cases, additional confirmation

from your Bluetooth

device is neces-

sary when downloading contacts. If

downloading of contacts unsuccessful,

consult your Bluetooth

device’s set-

tings or the audio screen to approve

the download.

• Contacts without phone numbers

are not displayed.

Dial

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio ➟ Select [Dial].

(1)Phone number entry window:The

phone number entered using the

keypad is displayed.

(2)Clear

- Press to delete individual digits.

- Press and hold to delete the

entire phone number.

(3)Keypad: Enter phone number.

(4) Bluetooth

Phone name

- The name of the connected

Bluetooth

device is displayed.

- Contacts matching the keypad

number/letter input are displayed.

4-40

Multimedia System

(5)Call

- Enter and select a phone num-

ber to call.

- Select without entering a phone

number to see the most recent

dialed call.

Settings

Select the [PHONE] button on the

audio ➟ Select [Settings].

- For phone settings, refer to Setup

page.

Setup

Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screensaver and

Display Off settings.

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system.

Display

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Display].

• Dimming mode(Mode): Audio screen

brightness can be adjusted to the

time of day.

• Brightness(Illumination): The bright-

ness of the audio screen can be

changed.

• Text scroll*: If text is too long to be

displayed on the screen, enable

the text scroll function.

* if equipped

Sound

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Sound].

• Position: Sound balance and pan-

ning can be adjusted.

• Equaliser(Tone): Sound tone

colour can be adjusted.

• Speed dependent volume control:

Automatically adjust volume based

on vehicle speed.

• Beep: Select whether to play a beep

sound when the screen is touched.

4-41

Multimedia System

Date/Time

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].

• Set time: Set the time displayed on

the audio screen.

• Time format: Choose between 12-

hour and 24-hour time formats.

• Set date: Set the date displayed on

the audio screen.

Bluetooth

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth].

• Connections: Control pairing, dele-

tion, connection and disconnection

of Bluetooth

devices.

• Auto connection priority: Set the

connection priority of Bluetooth

devices when the vehicle is started.

• Update contacts: Contacts can be

downloaded from connected

Bluetooth

devices.

• Bluetooth voice guidance*: Play or

mute voice prompts for Bluetooth

device pairing, connection and

errors.

* if equipped

Information

• When paired devices are deleted,

the call history and contacts of the

device saved to the audio system are

deleted.

• For Bluetooth

connections with

low connection priority, some time

may be required for the connection

to be established.

• Contacts can be downloaded only

from the currently connected

Bluetooth

device.

• If no Bluetooth

device is connected,

the Download Contacts button is

disabled.

• If the language setting is Slovakian,

Hungarian or Korean, Bluetooth

voice guidance* is not supported.

* if equipped

System

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [System].

• Memory information: View My

Music memory usage.

• Language: Change the user lan-

guage.

• Default: Reset the audio system.

Information

The system resets to the default val-

ues, and all saved data and settings

are lost.

DDeeccllaarraattiioonn ooff CCoonnffoorrmmiittyy

4-42

Multimedia System

Screensaver

Set the information displayed when

the audio system is switched off or

the screen is turned off.

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Screensaver].

• Analogue: An analog clock is dis-

played.

• Digital: A digital clock is displayed.

• None: No information is displayed.

Display Off

To prevent glare, the screen can be

turned off with the audio system in

operation.

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Display Off].

Information

Use ‘Screensaver’ to set the informa-

tion to be displayed when the screen is

turned off.

CE for EU

Driving your vehicle

Before driving.........................................................5-4

Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4

Before starting .................................................................5-4

Ignition switch ........................................................5-5

Key ignition switch............................................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop button................................................5-9

Dual clutch transmission.....................................5-15

Dual clutch transmission operation............................5-15

Paddle shifter...................................................................5-23

Parking...............................................................................5-24

Good driving practices...................................................5-24

Coasting guide (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ..........5-26

Braking system.....................................................5-27

Power brakes ...................................................................5-27

Disc brakes wear indicator...........................................5-28

Parking brake...................................................................5-28

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-31

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-33

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-36

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-38

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-38

Good braking practices ................................................5-39

Blind-spot collision warning (BCW) system ....5-40

BCW ....................................................................................5-41

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning).........5-43

Detecting sensor .............................................................5-46

Limitations of the system .............................................5-47

Forward collision-avoidance assist (FCA)

system....................................................................5-49

System setting and activation......................................5-49

FCA warning message and system control ..............5-51

FCA sensor ......................................................................5-54

System malfunction........................................................5-55

Limitations of the system .............................................5-57

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system ...................5-62

LKA operation ..................................................................5-63

Warning light and message ..........................................5-67

Limitations of the System.............................................5-68

LKA System function change.......................................5-69

Driver attention warning (DAW) system ..........5-70

System setting and activation......................................5-70

Resetting the system .....................................................5-72

System standby ...............................................................5-72

System malfunction........................................................5-73

Speed limit control system .................................5-75

Speed Limit Control operation .....................................5-75

Cruise control .......................................................5-77

Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-77

Smart Cruise Control system..............................5-83

Smart Cruise Control speed..........................................5-85

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance.............................................................................5-89

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.....5-92

To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control ..5-94

To convert to Cruise Control mode ............................5-94

Limitations of the system .............................................5-95

Special driving conditions.................................5-100

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-100

Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-100

Smooth cornering .........................................................5-101

Driving at night..............................................................5-101

Driving in the rain.........................................................5-101

Driving in flooded areas..............................................5-102

Highway driving.............................................................5-102

Winter driving.....................................................5-103

Snow or icy conditions................................................5-103

Winter Precautions.......................................................5-105

Trailer towing .....................................................5-108

If you decide to pull a trailer?...................................5-109

Trailer towing equipment ............................................5-111

Driving with a trailer ....................................................5-112

Maintenance when towing a trailer.........................5-116

Vehicle weight ....................................................5-117

Overloading ....................................................................5-117

5-3

Driving your vehicle

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.Exposure to CO can cause

unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If

you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the

vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only

long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an

open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windscreen

clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the boot open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

WARNING

5-4

Driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean

and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tyres for uneven

wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Before starting

• Make sure the bonnet, the boot,

and the doors are securely closed

and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and

steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seat belt. Check that

all passengers have fastened their

seat belts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in

the instrument panel and the mes-

sages on the instrument display

when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check that any items you are car-

rying are stored properly or fas-

tened down securely.

BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be prop-

erly belted whenever the vehi-

cle is moving. For more infor-

mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in

chapter 2.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedes-

trians may be careless and

make mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of

driving. Driver distraction can

cause accidents.

• Leave plenty of space between

you and the vehicle in front of

you.

WARNING

5-5

Driving your vehicle

NEVER drink or take drugs and

drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and

driving is dangerous and may

result in an accident and SERI-

OUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number

one contributor to the highway

death toll each year. Even a

small amount of alcohol will

affect your reflexes, percep-

tions and judgment. Just one

drink can reduce your ability to

respond to changing conditions

and emergencies and your reac-

tion time gets worse with each

additional drink.

Driving whilst under the influ-

ence of drugs is as dangerous

or more dangerous than driving

under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

You are much more likely to have

a serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive. If you are

drinking or taking drugs, don't

drive. Do not ride with a driver

who has been drinking or taking

drugs.Choose a designated driv-

er or call a taxi.

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any

person who is unfamiliar with

the vehicle to touch the igni-

tion switch or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehi-

cle movement can occur.

• NEVER reach through the

steering wheel for the ignition

switch, or any other control,

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or

arm in this area may cause a

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

WARNING

5-6

Driving your vehicle

Key ignition switch

(if equipped)

Illuminated ignition switch

(if equipped)

Whenever the front door is opened,

the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-

vided the ignition switch is not in the

ON position. The light will go off

immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 30

seconds when the door is closed.

• NEVER turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK or ACC

position whilst the vehicle is

in motion except in an emer-

gency. This will result in

engine turning off and loss of

power assist for the steering

and brake systems. This may

lead to loss of directional con-

trol and braking function,

which could cause an acci-

dent.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, apply the parking

brake, and turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle move-

ment may occur if these pre-

cautions are not followed.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE056172L/OAE056173L

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE056175L/OAE056174L

5-7

Driving your vehicle

Key ignition switch positions

Switch

Position

Action Notes

LOCK

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the key in at

the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.

The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.

(if equipped)

ACC

Electrical accessories are usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition

switch to the ACC position, turn the key

whilst turning the steering wheel right and

left to release.

This is the normal key position when the vehicle has started.

All features and accessories are usable.

The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition

switch from ACC to ON.

Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON

position when the vehicle is not running to

prevent the battery from discharging.

START

To start the vehicle, turn the ignition switch to the START position.

The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.

The engine will crank until you release the

key.

5-8

Driving your vehicle

Starting the vehicle

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the

" " comes on and release it.

Information

• It is best to maintain a moderate

engine speed until the vehicle engine

comes up to normal operating tem-

perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt

acceleration or deceleration whilst

the engine is still cold.

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator whilst start-

ing the vehicle. Do not race the

engine whilst warming it up.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in

the START position for more

than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10

seconds before trying again.

• Do not turn the ignition switch to

the START position with the

engine running. It may damage

the starter.

• If the " " indicator turns off

whilst you are in motion, do not

attempt to move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position

whilst the vehicle is still moving

and turn the ignition switch to

the START position in an

attempt to restart the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the vehicle.

NOTICE

• Always wear appropriate

shoes when operating your

vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,

such as high heels, ski boots,

sandals, flip-flops, etc., may

interfere with your ability to

use the brake and accelerator

pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move which

can lead to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is

normal. The vehicle may sud-

denly move if the brake padal

is released when the rpm is

high.

WARNING

5-9

Driving your vehicle

Engine Start/Stop button

(if equipped)

Whenever the front door is opened,

the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-

minate and will go off 30 seconds

after the door is closed.

OAE056001R

To turn the hybrid system off in

an emergency:

Press and hold the Engine

Start/Stop button for more than

two seconds OR Rapidly press

and release the Engine Start/

Stop button three times (within

three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you

can restart the hybrid system

without depressing the brake

pedal by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button with the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

• NEVER press the Engine

Start/Stop button whilst the

vehicle is in motion except in

an emergency. This will result

in the hybrid system turning

off and loss of power assist

for the steering and brake

systems. This may lead to

loss of directional control and

braking function, which could

cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, set the parking brake,

press the Engine Start/Stop

button to the OFF position,and

take the Smart Key with you.

Unexpected vehicle movement

may occur if these precautions

are not followed.

WARNING

5-10

Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions

Button Position Action Notice

OFF

To turn off the vehicle, press the Engine

Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine Start/Stop button

without the shift lever in P (Park), the Engine

Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF

position, but turns to the ACC position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle

from theft.

If the steering wheel is not locked properly

when you open the driver's door, the warning

chime will sound.

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop button when

the button is in the OFF position without

depressing the brake pedal.

Electrical accessories are usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

• If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ACC position for more than one hour,

the battery power will turn off automatically

to prevent the battery from discharging.

• If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,

the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.

Press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst

turning the steering wheel right and left to

release tension.

5-11

Driving your vehicle

Button Position Action Notice

Press the Engine Start/Stop button whilst it

is in the ACC position without depressing

the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before

the vehicle is started.

Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ON position when the vehicle is not run-

ning to prevent the battery from discharging.

START

To start the vehicle, depress the brake pedal

and press the Engine Start/Stop button with

the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button

without depressing the brake pedal, the vehi-

cle does not start and the Engine Start/Stop

button changes as follows:

OFF

→→

ACC

→→

OFF or ACC

5-12

Driving your vehicle

Starting the hybrid system

Information

• The vehicle will start by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button, only when

the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-

cle, and when it is far away from the

driver, the hybrid system may not

start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ACC or ON position, any

door is open, the system checks for

the smart key. When the smart key

is not in the vehicle, the " " indi-

cator will blink and the warning

"Key not in vehicle" will come on.

When all doors are closed, the chime

will also sound for about 5 seconds.

Keep the smart key in the vehicle

when in the ACC position or if the

hybrid system is ON.

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton. If the vehicle starts, the " "

indicator will come on.

• Always wear appropriate

shoes when operating your

vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,

such as high heels, ski boots,

sandals, flip-flops, etc., may

interfere with your ability to

use the brake and accelerator

pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move which

can lead to an accident.

WARNING

5-13

Driving your vehicle

Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up whilst the vehicle remains sta-

tionary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. Steep accelerating and

decelerating should be avoided.

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator whilst start-

ing the vehicle. Do not race the

engine whilst warming it up.

• If ambient temperature is low, the

" " indicator may remain illumi-

nated longer than the normal amount

of time.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• If the " " indicator turns off

whilst you are in motion, do not

attempt to move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the vehicle.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

Do not press the Engine Start/Stop

button for more than 10 seconds

except when the stop lamp fuse is

blown.

When the stop lamp fuse is blown,

you cannot normally start the

hybrid system. Replace the fuse

with a new one. If you are not able

to replace the fuse, you can start

the vehicle by pressing and hold-

ing the Engine Start/Stop button

for 10 seconds with the Engine

Start/Stop button in the ACC posi-

tion.

For your safety always depress

the brake pedal before starting the

vehicle.

NOTICENOTICE

5-14

Driving your vehicle

Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the

smart key does not work correctly,

you can start the vehicle by pressing

the Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key in the direction of the pic-

ture above.

OAE056002R

5-15

Driving your vehicle

• The dual clutch transmission can

be thought of as an automatically

shifting manual transmission. It

gives the driving feel of a manual

transmission, yet provides the

ease of a fully automatic transmis-

sion.

• When D (Drive) is selected, the

transmission will automatically shift

through the gears similar to a con-

ventional automatic transmission.

Unlike a traditional automatic

transmission, the gear shifting can

sometimes be felt and heard as the

actuators engage the clutches and

the gears are selected.

• The dual clutch transmission incor-

porates a dry-type dual clutch

mechanism, which allows for better

acceleration performance and

increased fuel efficiency whilst

driving. But it differs from a con-

ventional automatic transmission

because it does not incorporate a

torque converter. Instead, the tran-

sition from one gear to the next is

managed by clutch slip, especially

at lower speeds.

DDUUAALL CCLLUUTTCCHH TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

OAE056004R

The shift lever can freely operate.

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button whilst moving the shift lever.

Press the shift button whilst moving the shift lever.

Manual shift mode

Dual clutch transmission operation

The dual clutch transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.

❈ To move the shift lever from/to P (Parking) or between R (Reverse) and D (Drive), you must

depress the brake pedal for the vehicle to stand still.

5-16

Driving your vehicle

As a result, shifts are sometimes

more noticeable, and a light vibra-

tion can be felt as the transmission

shaft speed is matched with the

engine shaft speed. This is a nor-

mal condition of the dual clutch

transmission.

• The dry-type clutch transfers

torque more directly and provides

a direct-drive feeling which may

feel different from a conventional

automatic transmission. This may

be more noticeable when launch-

ing the vehicle from a stop or when

travelling at low, stop-and-go vehi-

cle speeds.

• When rapidly accelerating from a

lower vehicle speed, the engine

rpm may increase dramatically as

a result of clutch slip as the dual

clutch transmission selects the cor-

rect gear. This is a normal condi-

tion.

• When accelerating from a stop on

an incline, press the accelerator

smoothly and gradually to avoid

any shudder feeling or jerkiness.

• When travelling at a lower vehicle

speed, if you release the accelera-

tor pedal quickly, you may feel

engine braking before the trans-

mission changes gears. This

engine braking feeling is similar to

operating a manual transmission at

low speed.

• When driving downhill, you may

wish to move the gear shift lever to

Manual Shift mode and downshift

to a lower gear in order to control

your speed without using the brake

pedal excessively.

• When you turn the engine on and

off, you may hear clicking sounds

as the system goes through a self-

test.This is a normal sound for the

dual clutch transmission.

• During the first 1000 miles

(1500km), you may feel that the

vehicle may not be smooth when

accelerating at low speed. During

this break-in period, the shift quali-

ty and performance of your new

vehicle is continuously optimised.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surround-

ing areas near your vehicle for

people, especially children,

before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, then set the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Unexpected and sudden

vehicle movement can occur

if these precautions are not

followed.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slip-

pery roads. The vehicle may

slip causing an accident.

WARNING

5-17

Driving your vehicle

• Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into D (Drive) or

R (Reverse).

• Do not put the shift lever in N

(Neutral) whilst driving.

DCT warning messages

This warning message is displayed

when vehicle is driven slowly on a

grade and the vehicle detects that

the brake pedal is not applied.

Steep grade

Driving up hills or on steep grades:

• To hold the vehicle on an incline

use the foot brake or the parking

brake.

• When in stop-and-go traffic on an

incline, allow a gap to form ahead

of you before moving the vehicle

forward. Then hold the vehicle on

the incline with the foot brake.

NOTICE

OTLE055018

• To avoid damage to your

transmission, do not try to

accelerate in R (Reverse) or

any forward gear position with

the brakes applied.

• When stopped on a slope, do

not hold the vehicle with

accelerator pedal. Use the

brake pedal or the parking

brake.

CAUTION

Due to transmission failure, you

may not continue to drive and

the position indicator and the

position indicator (D, P) on the

instrument cluster will blink.We

recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the system checked.

WARNING

5-18

Driving your vehicle

• If the vehicle is held or creeping

forward on an incline by applying

the accelerator pedal, the clutch

and transmission may overheat

which can result in damage.At this

time, a warning message will

appear on the LCD display.

• If the LCD warning is active, the

foot brake must be applied.

• Ignoring the warnings can lead to

damage to the transmission.

To hold the vehicle on a hill use

the foot brake or the parking

brake. If the vehicle is held by

applying the accelerator pedal on

a hill, the clutch and transmission

will be overheated resulting in

damage.

Transmission high temperature

• Under certain conditions, such as

repeated stop-and-go launches on

steep grades, sudden take off or

acceleration, or other harsh driving

conditions, the transmission clutch

temperatures will increase exces-

sively.

• When the clutch temperatures are

too high, the "Transmission temp is

high! Stop safely" warning mes-

sage will appear on the LCD dis-

play, a chime will sound, and the

transmission shifting may not be

smooth.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

• If you ignore this warning, the driv-

ing condition may become worse.

You may experience abrupt shifts,

frequent shifts, or jerkiness.

• When the message "Trans cooled.

Resume driving." appears you can

continue to drive your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

NOTICE

OTLE055023

5-19

Driving your vehicle

Transmission overheated

• If the vehicle continues to be driv-

en and the clutch temperatures

reach the maximum temperature

limit, the "Trans Hot! Park with

engine on" warning will be dis-

played.When this occurs the clutch

is disabled until the clutch cools to

normal temperatures.

• The warning will display a time to

wait for the transmission to cool.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

• When the message "Trans cooled.

Resume driving." appears you can

continue to drive your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

If any of the warning messages in

the LCD display continue to blink, for

your safety, we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and have the system

checked.

Shift lever position

The indicator in the instrument clus-

ter displays the shift lever position

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must

depress firmly on the brake pedal

and make sure your foot is off the

accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above

and still cannot shift the lever out

of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock

Release" in this chapter.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)

before turning the vehicle off.

OTLA055141/OTLA055142

5-20

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in

motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically

shift through a 6-gear sequence, pro-

viding the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing anoth-

er vehicle or driving uphill, depress

the accelerator fully. The transmis-

sion will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear (or gears, as

appropriate).

If you drive the vehicle with the shift

lever in D (Drive), the vehicle will

automatically change to ECO mode.

The indicator will illuminate on

the instrument cluster.

When driving in ECO mode, the vehi-

cle improves fuel efficiency for eco-

friendly driving.

NOTICE

• Shifting into P (Park) whilst

the vehicle is in motion may

cause you to lose control of

the vehicle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,

always make sure the shift

lever is in P (Park), apply the

parking brake, and turn the

vehicle off.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-

tion in place of the parking

brake.

• When parking on an incline,

place the shift lever in P (Park)

and apply the parking brake to

prevent the vehicle from

rolling downhill.

• For safety, always engage the

parking brake with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position

except for the case of emer-

gency parking.

WARNING

Do not drive with the shift lever

in N (Neutral).The engine brake

will not work and lead to an

accident.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal fully to

prevent unintended movement

when stopping the vehicle.

CAUTION

5-21

Driving your vehicle

S (Sport)

If you drive the vehicle with the shift

lever in S (Sport), the vehicle will

automatically change to SPORT

mode. The indicator will illumi-

nate on the instrument cluster.

When driving in SPORT mode, the

vehicle provides sporty but firm rid-

ing.

Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency

may decrease.

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or

in motion, manual shift mode is

selected by pushing the shift lever

from the D (Drive) position into the

manual gate. To return to D (Drive)

range operation, push the shift lever

back into the main gate.

In manual shift mode, moving the shift

lever backwards and forwards will

allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward

once to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one

gear.

Information -

For Plug-in

hybrid vehicles

• If the vehicle is in Electric (CD)

mode, and you shift from D (Drive)

to S (Sport), the vehicle will change

to SPORT mode. In SPORT mode, if

you move the shift lever up (+) or

down (-), the vehicle will enter man-

ual shift mode.

• If the vehicle is in Hybrid (CS)

mode, and you shift from D (Drive)

to S (Sport), the vehicle will auto-

matically enter manual shift mode.

OAE056012R

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

5-22

Driving your vehicle

Information

• Only the six forward gears can be

selected in Manual Shift Mode. To

reverse or park the vehicle, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or

P (Park) position as required.

• Downshifts are made automatically

when the vehicle slows down. When

the vehicle stops, 1

gear is automat-

ically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches

the red zone the transmission will

upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to

+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the

transmission may not make the

requested gear change if the next

gear is outside of the allowable

engine rpm range. The driver must

execute upshifts in accordance with

road conditions, taking care to keep

the engine rpms below the red zone.

• When driving in manual shift mode,

slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may

not be engaged if the engine rpms

are outside of the allowable range.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the dual clutch trans-

mission has a shift-lock system

which prevents shifting the transmis-

sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)

unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the vehicle or place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake

pedal depressed, continue depress-

ing the brake, and then do the follow-

ing:

Type A

1. Place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Push the shift-lock release button

(1).

4. Move the shift lever whilst pushing

the shift-lock release button.

5. Stop pushing the shift-lock release

button.

6. Depress the brake pedal, and then

restart the vehicle.

If you need to use the shift-lock

release, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer immediately.

OAE056011E

5-23

Driving your vehicle

Type B

1. Place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-

ering the shift-lock access hole.

4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-

driver) into the access hole and

press down on the tool.

5. Move the shift lever whilst holding

down the screwdriver.

6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock

release access hole then install

the cap.

7. Depress the brake pedal, and then

restart the vehicle.

If you need to use the shift-lock

release, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system

(if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed

unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is functional when

the shift lever is in the D (Drive) or S

(Sport) position, or the manual shift

mode.

The paddle shifter will operate when

the vehicle speed is more than 3

mph (5 km/h).

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once

to shift up or down one gear and the

system changes from automatic

mode to manual mode.

OAE056011R

OPD056015

5-24

Driving your vehicle

• The system changes from manual

mode to automatic mode when

- the vehicle speed is lower than 3

mph (5 km/h),

- you depress the accelerator

pedal for more than 5 seconds,

- you pull the [+] paddle shifter for

more than 1 second, or

- you move the shift lever from D

(Drive) to S (Sport) or manual

shift mode (+, -) and then back to

D (Drive).

Information

If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are

pulled at the same time, gear shift may

not occur.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and

continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, apply the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key

with you when exiting the vehicle.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other

position with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in

motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift

into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so

may result in an accident because

of a loss of engine braking and the

transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

consistent pedal pressure can

result in the brakes overheating,

brake wear and possibly even

brake failure.

• Always apply the parking brake

when leaving the vehicle. Do not

depend on placing the transmis-

sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle

from moving.

When you stay in the vehicle

with the engine running, be

careful not to depress the accel-

erator pedal for a long period of

time. The engine or exhaust

system may overheat and start

a fire.

The exhaust gas and the

exhaust system are very hot.

Keep away from the exhaust

system components.

Do not stop or park over flam-

mable materials, such as dry

grass, paper or leaves. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

WARNING

5-25

Driving your vehicle

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the

accelerator.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

In a collision, an unbelted

occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured

or killed than a properly belt-

ed occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-

nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control

of your vehicle at highway

speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off

the roadway and the driver

over steers to reenter the

roadway.

(Continued)

• In the event your vehicle

leaves the roadway, do not

steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into

the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you

follow all posted speed limits.

WARNING

5-26

The coasting guide function informs

the driver when to take the foot off

from the accelerator by anticipating a

decelerating event* based on the

analysis of driving routes and road

conditions of the navigation. It

encourages the driver to remove foot

from the pedal and allow coasting

down the road with EV motor only.

This helps prevent unnecessary fuel

consumption and increases fuel effi-

ciency.

Information

Example of a deceleration event is

making a right/left turn, driving

through a rotary, entering or exiting a

highway (freeway), etc.

The driver can activate the coasting

guide by placing the ignition switch in

the ON position and by selecting:

• User settings

User Settings → Driver assistance

→ Coasting guidance

For the explanation of the system,

press and hold the [OK] button.

Operation conditions

To activate the system, take the fol-

lowing procedures. Enter your desti-

nation information on the navigation

and select the driving route. Have the

vehicle in ECO mode by driving the

vehicle in D (Drive). Then, satisfy the

following.

- The driving speed should be between

25 mph (40 km/h) and 100 mph (160

km/h).

Information

The operating speed may vary due to

difference between instrument cluster

and navigation effected by tyre infla-

tion level.

Information

Coasting guide is only a supplemental

system to assist with fuel-efficient

driving. Thus, the operating condi-

tions may be different in accordance

with traffic/road conditions (i.e. driv-

ing in a traffic jam, driving on a slope,

driving on a curve). Thus, take the

actual driving conditions into consid-

eration, such as distances from the

vehicles ahead/behind, whilst refer-

ring to the coasting guide system as

guidance.

CCOOAASSTTIINNGG GGUUIIDDEE ((PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Driving your vehicle

OAEPH047504L/OAE046505N

■ Type A ■ Type B

5-27

Driving your vehicle

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted

brakes that adjust automatically

through normal usage.

If the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode or the vehicle is turned

off whilst driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work.You can still

stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than typical.

The stopping distance, however, will

be longer than with power brakes.

When the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode, the reserve brake

power is partially depleted each time

the brake pedal is applied. Do not

pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when

necessary to maintain steering con-

trol on slippery surfaces.

BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high

brake temperatures, exces-

sive brake lining and pad

wear, and increased stopping

distances.

• When descending down a

long or steep hill, move the

shift lever to Manual Shift

mode and manually downshift

to a lower gear in order to

control your speed without

using the brake pedal exces-

sively. Applying the brakes

continuously will cause the

brakes to overheat and could

result in a temporary loss of

braking performance.

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the

vehicle's ability to safely slow

down; the vehicle may also

pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Applying

the brakes lightly will indicate

whether they have been

affected in this way. Always

test your brakes in this fash-

ion after driving through deep

water.To dry the brakes, light-

ly tap the brake pedal to heat

up the brakes whilst maintain-

ing a safe forward speed until

brake performance returns to

normal. Avoid driving at high

speeds until the brakes func-

tion correctly.

WARNING

5-28

Driving your vehicle

• Do not continue depressing the

brake pedal if the "

indica-

tor is OFF. The battery may be

discharged.

• Noise and vibration generated

during braking is normal.

• Under normal operation, electric

brake pump noise and motor

vibration may occur temporarily

in below cases.

- When the pedal is depressed

suddenly.

- When the pedal is repeatedly

depressed in short intervals.

- When the ABS function is acti-

vated whilst braking.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and

new pads are required, you will hear

a high pitched warning sound from

your front or rear brakes. You may

hear this sound come and go or it

may occur whenever you depress

the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or

climates may cause a brake squeal

when you first apply (or lightly apply)

the brakes. This is normal and does

not indicate a problem with your

brakes.

To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

Information

Always replace brake pads as com-

plete front or rear axle sets.

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

Always set the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle.

To apply the parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal

down as far as possible.

NOTICE

OAE056014R

5-29

Driving your vehicle

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal

down and it will release automatical-

ly.

If the parking brake does not release

or does not release all the way, we

recommend that you have your vehi-

cle checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

OAE056013R

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-

ate the parking brake whilst the

vehicle is moving except in an

emergency situation. It could

damage the brake system and

lead to an accident.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle

or parking, always come to a

complete stop and continue

to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into P

(Park) position, then apply the

parking brake, and place the

ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking

brake not fully engaged are at

risk for moving inadvertently

and causing injury to yourself

or others.

• When parking on an incline,

block the wheels to prevent the

vehicle from rolling down.

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the parking brake. If the

parking brake is released

unintentionally, serious injury

may occur.

• Only release the parking

brake when you are seated

inside the vehicle with your

foot firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING

5-30

Driving your vehicle

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal whilst the parking brake is

engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the park-

ing brake engaged, a warning

will sound. Damage to the park-

ing brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake on

can overheat the braking system

and cause premature wear or

damage to brake parts. Make sure

the parking brake is released and

the Brake Warning Light is off

before driving.

Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light

by placing the ignition

switch to the ON posi-

tion vehicle not in the

ready ( ) mode.

This light will be illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON posi-

tion.

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light

remains on after the parking brake is

released whilst the vehicle is in the

ready ( ) mode, there may be a

malfunction in the brake system.

Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the

vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-

sible, use extreme caution whilst

operating the vehicle and only con-

tinue to drive the vehicle until you

can reach a safe location.

NOTICE

5-31

Driving your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS is an electronic braking system

that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and

brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from

your ABS in an emergency situation,

do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to

pump your brakes. Depress your

brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and it means your ABS is

active.

ABS does not reduce the time or dis-

tance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from sudden changes in

direction, such as trying to take a

corner too fast or making a sudden

lane change. Always drive at a safe

speed for the road and weather con-

ditions.

(Continued)

• On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different

surface height.

• Tyre chains are installed on

your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS

or ESC equipped vehicle should

not be tested by high speed

driving or cornering.This could

endanger the safety of yourself

or others.

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not

prevent accidents due to

improper or dangerous driving

manoeuvres. Even though vehi-

cle control is improved during

emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance

between you and objects ahead

of you. Vehicle speeds should

always be reduced during

extreme road conditions. The

braking distance for cars

equipped with ABS or ESC may

be longer than for those without

these systems in the following

road conditions.

Drive your vehicle at reduced

speeds during the following

conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-32

Driving your vehicle

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-

ty. Always steer moderately when

braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-

ing wheel movement can still cause

your vehicle to veer into oncoming

traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake sys-

tem may result in a longer stopping

distance than for vehicles equipped

with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay

on for several seconds after the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the light

will go off if everything is normal. If

the light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS. We recom-

mend that you contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer as soon as pos-

sible.

When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and apply your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light ( ) may illuminate. Pull

your car over to a safe place and

turn the vehicle off.

Restart the vehicle. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your ABS

system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with your ABS system. We

recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

Information

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the ABS

warning light ( ) may turn on at the

same time. This happens because of

the low battery voltage. It does not

mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

NOTICE

If the ABS warning light ( ) is

on and stays on, you may have

a problem with the ABS. Your

power brakes will work normal-

ly. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, we recommend

that you contact your HYUNDAI

authorised repairer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

5-33

Driving your vehicle

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the

vehicle during cornering manoeu-

vres.

ESC checks where you are steering

and where the vehicle is actually

going. ESC applies braking pressure

to any one of the vehicle's brakes

and intervenes in the engine man-

agement system to assist the driver

with keeping the vehicle on the

intended path. It is not a substitute

for safe driving practices. Always

adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the ESC and the ESC OFF

indicator lights illuminate for approxi-

mately three seconds. After both

lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

OAE056015R

OAE056016R

■ Type A

■ Type B

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when

cornering. The ESC system will

not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

manoeuvres, and hydroplaning

on wet surfaces can result in

severe accidents.

WARNING

5-34

Driving your vehicle

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-

tion, the ESC indicator light

blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal.This is

normal and it means your ESC is

active.

• When the ESC activates, the vehi-

cle may not respond to the acceler-

ator as it does under routine condi-

tions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use

when the ESC activates, the Cruise

Control automatically disengages.

The Cruise Control can be reen-

gaged when the road conditions

allow.See "Cruise Control System"

later in this chapter. (if equipped)

• When moving out of the mud or

driving on a slippery road, the

engine rpm (revolutions per minute)

may not increase even if you press

the accelerator pedal deeply.This is

to maintain the stability and traction

of the vehicle and does not indicate

a problem.

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and

message "Traction Control disabled"

will illuminate. In this state, the trac-

tion control function of ESC (engine

management) is disabled, but the

brake control function of ESC (brak-

ing management) still operates.

• State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button

continuously for more than 3 sec-

onds. The ESC OFF indicator light

and message "Traction & Stability

Control disabled" illuminates and a

warning chime sounds. In this state,

both the traction control function of

ESC (engine management) and the

brake control function of ESC (brak-

ing management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed in the

LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,

ESC remains off. Upon restarting the

vehicle, the ESC will automatically

turn on again.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OLF054101N/OAE056018L

■ Type A ■ Type B

OTLE055140/OAE056020L

5-35

Driving your vehicle

Indicator lights

When the ignition switch is pressed

to the ON position, the ESC indicator

light illuminates, then goes off if the

ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks when-

ever the ESC is operating.

If the ESC indicator light stays on,

your vehicle may have a malfunction

with the ESC system. When this

warning light illuminates we recom-

mend that the vehicle be checked by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes

on when the ESC is turned off with

the button.

Driving with wheels and tyres with

different sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. Before

replacing tyres, make sure all four

tyres and wheels are the same

size. Never drive the vehicle with

different sized wheels and tyres

installed.

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be

used briefly to help free the vehicle if

stuck in snow or mud, by temporarily

stopping operation of the ESC, to

maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off whilst driving, press

the ESC OFF button whilst driving on

a flat road surface.

NOTICE

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

When the ESC is blinking, this

indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt

to accelerate. NEVER turn the

ESC off whilst the ESC indicator

light is blinking or you may lose

control of the vehicle resulting in

an accident.

WARNING

5-36

Driving your vehicle

To prevent damage to the trans-

mission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle

to spin excessively whilst the

ESC, ABS, and parking brake

warning lights are displayed.The

repairs would not be covered by

the vehicle warranty. Reduce

engine power and do not spin

the wheel(s) excessively whilst

these lights are displayed.

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light

illuminated).

Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or standard brake system opera-

tion.

Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It

helps ensure the vehicle stays stable

when accelerating or braking sud-

denly on wet, slippery and rough

roads where traction over the four

tyres can suddenly become uneven.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve

roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the

vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-

sation in the brake pedal.This is nor-

mal and it means your VSM is active.

NOTICE

Take the following precautions

when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and

the distance to the vehicle

ahead.The VSM is not a substi-

tute for safe driving practices.

• Never drive too fast for the

road conditions.The VSM sys-

tem will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in bad

weather, slippery and uneven

roads can result in severe

accidents.

WARNING

5-37

Driving your vehicle

Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as

gradient or incline.

• Driving in reverse.

• The ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• The EPS (Electric Power Steering)

warning light ( ) is on or blinks.

VSM OFF condition

To cancel VSM operation, press the

ESC OFF button.ESC OFF indicator

light ( ) will illuminate.

To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF

button again.The ESC OFF indicator

light will go out.

Driving with wheels and tyres with

different sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. Before

replacing tyres, make sure all four

tyres and wheels are the same

size. Never drive the vehicle with

different sized tyres and wheels

installed.

NOTICE

If the ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays

on or blinks, your vehicle may

have a malfunction with the

VSM system. When the warning

light illuminates we recommend

that the vehicle be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

as soon as possible.

WARNING

5-38

Driving your vehicle

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

A vehicle has the tendency to slide

backwards on a steep slope, before

depressing the accelerator after a

stop. The HAC prevents the vehicle

from sliding backwards by automati-

cally operating the brake systems for

about 2 seconds.The brake systems

are automatically released, when the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

Information

• The HAC does not operate when the

shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

• The HAC activates even when the

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is

off. However, it does not activate,

when the ESC does not operate nor-

mally.

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)

The Emergency Stop Signal system

alerts the driver behind by blinking

the stop lights, whilst sharply and

severely braking.

The system is activated when:

• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The

deceleration power exceeds 7 m/s

and the driving speed exceeds 34

mph (55 km/h).)

• The ABS is activated.

The hazard warning flasher automat-

ically turns ON after blinking the stop

lights:

• When the driving speed is under

25 mph (40 km/h),

• When the ABS is deactivated, and

• When the sudden braking situation

is over.

The hazard warning flasher turns

OFF:

• When the vehicle drives at a low

speed for a certain period of time.

The driver can manually turn OFF

the hazard warning flasher by

pressing the button.

Information

The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) sys-

tem will not work if the hazard warn-

ing flashers are already on.

The HAC is activated only for

about 2 seconds, so always

depress the accelerator pedal

to begin driving upwards after a

stop.

WARNING

5-39

Driving your vehicle

Good braking practices

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The

brakes may get wet if the vehicle is

driven through standing water or if it

is washed.Your vehicle will not stop

as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet

brakes may cause the vehicle to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns

to normal. If the braking action does

not return to normal, stop as soon as

it is safe to do so and we recommend

that you call a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

constant pedal pressure can result in

the brakes overheating, brake wear,

and possibly even brake failure.

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driv-

ing, apply the brakes gently and

keep the vehicle pointed straight

ahead whilst you slow down. When

you are moving slowly enough for it

to be safe to do so, pull off the road

and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped to

prevent the vehicle from rolling for-

ward.

Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, then apply the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion.

Vehicles parked with the park-

ing brake not applied or not

fully engaged may roll inadver-

tently and may cause injury to

the driver and others. ALWAYS

apply the parking brake before

exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

5-40

Driving your vehicle

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) System uses radar sensors in

the rear bumper to monitor and warn

the driver of an approaching vehicle

in the driver's blind spot area.

The system monitors the rear area of

the vehicle and provides information

to the driver with an audible alert and

a indicator on the outside rearview

mirrors.

(1)BCW : Blind spot area

The BCW range varies relative to

vehicle speed. Note that if your

vehicle is travelling much faster

than the vehicles around you, the

warning will not occur.

(2)BCW : Closing at high speed

The BCW-Closing at high speed

feature will alert you when a vehi-

cle is approaching in an adjacent

lane at a high rate of speed.If the

driver activates the turn signal

when the system detects an

oncoming vehicle, the system

sounds an audible alert. The time

of alert varies according to the

speed difference between you

and the approaching vehicle.

(3) RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

The RCCW feature monitors

approaching cross traffic from the

left and right side of the vehicle

when your vehicle is in reverse.

The feature will operate when the

vehicle is moving in reverse below

about 6 mph (10 km/h). If oncom-

ing cross traffic is detected a

warning chime will sound.

The time of alert varies according

to the speed difference between

you and the approaching vehicle.

BBLLIINNDD--SSPPOOTT CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((BBCCWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE056106/H

Blind spot area

Closing at high speed

• Always be aware of road con-

ditions whilst driving and be

alert for unexpected situations

even though the Blind Spot

Detection System is operat-

ing.

• The Blind Spot Detection

System (BCW) is not a substi-

tute for proper and safe driving.

Always drive safely and use

caution when changing lanes

or backing up the vehicle. The

Blind Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) System may not detect

every object alongside the

vehicle.

WARNING

5-41

Driving your vehicle

BCW (if equipped)

Operating conditions

To operate:

Press the BCW switch with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

The indicator on the BCW switch will

illuminate. When the vehicle speed

exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h), the sys-

tem will be activated.

When the system is not used, turn the

system off by turning off the switch.

To cancel:

Press the BCW switch again. The

indicator on the switch will go off.

When the system is not used, turn the

system off by turning off the switch.

Information

• If the vehicle is turned off then on

again, the BCW system returns to

the previous state.

• When the system is turned on, the

warning light will illuminate for 3

seconds on the outside rearview

mirror.

The function will activate when:

1. The system is on.

2. The vehicle speed is above

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

3. An oncoming vehicle is detected

in the blind spot area.

■ Type A

OAE056033R

■ Type B

OAE056034R

5-42

Driving your vehicle

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the

boundary of the system, a warning

light (yellow) will illuminate on the

outside rearview mirror.

Once the detected vehicle is no

longer within the blind spot area, the

warning will turn off depending on to

the driving conditions of the vehicle.

OAE056035

■ Left side

■ Right side

OAE056036

■ Left side

OAE056037

■ Right side

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system

(the warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror) (i.e., in

the first stage alert)) AND

2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being

detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mir-

ror will also blink.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert (warning

chime and blinking warning light on the outside rearview mirror) will be

deactivated.

5-43

Driving your vehicle

• The second stage alarm may be

deactivated.

- To deactivate the warning chime:

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance → Rear Collision

Warning and deselect BCW sound

(Blind-Spot Collision Warning)' on

the LCD display.

Cluster type B

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance and deselect BCW

sound (Blind-Spot Collision

Warning)' on the LCD display.

Information

The warning chime function helps

alert the driver. Deactivate this func-

tion only when it is necessary. For

more information, refer to "LCD

Display Modes" in chapter 3.

- To activate the warning chime:

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance → Rear Collision

Warning and select BCW sound

(Blind-Spot Collision Warning)' on

the LCD display.

Cluster type B

Go to the "User Settings → Driver

assistance and select BCW sound

(Blind-Spot Collision Warning)" on

the LCD display.

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

(if equipped)

The RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning) feature monitors

approaching cross traffic from the left

and right side of the vehicle when

your vehicle is in reverse.

OAE056106

5-44

Driving your vehicle

Operating conditions

To operate:

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance → Rear Collision

Warning and select RCCW (Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision Warning)' on

the LCD display.

Cluster type B

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance and select RCCW (Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision Warning)' on

the LCD display.

The system will turn on and standby

to activate. The system will activate

when vehicle speed is below 6.2

mph (10 km/h) and with the shift

lever in R (Reverse).

If the function is deselected from the

instrument cluster, the function will

deactivate.

For more information, refer to

"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

Information

• The last selected setting (ON or

OFF) of the RCCW is remained in

the system.

• The system will activate when vehi-

cle speed is below 6.2 mph (10 km/h)

and with the shift lever in R

(Reverse).

• The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW) detecting range

is approximately 0.5 m ~ 20 m (1 ft ~

65 ft) in the direction of both lateral

sides of the vehicle.

An approaching vehicle will be

detected if their vehicle speed is

within 2.5 ~ 22.5 mph (4 km/h ~36

km/h).

Note that the detecting range may

vary under certain conditions. As

always, use caution and pay close

attention to your surroundings

when backing up your vehicle.

Warning type

If the vehicle detected by the sensors

approaches your vehicle, the warn-

ing chime will sound, the warning

light on the outside rearview mirror

will blink and a message will appear

on the LCD display.

• Type A

■ Left

■ Right

• Type B

• Type A

• Type B

OAE058220/OAE058046

OAE058221/OAE058047

5-45

Driving your vehicle

Information

• The warning chime will turn off

when:

- The detected vehicle moves out of

the sensing area or

- when the vehicle is right behind

your vehicle or

- when the vehicle is not approach-

ing your vehicle or

- when the other vehicle slows down.

• The system may not operate proper-

ly due to other factors or circum-

stances. Always pay attention to

your surroundings.

• If the sensing area near the rear

bumper is blocked by either a wall

or barrier or by a parked vehicle,

the system sensing area may be

reduced.

(Continued)

• The Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) System and

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW) are not a

substitute for proper and safe

driving practices. Always

drive safely and use caution

when changing lanes or back-

ing up your vehicle.The Blind-

Spot Collision Warning (BCW)

System may not detect every

object alongside the vehicle.

• With the system activated, the

warning light on the outside

rearview mirror will illuminate

whenever a vehicle is detect-

ed at the rear side by the sys-

tem.

To avoid accidents, do not

focus only on the warning

light and neglect to see the

surrounding of the vehicle.

• Drive safely even though the

vehicle is equipped with a

Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) System and Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW). Do not sole-

ly rely on the system but

check your surrounding

before changing lanes or

backing the vehicle up.

The system may not alert the

driver in some conditions so

always check your surround-

ings whilst driving.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-46

Driving your vehicle

• The system may not work prop-

erly when the bumper has been

damaged, or if the rear bumper

has been replaced or repaired.

• The sensing range differs some-

what according to the width of

the road. When the road is nar-

row, the system may detect

other vehicles in the next lane

Or when the road is wide, the

system may not detect other

vehicles in the next lane.

• The system may turn off due to

strong electromagnetic waves.

Detecting sensor

The sensors are located inside the

rear bumper.

Always keep the rear bumper clean

for proper operation of the system.

Warning message

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision

Warning) system disabled. Radar

blocked

This warning message may appear

when :

- One or both of the sensors on the

rear bumper is blocked by dirt or

snow or a foreign object.

- Driving in rural areas where the

BCW sensor does not detect

another vehicle for an extended

period of time.

- When there is inclement weather

such as heavy snow or rain.

- A trailer or carrier is installed. (To

use the BCW system, remove the

trailer or carrier from your vehicle.)

NOTICE

OAE056065

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAEPH058215N/OAE058241L

5-47

Driving your vehicle

If any of these conditions occur, the

light on the BCW switch and the sys-

tem will turn off automatically.

When the BCW cancelled warning

message is displayed in the cluster,

check to make sure that the rear

bumper is free from any dirt or snow

in the areas where the sensor is

located. Remove any dirt, snow, or

foreign material that could interfere

with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed,

the BCW system should operate nor-

mally after about 10 minutes of driv-

ing the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate

normally we recomend that you have

your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Information

Turn off the system by pressing the

BCW switch and deselecting Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision warning

(RCCW) from the User Settings mode

on the cluster, when using a trailer or

carrier behind your vehicle.

Check BCW (Blind-spot Collision

Warning) system

If there is a problem with the BCW

system, a warning message will

appear and the light on the switch

will turn off. The system will turn off

automatically. We recommend that

you have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the

below situations, because the sys-

tem may not detect other vehicles or

objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is

installed.

• The vehicle drives in inclement

weather such as heavy rain or

snow.

• The sensor is polluted with rain,

snow, mud, etc.

• The rear bumper where the sensor

is located is covered with a foreign

object such as a bumper sticker, a

bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.

• The rear bumper is damaged, or

the sensor is out of the original

default position.

• The vehicle height gets lower or

higher due to heavy loading in the

luggage compartment, abnormal

tyre pressure, etc.

• When the temperature near the

rear bumper area is high or low.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAEPH058222N/OAE058242L

5-48

Driving your vehicle

• When the sensors are blocked by

other vehicles, walls or parking-lot

pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved

road or through a tollgate.

• The vehicle is driven near areas

containing metal substances such

as a construction zone, railroad,

etc.

• There is a fixed object near the

vehicle, such as a guardrail, per-

son, animal, etc.

• Whilst going down or up a steep

road where the height of the lane is

different.

• When driving through a narrow

road with many trees or bushes.

• When driving on wet surfaces.

• When driving through a large area

with few vehicles or structures

around, such as a desert, rural

area, etc.

• A big vehicle is near such as a bus

or truck.

• When other vehicles are close to

your vehicle.

• When the other vehicle approach-

es very close.

• When the detected vehicle also

moves back, as your vehicle drives

back.

• Whilst changing lanes.

• The vehicle is turning left or right at

a crossroad.

• If the vehicle has started at the

same time as the vehicle next to

you and has accelerated.

• When the other vehicle passes at a

very fast speed.

• When the vehicle in the next lane

moves two lanes away from you

OR when the vehicle two lanes

away moves to the next lane to

you.

• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.

• A flat trailer is near.

• If there are small objects in the

detecting area such as a shopping

cart or a baby stroller.

• If there is a low height vehicle such

as a sports car.

Non-operating condition

The BCW indicator on the outer

side view mirror may not illumi-

nate properly when:

• The outside rearview mirror hous-

ing is damaged.

• The mirror is covered with dirt,

snow, or debris.

• The window is covered with dirt,

snow, or debris.

• The window is tinted.

5-49

Driving your vehicle

The Forward Collision-avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

help detect and monitor the vehicle

ahead or detect a pedestrian (if

equipped) in the roadway through

radar signals and camera recogni-

tion to warn the driver that a collision

is imminent, and if necessary, apply

emergency braking.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the FCA by

placing the ignition switch to the

ON position and by selecting:

'User Settings → Driver assistance

→ FCA (Forward Collision

Avoidance Assist)'

The FCA deactivates, when the

driver cancels the system setting.

FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN--AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE AASSSSIISSTT ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Take the following precautions

when using the Forward

Collision-avoidance Assist

(FCA) system):

• This system is only a supple-

mental system and it is not

intended to, nor does it

replace the need for extreme

care and attention of the driv-

er. The sensing range and

objects detectable by the sen-

sors are limited. Pay attention

to the road conditions at all

times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accor-

dance with the road condi-

tions or whilst cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to

prevent unexpected and sud-

den situations from occur-

ring. FCA does not stop the

vehicle completely and is not

a collision avoidance system.

WARNING

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAEPH058270N/OAE058243L

5-50

Driving your vehicle

The warning light illumi-

nates on the LCD display,

when you cancel the FCA

system. The driver can

monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on

the LCD display. Also, the warning

light illuminates when the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) is

turned off. If the warning light

remains ON when the FCA is acti-

vated, we recommend you to have

the system checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time on the LCD dis-

play.

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance → FCW (Forward

Collision Warning →

Early/Normal/Late'.

The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning includes the fol-

lowing:

- Early:

When this condition is selected,

the initial Forward Collision

Warning is activated earlier than

normal. This setting maximises the

amount of distance between the

vehicle or pedestrian ahead before

the initial warning occurs.

Even though, 'Early' is selected if

the front vehicle suddenly stops

the initial warning activation time

may not seem fast.

- Normal:

When this condition is selected,

the initial Forward Collision

Warning is activated normally.This

setting allows for a nominal

amount of distance between the

vehicle or pedestrian ahead before

the initial warning occurs.

- Late:

When this condition is selected,

the initial Forward Collision

Warning is activated later than nor-

mal. This setting reduces the

amount of distance between the

vehicle or pedestrian ahead before

the initial warning occurs.

Select 'Late' when traffic is light

and when driving speed is slow.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAEPH058271N/OAE058023L

5-51

Driving your vehicle

Prerequisite for activation

The FCA gets ready to be activated,

when the FCA is selected on the

LCD display, and when the following

prerequisites are satisfied.

- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is on.

- Vehicle speed is over 6 mph (10

km/h). (The FCA is only activated

within a certain speed range.)

- The system detects a pedestrian or

a vehicle in front, which may collide

with your vehicle. (The FCA may

not be activated or may sound a

warning alarm in accordance with

the driving situation or vehicle con-

dition.)

FCA warning message and

system control

The FCA produces warning mes-

sages and warning alarms in accor-

dance with the collision risk levels,

such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-

cle in front, insufficient braking dis-

tance, or pedestrian detection. Also,

it controls the brakes in accordance

with the collision risk levels.

• Completely stop the vehicle

on a safe location before

operating the switch on the

steering wheel to activate

/deactivate the FCA system.

• The FCA automatically acti-

vates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.The driv-

er can deactivate the FCA by

canceling the system setting

on the LCD display.

• If you cancel the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control)

when the FCA system is

turned on the FCA automati-

cally deactivates and the FCA

warning light illuminates.

When the ESC is cancelled

the FCA cannot be activated

on the LCD display.

WARNING

5-52

Driving your vehicle

The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time in the User

Settings in the LCD display. The

options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning include Early,

Normal or Late initial warning time.

Collision Warning (1

warning)

- Yellow

This initial warning message appears

on the LCD display with a warning

chime.

Collision Warning (2nd warning)

- Red

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime. Additionally, some vehicle

system intervention occurs by the

engine management system to help

decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may deceler-

ate moderately.

- The FCA system limitedly con-

trols the brakes to preemptively

mitigate impact in a collision.

Emergency braking

warning)

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system

intervention occurs by the engine

management system to help decel-

erate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly con-

trols the brakes to preemptively

mitigate impact in a collision.The

brake control is maximised just

before a collision.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058263R/OAEE058244E

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058263R/OAEE058244E

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058264R/OAE058030E

5-53

Driving your vehicle

Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking

system enters into the ready status

for prompt reaction against the dri-

ver's depressing the brake pedal.

• The FCA provides additional brak-

ing power for optimum braking per-

formance, when the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatical-

ly deactivated, when the driver

sharply depresses the accelerator

pedal, or when the driver abruptly

operates the steering wheel.

• The FCA brake control is automat-

ically cancelled, when risk factors

disappear.

The driver should always use

extreme caution whilst operat-

ing the vehicle, whether or not

there is a warning message or

alarm from the FCA system.

CAUTION

The braking control cannot

completely stop the vehicle nor

avoid all collisions. The driver

should hold the responsibility

to safely drive and control the

vehicle.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates

within certain parameters, such

as the distance from the vehicle

or pedestrian ahead, the speed

of the vehicle ahead, and the

driver's vehicle speed. Certain

conditions such as inclement

weather and road conditions

may affect the operation of the

FCA system.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive danger-

ously to activate the system.

WARNING

5-54

Driving your vehicle

FCA sensor

In order for the FCA system to oper-

ate properly, always make sure the

sensor cover or sensor is clean and

free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt,

snow, or foreign substances on the

sensor cover or sensor may adverse-

ly affect the sensing performance of

the sensor.

• Do not apply license plate frame

or foreign objects such as a

bumper sticker or a bumper

guard near the radar sensor.

Doing so may adversely affect

the sensing performance of the

radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor

and cover clean and free of dirt

and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the

vehicle. Do not spray pressur-

ized water directly on the sensor

or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unneces-

sary force on the radar sensor or

sensor cover. If the sensor is

forcibly moved out of proper

alignment, the FCA system may

not operate correctly. In this

case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

(Continued)

• If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around the

radar sensor, the FCA system

may not operate properly. We

recommend you to have the

vehicle inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Use only genuine parts to repair

or replace a damaged sensor or

sensor cover. Do not apply paint

to the sensor cover.

NOTICE

OAE056028

5-55

Driving your vehicle

• NEVER install any accessories

or stickers on the front wind-

screen, nor tint the front wind-

screen.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble

the camera assembly, nor apply

any impact on the camera

assembly.

• Playing the vehicle audio sys-

tem at high volume may offset

the system warning sounds.

Information

We recommend you have the system

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer when:

• The windscreen glass is replaced.

• The front bumper is replaced.

• The radar sensor or cover gets dam-

aged or replaced.

Warning message and warning

light

FCA disabled (Forward Collision

Avoidance Assist). Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked

with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA

system operation may stop tem-

porarily. If this occurs, a warning

message will appear on the LCD dis-

play.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and

clean the radar sensor cover before

operating the FCA system.

The FCA may not properly operate in

an area (e.g. open terrain), where

any substances are not detected

after turning ON the engine.

System malfunction

Check FCA (Forward Collision

Avoidance Asst.)

• When the FCA is not working prop-

erly, the FCA warning light ( )

will illuminate and the warning

message will appear for a few sec-

onds. After the message disap-

pears, the master warning light

( ) will illuminate.In this case, we

recommend you to have the vehicle

inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• The FCA warning message may

appear along with the illumination

of the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) warning light.

NOTICE

OAEPH058265N

OAEPH058216N

5-56

Driving your vehicle

(Continued)

• The brake control may be

insufficient, possibly causing

a collision, if a vehicle in front

abruptly stops. Always pay

extreme caution.

• Occupants may get injured, if

the vehicle abruptly stops by

the activated FCA system.Pay

extreme caution.

• The FCA is only a supplemen-

tal system for the driver's con-

venience. The driver should

hold the responsibility to con-

trol the vehicle operation. Do

not solely depend on the FCA

system. Rather, maintain a

safe braking distance, and, if

necessary, depress the brake

pedal to reduce the driving

speed.

• In certain instances and

under certain driving condi-

tions, the FCA system may

unintentonally activate. This

initial warning message

appears on the LCD display

with a warning chime.

Also, in certain instances the

front radar sensor or camera

recognition system may not

detect the vehicle or pedestri-

an ahead. The FCA system

may not activate and the

warning message will not be

displayed.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• If there is a malfunction with the

FCA system, the Forward

Collision-avoidance Assist is

not applied even though the

braking system is operating

normally.

• If the vehicle in front stops

suddenly, you may have less

control of the brake system.

Therefore, always keep a safe

distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front of you.

• The FCA system may activate

during braking and the vehi-

cle may stop suddenly shift-

ing loose objects toward the

passengers. Always keep

loose objects secured.

• The FCA system may not acti-

vate if the driver applies the

brake pedal to avoid a colli-

sion.

(Continued)

5-57

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the system

The Forward Collision-avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

monitor the vehicle ahead or a pedes-

trian in the roadway through radar sig-

nals and camera recognition to warn

the driver that a collision is imminent,

and if necessary, apply emergency

braking.

In certain situations, the radar sen-

sor or the camera may not be able to

detect the vehicle or pedestrian

ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-

tem may not operate normally. The

driver must pay careful attention in

the following situations where the

FCA operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or

debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the radar sensor or camera

• There is interference by electro-

magnetic waves

• There is severe irregular reflection

from the radar sensor

• The radar/camera sensor recogni-

tion is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to

be detected (for example a motor-

cycle or a bicycle, etc.)

• The vehicle in front is an oversize

vehicle or trailer that is too big to

be detected by the camera recog-

nition system (for example a tractor

trailer, etc.)

• The driver's field of view is not well

illuminated (either too dark or too

much reflection or too much back-

light that obscures the field of view)

• The vehicle in front does not have

their rear lights properly turned ON

• The outside brightness changes

suddenly, for example when enter-

ing or exiting a tunnel

• Light coming from a street light or

an oncoming vehicle is reflected on

a wet road surface such as a pud-

dle in the road

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The FCA system operates only

to detect vehicles or pedestri-

ans in front of the vehicle.

• The FCA system does not

operate when the vehicle is in

reverse.

• The FCA system is not

designed to detect other

objects on the road such as

animals.

• The FCA system does not

detect vehicles in the opposite

lane.

• The FCA system does not

detect cross traffic vehicles

that are approaching.

• The FCA system cannot detect

the driver approaching the side

view of a parked vehicle (for

example on a dead end street.)

In these cases, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance,

and if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce the driv-

ing speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

WARNING

5-58

Driving your vehicle

• The windscreen glass is fogged up;

a clear view of the road is obstruct-

• The vehicle in front is driving errat-

ically

• The vehicle is on unpaved or

uneven rough surfaces, or roads

with sudden gradient changes

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations whilst

driving

• The vehicle is moving under

ground level or inside a building

• The vehicle is driven near areas

containing metal substances such

as a construction zone, railroad,

etc.

• The vehicle in front is moving verti-

cally to the driving direction

• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-

tically

• The vehicle in front is driving

towards your vehicle or reversing

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system

may be limited when driving on a

curved road.

In certain instances on a curved

road, the FCA system may activate

prematurely.

Also, in certain instances the front

radar sensor or camera recognition

system may not detect the vehicle

travelling on a curved road.

In these cases, the driver must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

The FCA system may recognise a

vehicle in the next lane when driving

on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnec-

essarily alarm the driver and apply

the brake.

Always pay attention to road and

driving conditions, whilst driving. If

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the

accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-

tem from unnecessarily decelerating

your vehicle.

Check the surrounding traffic condi-

tions before use.

OAE056100/H OAE056101/H

5-59

Driving your vehicle

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreas-

es whilst driving upward or downward

on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-

cle in front in the same lane. It may

unnecessarily produce the warning

message and the warning alarm, or it

may not produce the warning mes-

sage and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognises

the vehicle in front whilst passing

over a slope, you may experience

sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward whilst

driving upward or downward on a

slope, and, if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce your driving

speed in order to maintain distance.

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in

front of you, the FCA system may not

immediately detect the vehicle, espe-

cially if the vehicle changes lanes

abruptly. In this case, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a stopped vehicle in front of you

merges out of the lane, the FCA sys-

tem may not immediately detect the

new vehicle that is now in front of

you. In this case, you must maintain

a safe braking distance, and if nec-

essary, depress the brake pedal to

reduce your driving speed in order to

maintain a safe distance.

OAE056102 OAE056103/H OAE056109/H

5-60

Driving your vehicle

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you

If the vehicle in front of you has cargo

that extends rearward from the cab,

or when the vehicle in front of you

has higher ground clearance, addi-

tional special attention is required.

The FCA system may not be able to

detect the cargo extending from the

vehicle. In these instances, you must

maintain a safe braking distance

from the rearmost object, and if nec-

essary, depress the brake pedal to

reduce your driving speed in order to

maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians

(if equipped)

The sensor may be limited when:

• The pedestrian is not fully detected

by the camera recognition system,

for example, if the pedestrian is

leaning over or is not fully walking

upright

• The pedestrian is moving very

quickly or appears abruptly in the

camera detection area

• The pedestrian is wearing clothing

that easily blends into the back-

ground, making it difficult to be

detected by the camera recogni-

tion system

• It is difficult to detect and distin-

guish the pedestrian from other

objects in the surroundings, for

example, when there is a group of

pedestrians or a large crowd

• There is an item similar to a per-

son’s body structure

• The pedestrian is small

• The pedestrian has impaired

mobility

• The sensor recognition is limited

• The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or

debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the radar sensor or camera

• The outside lighting is too bright

(e.g.when driving in bright sunlight

or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.

when driving on a dark rural road

at night)

• When light coming from a street

light or an oncoming vehicle is

reflected on a wet road surface

such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The windscreen glass is fogged

up; a clear view of the road is

obstructed

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations whilst

driving

OAE056105

5-61

Driving your vehicle

Information

In some instances, the FCA system

may be cancelled when subjected to

electromagnetic interference.

• Do not use the Autonomous

Emergency Braking system

when towing a vehicle.

Application of the FCA sys-

tem whilst towing may

adversely affect the safety of

your vehicle or the towing

vehicle.

• Use extreme caution when the

vehicle in front of you has

cargo that extends rearward

from the cab, or when the

vehicle in front of you has

higher ground clearance.

• The FCA system is designed

to detect and monitor the

vehicle ahead or detect a

pedestrian in the roadway

through radar signals and

camera recognition. It is not

designed to detect bicycles,

motorcycles, or smaller

wheeled objects such as lug-

gage bags, shopping carts, or

strollers.

(Continued)

• Never try to test the operation

of the FCA system. Doing so

may cause severe injury or

death.

WARNING

When you replace the wind-

screen glass, bumper or

radar/camera, we recommend

that you take your vehicle to a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the system checked

for calibration.

WARNING

5-62

Driving your vehicle

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-

tem help detect lane markers on the

road with a camera at the front wind-

screen, and assists the driver's

steering to help keep the vehicle

between lanes.

When the system detects the vehicle

straying from its lane, it alerts the

driver with a visual and audiouble

warning, whilst applying a slight

counter-steering torque, trying to

prevent the vehicle from moving out

of its lane.

LLAANNEE KKEEEEPPIINNGG AASSSSIISSTT ((LLKKAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAE056048

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system is not a substitute for

safe driving practices, but a

convenience function only. It is

the responsibility of the driver

to always be aware of the sur-

rounding and steer the vehicle.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system:

• Do not steer the steering

wheel suddenly when the

steering wheel is being assist-

ed by the system.

• LKA system helps to prevent

the driver from moving out of

the lane unintentionally by

assisting the driver's steering.

However, the driver should

not solely rely on the system

but always pay attention on

the steering wheel to stay in

the lane.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• The operation of the LKA sys-

tem can be cancelled or not

work properly according to

road condition and surround-

ings. Always be cautious

when driving.

• Do not disassemble the LKA

system camera temporarily to

tint the window or attach any

types of coatings and acces-

sories. If you disassemble the

camera and assemble it again,

we recommend that you take

your vehicle to a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer and have

the system checked for cali-

bration.

• When you replace the wind-

screen glass, LKA system

camera or related parts of the

steering wheel, we recom-

mend that you take your vehi-

cle to a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and have the system

checked for calibration.

(Continued)

5-63

Driving your vehicle

LKA operation

To activate/deactivate the LKA sys-

tem:

With the ignition switch in the ON

position, press the LKA system but-

ton located on the instrument panel

on the left hand side of the steering

wheel.

■ Type A

OAE056049R

■ Type B

OAE056050R

(Continued)

• The system detects lane

markers and controls the

steering wheel by a camera,

therefore, if the lane markers

are hard to detect, the system

may not work properly.

Please refer to "Limitations of

the system".

• Do not remove or damage the

related parts of LKA system.

• You may not hear a warning

sound of LKA system because

of excessive audio sound.

• Do not place objects on the

dashboard that reflects light

such as mirrors, white paper,

etc.The system may malfunc-

tion if the sunlight is reflected.

• Always have your hands on the

steering wheel whilst the LKA

system is activated. If you con-

tinue to drive with your hands

off the steering wheel after the

"Keep hands on steering

wheel" warning message

appears, the system will stop

controlling the steering wheel.

(Continued)

• The steering wheel is not con-

tinuously controlled so if the

vehicle speed is at a higher

rate when leaving a lane the

vehicle may not be controlled

by the system. The driver

must always follow the speed

limit when using the system.

• If you attach objects to the

steering wheel, the system

may not assist steering or the

hands off alarm may not work

properly.

• When you tow a trailer, make

sure that you turn off the LKA

system.

• Whilst other beeps such as

the seat belt warning sound

are in operation and override

the LKA alarming system,

LKA beeps may not occur.

5-64

Driving your vehicle

The indicator in the cluster display

will initially illuminate white.This indi-

cates the LKA system is in the

READY but NOT ENABLED state.

Information

If the indicator (white) is activated

from the previous ignition cycle, the

system will turn ON without any addi-

tional control. If you press the LKA

button again, the indicator on the

cluster goes off.

The colour of indicator

will change depending on

the condition of LKA sys-

tem.

- White : Sensor does not detect

lane markers or vehicle

speed is under 37 mph (60

km/h).

- Green : Sensor detects lane mark-

ers and the system is able

to control vehicle steering.

LKA system activation

• To see the LKA screen on the LCD

display in the cluster, select

ASSIST mode ( ). For more

information, refer to "LCD Display

Modes" in chapter 3.

• When both lane markers are

detected and all the conditions to

activate the LKA system are satis-

fied, a green steering wheel indica-

tor will illuminate and the LKA sys-

tem indicator light will change from

white to green. This indicates that

the LKA system is in the

ENABLED state and the steering

wheel will be able to be controlled.

OAE058122R

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system is a system to prevent

the driver from leaving the lane.

However, the driver should not

solely rely on the system but

always check the road condi-

tions when driving.

WARNING

5-65

Driving your vehicle

• If vehicle speed is over 37 mph (60

km/h) and the system detects lane

markers, the colour changes from

gray to white.

• If the system detects the left lane

marker, the left lane marker colour

will change from gray to white.

• If the system detects the right lane

marker, the right lane marker

colour will change from gray to

white.

• Both lane markers must be detect-

ed for the system to fully activate.

• If your vehicle speed exceeds 37

mph (60 km/h) and the LKA system

button is ON, the system is enabled.

If your vehicle departs from the pro-

jected lane in front of you, the LKA

system operates as follows:

A visual warning appears on the

cluster LCD display. Either the left

lane marker or the right lane marker

in the cluster LCD display will blink

depending on which direction the

vehicle is veering.

If the steering wheel appears, the

system will control the vehicle’s

steering to prevent the vehicle from

crossing the lane marker.

Keep hands on steering wheel

If the driver takes their hands off the

steering wheel for several seconds

whilst the LKA system is activated,

the system will warn the driver.

Information

If the steering wheel is held very light-

ly the message may still appear

because the LKA system may not

recognise that the driver has their

hands on the wheel.

■ Left lane marker ■ Right lane marker

OAE058127R/OAE058128R

■ Line undetected ■ Line detected

OAE058123R/OAE058124R OAEE056129L

5-66

Driving your vehicle

Driver's hands not detected. LKA

system is Disabled temporarily

If the driver still does not have their

hands on the steering wheel after the

message "Keep hands on steering

wheel", the system will not control

the steering wheel and warn the driv-

er only when the driver crosses the

lane markers.

However, if the driver has their hands

on the steering wheel again, the sys-

tem will start controlling the steering

wheel.

Information

• Even though the steering is assisted

by the system, the driver can still

steer to control the steering wheel.

• The steering wheel may feel heavier

when the steering wheel is assisted

by the system than when it is not.

• The driver is responsible for

accurate steering.

• Turn off the system and drive

the vehicle in below situa-

tions.

- In bad weather

- In bad road condition

- When the steering wheel

needs to be controlled by the

driver frequently.

WARNING

OAEPH058224N

The warning message may

appear late according to road

conditions. Therefore, always

have your hands on the steering

wheel whilst driving.

WARNING

5-67

Driving your vehicle

Warning light and message

Check LKA (Lane Keep Assist)

system

If there is a problem with the system

a message will appear for a few sec-

onds. If the problem continues the

LKA system failure indicator will illu-

minate.

LKA system failure indicator

The LKA system failure

indicator (yellow) will illu-

minate if the LKA system

is not working properly.

We recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

When there is a problem with the

system do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turning

the vehicle off and on again.

• Check if the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check if the system is affected by

the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,

etc.)

• Check if there is foreign matter on

the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we rec-

ommend that the system be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The LKA system will not be in the

ENABLED state and the steering

wheel will not be assisted when:

• Vehicle speed is below 37 mph (60

km/h) and over 112 mph (180

km/h).

• Only one lane marker is detected.

• The turn signal is turned on before

changing a lane. If you change

lanes without the turn signal on,

the steering wheel might be con-

trolled.

• The hazard warning flasher is on.

• The width of the lane is below 2.6m

(8.5 feet) or over 4.5m (15 feet).

• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or

VSM (Vehicle Stability Management)

is activated.

• The vehicle is driven on a sharp

curve.

• The vehicle brakes suddenly.

• The vehicle makes sharp lane

changes.

• There are more than two lane

markers on the road.(e.g.construc-

tion area)

OAEPH058225N

5-68

Driving your vehicle

• The vehicle is driven on a steep

incline.

• The steering wheel is turned sud-

denly.

Limitations of the System

The LKA system may operate pre-

maturely even if the vehicle does not

depart from the intended lane, OR,

the LKA system may not assist your

steering or warn you if the vehicle

leaves the intended lane under the

following circumstances:

When the lane and road condi-

tions are poor

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane

marking from the road surface or

the lane marking is faded or not

clearly marked.

• It is difficult to distinguish the

colour of the lane marker from the

road.

• There are markings on the road

surface that look like a lane marker

that is inadvertently being detected

by the camera.

• The lane marker is merged or

divided. (e.g. tollgate)

• The lane number increases or

decreases or the lane marker are

crossing complicatedly.

• There are more than two lane

markers on the road in front of you.

• The lane marker is very thick or

thin.

• The lanes ahead are not visible

due to rain, snow, water on the

road, damaged or stained road

surface, or other factors.

• The shadow is on the lane marker

by a median strip, trees, etc.

• The lanes are incomplete or the

area is in a construction zone.

• There are crosswalk signs or other

symbols on the road.

• The lane marker in a tunnel is

stained with oil, etc.

• The lane suddenly disappears

such as at the intersection.

When external condition is inter-

vened

• The brightness outside changes

suddenly such as when entering or

exiting a tunnel, or when passing

under a bridge.

• The brightness outside is too low

such as when the headlamps are

not on at night or the vehicle is

going through a tunnel.

• There is a boundary structure in

the roadway such as a concrete

barrier, guardrail and reflector post

that is inadvertently being detected

by the camera.

• When light coming from a street

light or an oncoming vehicle is

reflected on a wet road surface

such as a puddle in the road.

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare.

• There is not enough distance

between you and the vehicle in

front to be able to detect the lane

marker or the vehicle ahead is driv-

ing on the lane marker.

5-69

Driving your vehicle

• Driving on a steep grade, over a

hill, or when driving on a curved

road.

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations whilst

driving.

• The surrounding of the inside rear

view mirror temperature is high

due to direct sunlight, etc.

When front visibility is poor

• The windscreen or the LKA cam-

era lens is blocked with dirt or

debris.

• The windscreen glass is fogged

up; a clear view of the road is

obstructed.

• Placing objects on the dashboard,

etc.

• The sensor cannot detect the lane

because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

LKA system function change

The driver can change LKA to Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) or change

the LKA mode between Standard

LKA and Active LKA from the LCD

display. Go to the 'User Settings →

Driver assistance → Lane safety →

Lane LDW (Lane Departure

Warning)/Standard LKA (Lane Keep

Assist)/Active LKA (Lane Keep

Assist)'.

The system is automatically set to

Standard LKA if a function is not

selected.

LDW (Lane Departure Warning)

LDW alerts the driver with a visual

warning and a warning alarm when

the system detects the vehicle

departing the lane. The steering

wheel will not be controlled.

Standard LKA

(Lane Keep Assist)

The Standard LKA mode guides the

driver to help keep the vehicle within

the lanes. It rarely controls the steer-

ing wheel, when the vehicle drives

well inside the lanes. However, it

starts to control the steering wheel,

when the vehicle is about to deviate

out of the lanes.

Active LKA (Lane Keep Assist)

The Active LKA mode provides more

frequent steering wheel control in

comparison with the Standard LKA

mode.Active LKA can reduce the dri-

ver’s fatigue to assist the steering for

maintaining the vehicle in the middle

of the lane.

5-70

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system displays the condition of the

driver's fatigue level and inattentive

driving practices.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is set to be in the

OFF position, when your vehicle is

first delivered to you from the fac-

tory.

• To turn ON the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system, turn on

the engine, and then select "User

Settings → Driver assistance →

DAW (Driver Attention Warning) →

High sensitivity/Normal sensitivity"

on the LCD display.

• The driver can select the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system

mode.

- High sensitivity : The Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system

alerts the driver of his/her fatigue

level or inattentive driving prac-

tices faster than Normal mode.

- Normal sensitivity : The Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system

alerts the driver of his/her fatigue

level or inattentive driving prac-

tices.

- Off :The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is deactivated.

• The set-up of the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system will be

maintained, as selected, when the

engine is re-started.

Display of the driver's attention

level

DDRRIIVVEERR AATTTTEENNTTIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((DDAAWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Driving your vehicle

OAEPH058569N

■ System off

OOS057091R

■ Attentive driving

5-71

Driving your vehicle

• The driver can monitor their driving

conditions on the LCD display.

The DAW screen will appear when

you select the ASSIST mode tab

( ) on the LCD display if the sys-

tem is activated. (For more

details, refer to "LCD Display

Modes" in chapter 3.)

• The driver's attention level is dis-

played on the scale of 1 to 5. The

lower the level is, the more inatten-

tive the driver is.

• The level decreases when the driv-

er does not take a break for a cer-

tain period of time.

• The level increases when the driv-

er attentively drives for a certain

period of time.

• When the driver turns on the sys-

tem whilst driving, it displays ‘Last

Break time’ and level.

Take a break

• The "Consider taking a break"

message appears on the LCD dis-

play and a warning sounds in order

to suggest the driver to take a

break, when the driver’s attention

level is below 1.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system does not suggest

the driver to take a break, when the

total driving time is shorter than 10

minutes.

OPDE056063

OOS057089AU

5-72

Resetting the system

• The last break time is set to 00:00

and the driver's attention level is

set to 5 (very attentive) when the

driver resets the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system resets the last

break time to 00:00 and the driver's

attention level to 5 in the following

situations.

- The engine is turned OFF.

- The driver unfastens the seat belt

and then opens the driver's door.

- The vehicle is stopped for more

than 10 minutes.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system operates again,

when the driver restarts driving.

System standby

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system enters the ready status and

displays the 'Disabled' screen in the

following situations.

- The camera does not detect the

lane.

- Driving speed remains under 37

mph (60 km/h) or over 112 mph

(180 km/h).

Driving your vehicle

Whilst other beeps such as the

seat belt warning sound are in

operation and override the DAW

alarming system, DAW beeps

may not occur.

CAUTION

OAEPH058166N

5-73

Driving your vehicle

System malfunction

Check DAW (Driver Attention

Warning) system

When the "Check DAW (Driver

Attention Warning) system" warning

message appears, the system is not

working properly. In this case, we rec-

ommend that you have the vehicle

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system utilises the camera

sensor on the front windscreen for

its operation. To keep the camera

sensor in the best condition, you

should observe the followings:

• NEVER install any accessories

or stickers on the front wind-

screen, nor tint the front wind-

screen.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera sensor out of water.

• NEVER disassemble the camera

assembly, nor apply any impact

on the camera assembly.

(Continued)

NOTICE

OAEPH058237N

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is not a substi-

tute for safe driving practices,

but a convenience function

only. It is the responsibility of

the driver to always drive cau-

tiously to prevent unexpected

and sudden situations from

occurring. Pay attention to the

road conditions at all times.

• The system may suggest a

break according to the dri-

ver's driving pattern or habits

even if the driver doesn't feel

fatigue.

• The driver, who feels fatigued,

should take a break, even

though there is no break sug-

gestion by the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) sys-

tem.

WARNING

5-74

(Continued)

• Do not disassemble the camera

temporarily for tinted window or

attaching any types of coatings

and accessories.

If you disassemble a camera and

assemble it again, we recom-

mend that you take your vehicle

to a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er and have the system checked

for calibration.

Driving your vehicle

The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system may not properly

operate with limited alerting in

the following situations:

• The lane detection perform-

ance is limited. (For more

information, refer to "Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system"

in this chapter.)

(Continued)

CAUTION

(Continued)

• The vehicle is violently driven

or is abruptly turned for

obstacle avoidance (e.g. con-

struction area, other vehicles,

fallen objects, bumpy road).

• Forward drivability of the

vehicle is severely under-

mined (possibly due to wide

variation in tyre pressures,

uneven tyre wear-out, toe-

in/toe-out alignment).

• The vehicle drives on a curvy

road.

• The vehicle drives through a

windy area.

• The vehicle drives on a

bumpy road.

• The vehicle is controlled by

the following driving assist

systems:

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system

- Forward Collision-avoidance

Assist (FCA) system

- Smart Cruise Control (SCC)

system

Playing the vehicle audio sys-

tem at high volume may offset

the Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system warning sounds.

CAUTION

5-75

Driving your vehicle

Speed Limit Control operation

You can set the speed limit when you

do not want to drive over a specific

speed.

If you drive over the preset speed

limit, the warning system operates

(set speed limit will blink and chime

will sound) until the vehicle speed

returns within the speed limit.

Information

Whilst speed limit control is in opera-

tion, the cruise control system cannot

be activated.

Speed limit control switch

: Changes mode between cruise

control/smart cruise control

system and speed limit control

system.

RES+: Resumes or increases speed

limit control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit

control speed.

O: Cancels set speed limit.

To set speed limit

1. Press the button to turn the

system on.The speed limit indica-

tor in the instrument cluster will

illuminate.

SSPPEEEEDD LLIIMMIITT CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE056152L OAE056068L

System off

Speed Limit Control

Cruise Control/Smart

Cruise Control

5-76

Driving your vehicle

2. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-).

3. • Push the toggle switch up

(RES+) or down (SET-), and

release it at the desired speed.

• Push the toggle switch up

(RES+) or down (SET-) and hold

it. The speed will increase or

decrease by 3 mph (5 km/h).

The set speed limit will display on the

instrument cluster.

If you would like to drive over the pre-

set speed limit when you depress the

accelerator pedal less than approxi-

mately 50%, the vehicle speed will

maintain within speed limit.

However if you depress the acceler-

ator pedal more than approximately

70%, you can drive over the speed

limit. Then the set speed limit will

blink and chime will sound until you

return the vehicle speed within the

speed limit.

To turn off the speed limit con-

trol, do one of the following:

• Press the button.

• If you press O (cancel) button

once, the set speed limit will can-

cel, but it will not turn the system

off.If you wish to resume the speed

limit, push the +RES or SET- tog-

gle switch on your steering wheel

to your desired speed.

OAE056069L

OAE056068L

5-77

Driving your vehicle

Cruise Control operation

1. Cruise indicator

2. SET indicator

The Cruise Control system allows you

to drive at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h) without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Take the following precautions:

• Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit in your

country.

• If the Cruise Control is left on,

(cruise) indicator light in the

instrument cluster is illumi-

nated) the Cruise Control can

be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Cruise Control sys-

tem off (cruise) indicator light

OFF) when the Cruise Control

is not in use, to avoid inadver-

tently setting a speed.

• Use the Cruise Control system

only when travelling on open

highways in good weather.

(Continued)

• Do not use the Cruise Control

when it may be unsafe to keep

the vehicle at a constant

speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions

make it difficult to drive at a

constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or

snow-covered roads

- When driving on hilly or

windy roads

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad

weather such as fog, snow,

rain and sandstorm)

• Do not use cruise control

when towing a trailer.

WARNING

OAE056194R

5-78

Driving your vehicle

Information

• During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activat-

ed or reactivated after applying the

brakes, the cruise control will ener-

gize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control

function, the system will check to

verify that the brake switch is oper-

ating normally. Depress the brake

pedal at least once after turning ON

the ignition or starting the vehicle.

Cruise control switch

CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control

operation.

CRUISE / :Turns cruise control

system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise

control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-

trol speed.

Information

First, switch the mode to Cruise

Control by pressing the button if

equipped with the Speed Limit

Control System.

The mode changes, as below, whenev-

er the button is pressed.

OAE056068L

OAE056153L

■ Type A

■ Type B

System off Cruise Control

Speed Limit Control

5-79

Driving your vehicle

To set Cruise Control speed

1. Press the CRUISE / button on

the steering wheel to turn the sys-

tem on. The cruise indicator will

illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,

which must be more than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

3. Push the toggle switch (1) down

(SET-), and release it. The SET

indicator light will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may

slightly slow down or speed up, whilst

driving uphill or downhill.

To increase Cruise Control

speed

• Push the toggle switch (1) up

(RES+) and hold it, whilst monitor-

ing the SET speed on the instru-

ment cluster.

Release the toggle switch when

the desired speed is shown and

the vehicle will accelerate to that

speed.

• Push the toggle switch (1) up

(RES+) and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will increase

1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) each time the

toggle switch is operated in this

manner.

OAE056154L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE056155L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE056156L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5-80

Driving your vehicle

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the

desired speed, push the toggle

switch (1) down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control

speed

• Push the toggle switch (1) down

(SET-) and hold it.Your vehicle will

gradually slow down. Release the

toggle switch at the speed you

want to maintain.

• Push the toggle switch (1) down

(SET-) and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will decrease

1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) each time the

toggle switch is operated in this

manner.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired

speed, push the toggle switch (1)

down (SET-).

To temporarily accelerate with

the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal.When

you take your foot off the accelerator,

the vehicle will return to the previ-

ously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at the increased speed, the

Cruise Control will maintain the

increased speed.

OAE056155L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5-81

Driving your vehicle

Cruise Control will be cancelled

when:

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL / O button

located on the steering wheel.

• Pressing the CRUISE / button.

Both the indicator and the SET

indicator will turn OFF.

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than the memory speed by

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

• Downshifting to 2

gear when in

Manual Shift mode.

Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control operation (the SET

indicator light in the instrument clus-

ter will go off), but only pressing the

CRUISE / button will turn the sys-

tem off. If you wish to resume Cruise

Control operation, push the toggle

switch up (RES+) located on your

steering wheel. You will return to your

previously preset speed, unless the

system was turned off using the

CRUISE / button.

To resume preset Cruising

speed

Push the toggle switch (1) up

(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over

20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will

resume the preset speed.

OAE056157L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE056156L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5-82

Driving your vehicle

To turn Cruise Control off

• Press the CRUISE / button (the

cruise ( ) indicator light

will go off).

• Press the button (The

( ) indicator light will go

off.).

- With the Cruise Control on,

pressing the button once will turn

Off the Cruise Control and turn

on the Speed Limit Control.

- With the Cruise Control off and

Speed Limit Control on, pressing

the button will turn off both sys-

tem.

Information

The mode changes, as below, whenev-

er the button is pressed.

OAE056154L

■ Type A

■ Type B

System off Cruise Control

Speed Limit Control

5-83

Driving your vehicle

➀ Cruise indicator

➁ Set speed

➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

To see the SCC screen on the LCD

display in the cluster, select ASSIST

mode ( ). For more information,

refer to "LCD Display Modes" in

chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control System

allows you to program the vehicle to

maintain constant speed and mini-

mum distance between the vehicle

ahead.

The Smart Cruise Control System

will automatically adjust your vehicle

speed to maintain your programmed

speed and following distance without

requiring you to depress the acceler-

ator or brake pedals.

SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

For your safety, please read the

owner's manual before using the

Smart Cruise Control system.

WARNING

The Smart Cruise Control

System is not a substitute for

safe driving practices, but a

convenience function only. It is

the responsibility of the driver

to always check the speed and

distance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

Take the following precautions :

• Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit in your

country.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE056097N

(Continued)

• If the Smart Cruise Control is

left on, (cruise ( )

indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster is illuminated)

the Smart Cruise Control can

be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Smart Cruise

Control System off (cruise

( ) indicator light

OFF) when the Smart Cruise

Control is not in use, to avoid

inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Smart Cruise Control

System only when travelling

on open highways in good

weather.

• Do not use the Smart Cruise

Control when it may not be

safe to keep the vehicle at a

constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions

make it difficult to drive at a

constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or

snow-covered roads

(Continued)

5-84

Driving your vehicle

Smart cruise control switch

CANCEL / O : Cancels cruise con-

trol operation.

CRUISE / :Turns cruise control

system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise

control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-

trol speed.

: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance.

Information

First, switch the mode to Smart

Cruise Control by pressing the

button if equipped with the Speed

Limit Control System.

The mode changes, as below, whenev-

er the button is pressed.

OAE056169L

OAE056068L

System off Smart Cruise Control

Speed Limit Control

■ Type A

■ Type B

(Continued)

- When driving on a steep

downhill or uphill

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving in parking lots

- When driving near crash

barriers

- When driving on a sharp

curve

- When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad

weather, such as fog, snow,

rain or sandstorm)

- When the vehicle sensing

ability decreases due to

vehicle modification result-

ing level difference of the

vehicle's front and rear

• Do not use smart cruise con-

trol when towing a trailer.

5-85

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control speed

To set Smart Cruise Control

speed

1. Push the button on the steer-

ing wheel to turn the system on.

The cruise ( ) indicator

will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

The Smart Cruise Control speed

can be set as follows:

• 20 ~ 110 mph (30 ~ 180 km/h) :

when there is no vehicle in front

• 5 ~ 110 mph (10 ~ 180 km/h) :

when there is a vehicle in front

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-). The Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the

LCD display will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

The desired speed will automati-

cally be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the

speed may decrease to maintain the

distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may

slow down or speed up slightly whilst

going uphill or downhill.

Information

Vehicle speed may decrease on an

upward slope and increase on a down-

ward slope.

OAE056154L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE056155L

■ Type A

■ Type B

When vehicle speed is under 6

mph (10 km/h), the Smart Cruise

Control is cancelled. The driver

must adjust the vehicle speed

by depressing the accelerator

or brake pedal according to the

road condition ahead and driv-

ing condition.

CAUTION

5-86

Driving your vehicle

To increase Smart Cruise

Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will increase by 1

mph (1 km/h) each time you move

the toggle switch up in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and hold it.Your vehicle set speed

will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Release the toggle switch at the

speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 110 mph

(180 km/h).

To decrease the Smart Cruise

Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-),

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will decrease by 1

mph (1 km/h) each time you move

the toggle switch down in this man-

ner.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-),

and hold it. Your vehicle set speed

will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Release the toggle switch at the

speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 20 mph

(30 km/h).

Check the driving condition

before using the toggle switch.

Driving speed sharply increas-

es, when you push up and hold

the toggle switch.

CAUTION

OAE056156L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE056155L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5-87

Driving your vehicle

To temporarily accelerate with

the Smart Cruise Control on

If you want to speed up temporarily

when the Smart Cruise Control is on,

depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere

with Smart Cruise Control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your

foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-

ing speed will be set again.

Information

Be careful when accelerating tem-

porarily, because the speed is not con-

trolled automatically at this time even

if there is a vehicle in front of you.

Smart Cruise Control will be

temporarily cancelled when:

Cancelled manually

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL/ button

located on the steering wheel.

The Smart Cruise Control turns off

temporarily when the Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator

on the LCD display turns off.

The cruise ( ) indicator is

illuminated continuously.

Cancelled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.

• The shift lever is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).

• The parking brake is applied.

• The vehicle speed is under 5 mph

(10 km/h).

• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph

(190 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), TCS (Traction Control

System) or ABS is operating.

• The ESC is turned off.

• The sensor or the cover is dirty or

blocked with foreign matter.

• The accelerator pedal is continu-

ously depressed for a long period

of time.

• The SCC system has malfunc-

tioned.

• The engine performance is abnor-

mal.

• The FCA is activated.

OAE056157L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5-88

Driving your vehicle

Each of these actions will cancel the

Smart Cruise Control operation. The

Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance on the LCD display will go

off.

In a condition the Smart Cruise

Control is cancelled automatically,

the Smart Cruise Control will not

resume even though the RES+ or

SET- toggle switch is pushed.

Information

If the Smart Cruise Control is can-

celled by other than the reasons men-

tioned, we recommend that the system

be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

SCC (Smart Cruise Cntrl.) can-

celled

If the system is cancelled, the warn-

ing chime will sound and a message

will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by

depressing the accelerator or brake

pedal according to the road condition

ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions.

Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control

set speed

If any method other than the cruise

toggle switch was used to cancel

cruising speed and the system is still

activated, the cruising speed will

automatically resume when you

push the toggle switch up (RES+) or

down (SET-).

If you push the toggle switch up

(RES+), the speed will resume to the

recently set speed. However, if vehi-

cle speed drops between 5 mph to

20 mph (10 km/h to 30 km/h), it will

resume when there is a vehicle in

front of your vehicle.

Information

Always check the road conditions

when you push the toggle switch up

(RES+) to resume speed.

OAE058165L

5-89

Driving your vehicle

To turn Cruise Control off

• Press the CRUISE/ button (the

cruise ( ) indicator light

will go off).

• Press the button (The

( ) indicator light will go

off.). (if equipped with Speed Limit

Control)

- With the Smart Cruise Control

on, pressing the button once will

turn Off the Smart Cruise Control

and turn on the Speed Limit

Control.

- With the Smart Cruise Control off

and Speed Limit Control on,

pressing the button will turn off

both system.

Information

The mode changes, as below, whenev-

er the button is pressed.

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-

to-Vehicle Distance

To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance

When the Smart Cruise Control

System is ON, you can set and main-

tain the distance from the vehicle

ahead of you without pressing the

accelerator or brake pedal.

System off Smart Cruise Control

Speed Limit Control

OAE056154L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE056158L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5-90

Driving your vehicle

Each time the button is pressed, the

vehicle to vehicle distance changes

as follows:

For example, if you drive at 56 mph

(90 km/h), the distance is maintained

as follows:

Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet

(52.5 m)

Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet

(40 m)

Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet

(32.5 m)

Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet

(25 m)

Information

The distance is set to the last set dis-

tance when the system is used for the

first time after starting the engine.

When the lane ahead is clear:

The vehicle speed will maintain the

set speed.

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

Distance 1

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE056178N/OAE056177N

5-91

Driving your vehicle

When using the Smart Cruise

Control System:

• The warning chime sounds

and the Vehicle-to Vehicle

Distance indicator blinks if

the vehicle is unable to main-

tain the selected distance

from the vehicle ahead.

• If the warning chime sounds,

depress the brake pedal or

use the steering wheel toggle

switch to actively adjust the

vehicle speed, and the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE056187N

When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:

• Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected

distance.

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruis-

ing speed after accelerating to the set speed.

■ Type A

Distance 4

Distance 3

OAE056180N/OAE056179N/OAE056182N/OAE056181N

■ Type B

Distance 4

Distance 3

Distance 1

Distance 2

OAE056184N/OAE056183N/OAE056186N/OAE056185N

Distance 1

Distance 2

5-92

Driving your vehicle

Sensor to detect distance to

the vehicle ahead

The Smart Cruise Control uses a

sensor to detect distance to the vehi-

cle ahead.

(Continued)

• Even if the warning chime is

not activated, always pay

attention to the driving condi-

tions to prevent dangerous

situations from occurring.

• Playing the vehicle audio sys-

tem at high volume may offset

the system warning sounds.

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle

speed: less than 20mph

(30km/h)) disappears to the next

lane, the warning chime will

sound and a message "Watch

for surrounding vehicles" will

appear. Adjust your vehicle

speed for vehicles or objects

that can suddenly appear in

front of you by depressing the

brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the road

condition ahead.

CAUTION

OAE056168L

OAE056028

5-93

Driving your vehicle

Warning message

SCC (Smart Cruise Control) dis-

abled. Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is

blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the

Smart Cruise Control System opera-

tion may stop temporarily. If this

occurs, a warning message will

appear on the LCD display. Remove

any dirt, snow, or debris and clean

the radar sensor lens cover before

operating the Smart Cruise Control

System. The Smart Cruise Control

system may not properly activate, if

the radar is totally contaminated, or if

any substance is not detected after

the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode

(e.g. in an open terrain).

Information

For the SCC operation is temporarily

stopped if the radar is blocked, but

you wish to use cruise control mode

(speed control function), you must

convert to the cruise control mode

(refer to "To convert to Cruise

Control mode" in the following page.

OAE058166N

(Continued)

• Be careful not to apply unnec-

essary force on the radar sen-

sor or sensor cover. If the sen-

sor is forcibly moved out of

proper alignment, the Smart

Cruise Control System may

not operate correctly. In this

case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the

vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around

the radar sensor, the Smart

Cruise Control System may

not operate properly. We rec-

ommend you to have the vehi-

cle inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Use only genuine HYUNDAI

parts to repair or replace a

damaged sensor or sensor

cover. Do not apply paint to

the sensor cover.

• Do not apply license plate

frame or foreign objects such

as a bumper sticker or a

bumper guard near the radar

sensor. Doing so may adverse-

ly affect the sensing perform-

ance of the radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor

and lens cover clean and free

of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash

the vehicle.Do not spray pres-

surized water directly on the

sensor or sensor cover.

(Continued)

CAUTION

5-94

Driving your vehicle

Check SCC (Smart Cruise Control)

system

The message will appear when the

vehicle to vehicle distance control

system is not functioning normally.

We recommend that you take your

vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and have the system

checked.

To adjust the sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control

The sensitivity of vehicle speed

when following the front vehicle to

maintain the set distance can be

adjusted.

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance → SCC (Smart Cruise

Control) → Response →

Fast/Normal/Slow on the LCD display

Cluster type B

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

assistance → SCC response →

Fast/Normal/Slow' on the LCD dis-

play.

You may select on of the three

stages you prefer.

- Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is faster than normal speed.

- Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is normal.

- Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is slower than normal speed.

Information

The last selected speed sensitivity of

the smart cruise control is remained in

the system.

To convert to Cruise Control

mode

The driver may choose to only use

the conventional Cruise Control

mode (speed control function) by

doing as follows:

1. Turn the Smart Cruise Control

System on (the cruise indicator

light will be on but the system will

not be activated).

2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance button for more

than 2 seconds.

3. Choose between "Smart Cruise

Control" and "Cruise Control".

When the system is cancelled using

theCRUISE/ button or the

CRUISE/ button is used after the

vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode,

the Smart Cruise Control mode will

turn on.

OAE058167L

5-95

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the system

The Smart Cruise Control System

may have limits to its ability to detect

distance to the vehicle ahead due to

road and traffic conditions.

On curves

• The Smart Cruise Control System

may not detect a moving vehicle in

your lane, and then your vehicle

could accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will

decrease when the vehicle ahead

is recognised suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed

on curves and apply the brakes or

accelerator pedal if necessary.

Your vehicle speed can be reduced

due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

Apply the accelerator pedal and

select the appropriate set speed.

Check to be sure that the road con-

ditions permit safe operation of the

Smart Cruise Control.

OAE056101/H

OAE056100/H

When using the Cruise Control

mode, you must manually

adjust the distance to other

vehicles by depressing the

accelerator or brake pedal. The

system does not automatically

adjust the distance to vehicles

in front of you.

WARNING

5-96

Driving your vehicle

On inclines

• During uphill or downhill driving,

the Smart Cruise Control System

may not detect a moving vehicle in

your lane, and cause your vehicle

to accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly

decrease when the vehicle ahead

is recognised suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed

on inclines and apply the brake or

accelerator pedal if necessary.

Lane changing

• A vehicle which moves into your

lane from an adjacent lane cannot

be recognised by the sensor until it

is in the sensor's detection range.

• The radar may not detect immedi-

ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-

denly. Always pay attention to the

traffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a slower vehicle moves into your

lane, your speed may decrease to

maintain the distance to the vehicle

ahead.

• If a faster vehicle which moves into

your lane, your vehicle will acceler-

ate to the set speed.

Vehicle recognition

Some vehicles in your lane cannot

be recognised by the sensor:

- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-

cles or bicycles

- Vehicles offset to one side

- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-

decelerating vehicles

- Stopped vehicles

- Vehicles with small rear profile

such as trailers with no loads

OAE056104/HOAE056103/HOAE056102

5-97

Driving your vehicle

A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-

nised correctly by the sensor if any of

following occurs:

- When the vehicle is pointing

upwards due to overloading in the

luggage compartment

- Whilst the steering wheel is operat-

ing

- When driving to one side of the

lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or

on curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal

if necessary.

• Your vehicle may accelerate when

a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that the

vehicle ahead of you is not detect-

ed, drive with caution.

• When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a stopped vehicle in front of

you merges out of the lane, the

system may not immediately

detect the new vehicle that is now

in front of you. In this case, you

must maintain a safe braking dis-

tance, and if necessary, depress

the brake pedal to reduce your

driving speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

OAE056109/HOAE056108/H

5-98

Driving your vehicle

• Always look out for pedestrians

when your vehicle is maintaining a

distance with the vehicle ahead.

• Always be cautious for vehicles

with higher height or vehicles car-

rying loads that sticks out from the

back of the vehicle.

OAE056105OAE056110/H

When using the Smart Cruise

Control take the following pre-

cautions:

• If an emergency stop is nec-

essary, you must apply the

brakes.The vehicle cannot be

stopped at every emergency

situation by using the Smart

Cruise Control System.

• Keep a safe distance accord-

ing to road conditions and

vehicle speed. If the vehicle to

vehicle distance is too close

during a high-speed driving, a

serious collision may result.

• Always maintain sufficient

braking distance and deceler-

ate your vehicle by applying

the brakes if necessary.

• The Smart Cruise Control

System cannot recognise a

stopped vehicle, pedestrians

or an oncoming vehicle.

Always look ahead cautiously

to prevent unexpected and

sudden situations from occur-

ring.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-99

Driving your vehicle

The Smart Cruise Control System

may not operate temporarily due

to:

• Electrical interference

• Modifying the suspension

• Differences of tyre abrasion or

tyre pressure

• Installing different type of tyres

NOTICE

(Continued)

• Vehicles moving in front of you

with a frequent lane change

may cause a delay in the sys-

tem's reaction or may cause

the system to react to a vehicle

actually in an adjacent lane.

Always drive cautiously to pre-

vent unexpected and sudden

situations from occurring.

• Always be aware of the select-

ed speed and vehicle to vehi-

cle distance. The driver

should not solely rely on the

system but always pay atten-

tion to driving conditions and

control your vehicle speed.

• The Smart Cruise Control

System may not recognise

complex driving situations so

always pay attention to driv-

ing conditions and control

your vehicle speed.

5-100

Driving your vehicle

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving elements

are encountered such as water,

snow, ice, mud and sand, take the

bellow suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer

braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,

mud, or sand, use second gear.

Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-

essary wheel spin.

• Put sand, rock salt, tyre chains or

other non-slip materials under the

wheels to provide additional trac-

tion whilst the vehicle becomes

stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from snow, sand, or mud,

first turn the steering wheel right and

left to clear the area around your

front wheels. Then, shift back and

forth between R (Reverse) and a for-

ward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and

do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait

until the wheels stop spinning before

shifting gears. Release the accelera-

tor pedal whilst shifting, and press

lightly on the accelerator pedal whilst

the transmission is in gear. Slowly

spinning the wheels in forward and

reverse directions causes a rocking

motion that may free the vehicle.

SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS

Downshifting with an automatic

transmission whilst driving on

slippery surfaces can cause an

accident.The sudden change in

tyre speed could cause the

tyres to skid. Be careful when

downshifting on slippery sur-

faces.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and

excessive wheel spin occurs,

the temperature in the tyres can

increase very quickly. If the

tyres become damaged, a tyre

blow out or tyre explosion can

occur. This condition is danger-

ous - you and others may be

injured. Do not attempt this pro-

cedure if people or objects are

anywhere near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehi-

cle, the vehicle can overheat

quickly, possibly causing an

engine compartment fire or

other damage.Try to avoid spin-

ning the wheels as much as

possible to prevent overheating

of either the tyres or the engine.

DO NOT allow the vehicle to

spin the wheels above 35 mph

(56 km/h).

WARNING

5-101

Driving your vehicle

Information

The ESC system must be turned OFF

before rocking the vehicle.

If you are still stuck after rocking

the vehicle a few times, have the

vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle

to avoid engine overheating, pos-

sible damage to the transmission,

and tyre damage. See "Towing" in

chapter 6.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in

corners, especially when roads are

wet. Ideally, corners should always

be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards

than driving in the daylight. Here are

some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-

cles, as it may be more difficult to

see at night, especially in areas

where there may not be any street

lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the

glare from other drivers' head-

lamps.

• Keep your headlamps clean and

properly aimed. Dirty or improperly

aimed headlamps will make it

much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-

lamps of oncoming vehicles. You

could be temporarily blinded, and it

will take several seconds for your

eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous. Here are a few things to

consider when driving in the rain or

on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra follow-

ing distance. A heavy rainfall

makes it harder to see and increas-

es the distance needed to stop

your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if

equipped)

• Replace your windscreen wiper

blades when they show signs of

streaking or missing areas on the

windscreen.

• Be sure your tyres have enough

tread. If your tyres do not have

enough tread, making a quick stop

on wet pavement can cause a skid

and possibly lead to an accident.

See "Tyre Tread" in chapter 7.

• Turn on your headlamps to make it

easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-

dles can affect your brakes. If you

must go through puddles, try to

drive through them slowly.

NOTICE

5-102

Driving your vehicle

• If you believe your brakes may be

wet, apply them lightly whilst driv-

ing until normal braking operation

returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are

going fast enough, your vehicle may

have little or no contact with the road

surface and actually ride on the

water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increas-

es as the depth of tyre tread

decreases, refer to "Tyre Tread" in

chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no

higher than the bottom of the wheel

hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance

because brake performance may be

reduced.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them sev-

eral times whilst the vehicle is mov-

ing slowly.

Highway driving

Tyres

Adjust the tyre inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or

damage the tyres.

Do not install worn-out or damaged

tyres, which may reduce traction or

fail the braking operation.

Information

Never over-inflate your tyres above

the maximum inflation pressure, as

specified on your tyres.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine

oil

Driving at higher speeds on the high-

way consumes more fuel and is less

efficient than driving at a slower,

more moderate speed. Maintain a

moderate speed in order to conserve

fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine

coolant level and the engine oil

before driving.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may

overheat the engine.

5-103

Driving your vehicle

The severe weather conditions of

winter quickly wear out tyres and

cause other problems. To minimise

winter driving problems, you should

take the following suggestions:

Snow or icy conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake

applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine

braking to the fullest extent. Sudden

brake applications on snowy or icy

roads may cause the vehicle to skid.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it

may be necessary to use snow tyres

or to install tyre chains on your tyres.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to

carry include tyre chains, tow straps

or chains, a flashlight, emergency

flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,

a window scraper, gloves, ground

cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tyres

If you mount snow tyres on your vehi-

cle, make sure to use radial tyres of

the same size and load range as the

original tyres. Mount snow tyres on

all four wheels to balance your vehi-

cle’s handling in all weather condi-

tions. The traction provided by snow

tyres on dry roads may not be as

high as your vehicle's original equip-

ment tyres. Check with the tyre deal-

er for maximum speed recommenda-

tions.

Information

Do not install studded tyres without

first checking local and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG

Snow tyres should be equiva-

lent in size and type to the vehi-

cle's standard tyres. Otherwise,

the safety and handling of your

vehicle may be adversely affect-

ed.

WARNING

5-104

Driving your vehicle

Tyre chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are

thinner than other types of tyres, they

may be damaged by mounting some

types of tyre chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tyres is

recommended instead of tyre chains.

If tyre chains must be used, use gen-

uine HYUNDAI parts and install the

tyre chain after reviewing the instruc-

tions provided with the tyre chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by

improper tyre chain use is not cov-

ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s

warranty.

Information

• Install tyre chains only in pairs and

on the front tyres. It should be noted

that installing tyre chains on the

tyres will provide a greater driving

force, but will not prevent side

skids.

• Do not install studded tyres without

first checking local and municipal

regulations for possible restrictions

against their use.

OAE056091

The use of tyre chains may

adversely affect vehicle han-

dling:

• Drive less than 20 mph (30

km/h) or the chain manufac-

turer's recommended speed

limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid

bumps, holes, sharp turns,

and other road hazards, which

may cause the vehicle to

bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked

wheel braking.

WARNING

5-105

Driving your vehicle

Chain Installation

When installing tyre chains, follow

the manufacturer's instructions and

mount them as tightly possible. Drive

slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))

with chains installed. If you hear the

chains contacting the body or chas-

sis, stop and tighten them.If they still

make contact, slow down until the

noise stops. Remove the tyre chains

as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning Flasher and place a

triangular emergency warning device

behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park),

apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine before installing snow

chains.

When using tyre chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly

installed chains can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE "S" class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to prevent

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driving

0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tyre chains on vehi-

cles equipped with aluminium

wheels. If unavoidable, use a

wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 12 mm

(0.47 in) thick to prevent damage

to the chain's connection.

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high

quality ethylene glycol coolant in the

cooling system. It is the only type of

coolant that should be used because

it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-

ing system, lubricates the water

pump and prevents freezing. Be sure

to replace or replenish your coolant

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in your Service Booklet.

Before winter, have your coolant test-

ed to assure that its freezing point is

sufficient for the temperatures antici-

pated during the winter.

NOTICE

5-106

Driving your vehicle

Check battery and cables

Winter temperatures affect battery

performance. Inspect the battery

and cables, as specified in the

chapter 7.The battery charging level

can be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer or in a service

station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some regions during winter, it is

recommended to use the "winter

weight" oil with lower viscosity. For

further information, refer to the chap-

ter 8.When you are not sure about a

type of winter weight oil, we recom-

mend that you consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect the spark plugs, as speci-

fied in the chapter 7. If necessary,

replace them. Also check all ignition

wirings and components for any

cracks, wear-out, and damage.

To prevent locks from freezing

To prevent the locks from being

frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid

or glycerin into key holes. When a

lock opening is already covered with

ice, spray approved de-icing fluid

over the ice to remove it. When an

internal part of a lock freezes, try to

thaw it with a heated key. Carefully

use the heated key to avoid an injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze solution in system

To prevent the window washer from

being frozen, add authorised window

washer anti-freeze solution, as spec-

ified on the window washer contain-

er. Window washer anti-freeze solu-

tion is available from a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer, and most vehicle

accessory outlets.Do not use engine

coolant or other types of anti-freeze

solution, to prevent any damage to

the vehicle paint.

5-107

Driving your vehicle

Do not let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged

position.This is most likely to happen

when there is an accumulation of

snow or ice around or near the rear

brakes or if the brakes are wet.When

there is the risk that your parking

brake may freeze, temporarily apply

it with the shift lever in P (Park).Also,

block the rear wheels in advance, so

the vehicle may not roll. Then,

release the parking brake.

Do not let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and

ice can build up under the fenders

and interfere with the steering.When

driving in such conditions during the

severe winter, you should check

underneath the vehicle on a regular

basis, to ensure that the front wheels

and the steering components is

unblocked.

Carry emergency equipment

In accordance with weather condi-

tions, you should carry appropriate

emergency equipment, whilst driv-

ing. Some of the items you may want

to carry include tyre chains, tow

straps or chains, flashlight, emer-

gency flares, sand, shovel, jumper

cables, window scraper, gloves,

ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

Do not place objects or materials

in the engine compartment

Putting objects or materials in the

engine compartment may cause an

engine failure or combustion,

because they may block the engine

cooling. Such damage will not be

covered by the manufacturer's war-

ranty.

5-108

If you are considering to tow with

your vehicle, you should first your

country's legal requirements.As laws

vary the requirements for towing trail-

ers, cars, or other types of vehicles

or apparatus may differ. Ask a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for fur-

ther details before towing.

Remember that trailering is different

than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in han-

dling, durability, and fuel economy.

Successful, safe trailering requires

correct equipment, and it has to be

used properly. Damage to your vehi-

cle caused by improper trailer towing

is not covered by your vehicle manu-

facturer’s warranty.

This section contains many time-

tested, important trailering tips and

safety rules. Many of these are

important for your safety and that of

your passengers. Please read this

section carefully before you pull a

trailer.

Information

- For Europe

• The technically permissible maxi-

mum load on the rear axle(s) may be

exceeded by not more than 15 %

and the technically permissible

maximum laden mass of the vehicle

may be exceeded by not more than

10% or 100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichev-

er value is lower. In this case, do not

exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) for

vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h

(49.7 mph) for vehicle of category

N1.

• When a vehicle of category M1 is

towing a trailer, the additional load

imposed at the trailer coupling

device may cause the tyre maximum

load ratings to be exceeded, but not

by more than 15%. In this case, do

not exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and

increase the tyre inflation pressure

by at least 0.2 bar.

TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG

Driving your vehicle

Take the following precautions:

• If you don't use the correct

equipment and/or drive improp-

erly, you can lose control of the

vehicle when you are pulling a

trailer. For example, if the trailer

is too heavy, the braking per-

formance may be reduced. You

and your passengers could be

seriously or fatally injured. Pull

a trailer only if you have fol-

lowed all the steps in this sec-

tion.

• Before towing, make sure the

total trailer weight, GCW

(Gross Combination Weight),

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight),

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) and

trailer tongue load are all with-

in the limits.

WARNING

5-109

Driving your vehicle

If you decide to pull a trailer?

Here are some important points if

you decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control.You

can ask a trailer towbar dealer

about sway control.

• Do not do any towing with your

vehicle during its first 2,000 km

(1,200 miles) in order to allow the

engine to properly break in. Failure

to heed this caution may result in

serious engine or transmission

damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to

consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer for further information on

additional requirements such as a

towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-

erate speed (less than 100 km/h

(60 mph)) or posted towing speed

limit.

• On a long uphill grade, do not

exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the

posted towing speed limit,

whichever is lower.

• Carefully observe the weight and

load limits provided in the following

pages.

Trailer weight

What is the maximum safe weight of a

trailer? It should never weigh more

than the maximum trailer weight with

trailer brakes. But even that can be

too heavy.It depends on how you plan

to use your trailer. For example,

speed, altitude, road grades, outside

temperature and how often your vehi-

cle is used to pull a trailer are all

important.The ideal trailer weight can

also depend on any special equip-

ment that you have on your vehicle.

Tongue load

The tongue load is an important

weight to measure because it affects

the total Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer

tongue should weigh a maximum of

10% of the total loaded trailer weight,

within the limits of the maximum trail-

er tongue load permissible.

After you've loaded your trailer,

weigh the trailer and then the tongue,

separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they aren’t, you may be

able to correct them simply by mov-

ing some items around in the trailer.

OLMB053048

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

OLMB053047

Tongue Load

Total Trailer Weight

5-110

Information

With increasing altitude the engine

performance decreases. From 1,000 m

above sea level and for every 1,000 m

thereafter 10% of vehicle/trailer

weight (trailer weighter + gross vehi-

cle weight) must be deducted.

Driving your vehicle

Take the following precautions:

• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in the

front. The front should be

loaded with approximately

60% of the total trailer load;

the rear should be loaded with

approximately 40% of the total

trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or

trailer towing equipment.

Improper loading can result in

damage to your vehicle and/or

personal injury. Check weights

and loading at a commercial

scale or highway patrol office

equipped with scales.

WARNING

Item

With trailer

package

Without trailer

package

Maximum trailer

weight kg (Ibs.)

With brake system

- 750 (1653)

Without brake system

Maximum permissible static vertical load

on the coupling device kg (Ibs.)

- 75 (165)

Recommended distance from rear wheel

centre to coupling point mm (inch)

- 990 (39)

Reference weight and distance when towing a trailer

5-111

Driving your vehicle

Trailer towing equipment

Towbars

Information

The mounting hole for towbars are

located on both sides of the underbody

behind the rear tyres.

It's important to have the correct tow-

bar equipment. Crosswinds, large

trucks going by, and rough roads are

a few reasons why you’ll need the

right towbar. Here are some rules to

follow:

• Do you have to make any holes in

the body of your vehicle when you

install a trailer towbar? If you do,

then be sure to seal the holes later

when you remove the towbar.If you

don’t seal them, carbon monoxide

(CO) from your exhaust can get

into your vehicle, as well as dirt

and water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are

not intended for towbars. Do not

attach rental towbars or other

bumper-type towbars to them. Use

only a frame-mounted towbar that

does not attach to the bumper.

• A HYUNDAI trailer towbar accessory

is available at a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Safety chains

You should always attach chains

between your vehicle and your trailer.

Instructions about safety chains may

be provided by the towbar manufac-

turer or trailer manufacturer. Follow

the manufacturer’s recommendation

for attaching safety chains. Always

leave just enough slack so you can

turn with your trailer. And, never

allow safety chains to drag on the

ground.

OAEPH067043L

5-112

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brak-

ing system, make sure it conforms to

your country’s regulations and that it

is properly installed and operating

correctly.

If your trailer weighs more than the

maximum trailer weight without trail-

er brakes loaded, then it needs its

own brakes and they must be ade-

quate.Be sure to read and follow the

instructions for the trailer brakes so

you’ll be able to install, adjust and

maintain them properly. Be sure not

to modify your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain

amount of experience.Before setting

out for the open road, you must get

to know your trailer. Acquaint your-

self with the feel of handling and

braking with the added weight of the

trailer. And always keep in mind that

the vehicle you are driving is now

longer and not nearly as responsive

as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer

towbar and platform, safety chains,

electrical connector(s), lights, tyres

and brakes.

During your trip, occasionally check

to be sure that the load is secure,

and that the lights and trailer brakes

are still working.

Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the

vehicle ahead as you would when

driving your vehicle without a trailer.

This can help you avoid situations

that require heavy braking and sud-

den turns.

Passing

You will need more passing distance

up ahead when you’re towing a trail-

er. And, because of the increased

vehicle length, you’ll need to go

much farther beyond the passed

vehicle before you can return to your

lane.

Driving your vehicle

Do not use a trailer with its own

brakes unless you are absolute-

ly certain that you have proper-

ly set up the brake system.This

is not a task for amateurs. Use

an experienced, competent trail-

er shop for this work.

WARNING

5-113

Driving your vehicle

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering

wheel with one hand. Then, to move

the trailer to the left, move your hand

to the left. To move the trailer to the

right, move your hand to the right.

Always back up slowly and, if possi-

ble, have someone guide you.

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer,

make wider turns than normal.Do this

so your trailer won’t strike soft shoul-

ders, kerbs, road signs, trees, or other

objects. Avoid jerky or sudden

manoeuvres. Signal well in advance.

Turn signals

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle

has to have a different turn signal

flasher and extra wiring. The green

arrows on your instrument panel will

flash whenever you signal a turn or

lane change. Properly connected,

the trailer lights will also flash to alert

other drivers you’re about to turn,

change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green

arrows on your instrument panel will

flash for turns even if the bulbs on

the trailer are burned out. Thus, you

may think drivers behind you are

seeing your signals when, in fact,

they are not. It’s important to check

occasionally to be sure the trailer

bulbs are still working.You must also

check the lights every time you dis-

connect and then reconnect the

wires.

Driving on hills

Reduce speed and shift to a lower

gear before you start down a long or

steep downgrade. If you don’t shift

down, you might have to use your

brakes so much that they would get

overheated and may not operate effi-

ciently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down

and reduce your speed to around 70

km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-

bility of engine and transmission

overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the

maximum trailer weight without trail-

er brakes and you have an automat-

ic transmission/dual clutch transmis-

sion, you should drive in D (Drive)

when towing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)

when towing a trailer will minimise

heat build-up and extend the life of

your transmission.

Do not connect a trailer lighting

system directly to your vehi-

cle’s lighting system. Use an

approved trailer wiring harness.

Failure to do so could result in

damage to the vehicle electrical

system and/or personal injury.

Consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer for assistance.

WARNING

5-114

To prevent engine and/or trans-

mission overheating:

• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay

close attention to the engine

coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not

overheat. If the needle of the

coolant temperature gauge

moves towards "H" (HOT), pull

over and stop as soon as it is

safe to do so, and allow the

engine to idle until it cools

down.You may proceed once the

engine has cooled sufficiently.

• If you tow a trailer with the max-

imum gross vehicle weight and

maximum trailer weight, it can

cause the engine or transmis-

sion to overheat. When driving

in such conditions, allow the

engine to idle until it cools

down.You may proceed once the

engine or transmission has

cooled sufficiently.

(Continued)

• When towing a trailer, your vehi-

cle speed may be much slower

than the general flow of traffic,

especially when climbing an

uphill grade. Use the right hand

lane when towing a trailer on an

uphill grade. Choose your vehicle

speed according to the maximum

posted speed limit for vehicles

with trailers, the steepness of the

grade, and your trailer weight.

• Vehicles equipped with a dual

clutch transmission when tow-

ing a trailer on steep grades,

need to be aware that the clutch

in the transmission could over-

heat.

When the clutch is overheated,

the safe protection mode

engages. If the safe protection

mode engages, the gear posi-

tion indicator on the cluster

blinks with a chime sound.

(Continued)

At this time, a warning message

will appear on the LCD display

and driving may not be smooth.

If you ignore this warning, the

driving condition may become

worse.

To return to normal driving con-

ditions, stop the vehicle on a flat

road and apply the foot brake for

a few minutes before driving off.

NOTICE

Driving your vehicle

5-115

Driving your vehicle

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer

attached to your vehicle, you should

not park your vehicle on a hill.

However, if you ever have to park your

trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking

space.

Turn the steering wheel in the

direction of the kerb (right if head-

ed down hill, left if headed up hill).

2. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut off

the vehicle.

4. Place wheel chocks under the

trailer wheels on the down hill side

of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,

shift to neutral, release the park-

ing brake and slowly release the

brakes until the trailer chocks

absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes and parking

brakes.

7. Move the shift lever to P (Park)

when the vehicle is parked on a

uphill grade and in R (Reverse) on

a downhill.

8. Shut off the vehicle and release

the vehicle brakes but leave the

parking brake set.

Ready to leave after parking on

a hill

1. With the shift lever in P (Park),

apply your brakes and hold the

brake pedal down whilst you:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the

brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear

of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up

and store the chocks.

To prevent serious or fatal

injury:

• Do not get out of the vehicle

without the parking brake

firmly set. If you have left the

engine running, the vehicle

can move suddenly. You and

others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal to hold the vehicle on

an uphill.

WARNING

5-116

Maintenance when towing a

trailer

Your vehicle will need service more

often when you regularly pull a trail-

er. Important items to pay particular

attention to include engine oil, auto-

matic transmission fluid, axle lubri-

cant and cooling system fluid. Brake

condition is another important item to

frequently check. If you’re trailering,

it’s a good idea to review these items

before you start your trip.Don’t forget

to also maintain your trailer and tow-

bar. Follow the maintenance sched-

ule that accompanied your trailer and

check it periodically. Preferably, con-

duct the check at the start of each

day’s driving. Most importantly, all

hitch nuts and bolts should be tight.

To prevent vehicle damage:

• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur

on hot days or during uphill driv-

ing. If the coolant gauge indi-

cates over-heating, switch off

the air conditioner and stop the

vehicle in a safe area to cool

down the engine.

• Do not switch off the engine

whilst the coolant gauge indi-

cates over-heating.

(Keep the engine idle to cool

down the engine)

• When towing check automatic

transmission fluid more fre-

quently.

• If your vehicle is not equipped

with an air conditioner, you

should install a condenser fan

to improve engine performance

when towing a trailer.

NOTICE

Driving your vehicle

5-117

Driving your vehicle

Two labels on your driver’s door sill

show how much weight your vehicle

was designed to carry: the Tyre and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiar-

ize yourself with the following terms

for determining your vehicle's weight

ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-

tions and the Certification Label:

Base Kerb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle

including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or option-

al equipment.

Vehicle Kerb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your deal-

er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added

to the Base Kerb Weight, including

cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on

each axle (front and rear) - including

vehicle kerb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single

axle (front or rear). These numbers

are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must

never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Kerb Weight plus

actual Cargo Weight plus passen-

gers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment,

passengers and cargo). The GVWR

is shown on the Certification Label

located on the driver’s door sill.

Overloading

VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWEEIIGGHHTT

The Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) for your

vehicle are on the Certification

Label attached to the driver's

(or front passenger’s) door.

Exceeding these ratings can

cause an accident or vehicle

damage. You can calculate the

weight of your load by weighing

the items (and people) before

putting them in the vehicle. Be

careful not to overload your

vehicle.

WARNING

What to do in an emergency

Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2

In case of an emergency whilst driving .............6-2

If the engine stalls whilst driving..................................6-2

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-2

If you have a flat tyre whilst driving ..........................6-3

If the engine will not start ...................................6-4

If the 12 volt battery is discharged

(hybrid vehicle) ......................................................6-5

Before jump starting ........................................................6-5

Jump starting......................................................................6-6

If the 12 volt battery is discharged

(plug-in hybrid vehicle) ........................................6-9

Jump starting......................................................................6-9

If the engine overheats ......................................6-12

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......6-14

Check tyre pressure ......................................................6-14

Tyre pressure monitoring system...............................6-15

Low tyre pressure telltale.............................................6-16

Low tyre pressure position and

tyre pressure telltale......................................................6-16

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator .....................................................6-17

Changing a tyre with TPMS .........................................6-18

If you have a flat tyre (with spare tyre) .........6-20

Jack and tools .................................................................6-20

Changing tyres.................................................................6-21

Jack label...........................................................................6-26

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-27

If you have a flat tyre (with tyre mobility kit)6-28

Type A................................................................................6-28

Type B................................................................................6-34

Towing ...................................................................6-43

Towing service .................................................................6-43

Removable towing hook ................................................6-44

Emergency towing ..........................................................6-45

Emergency commodity........................................6-47

Fire extinguisher ............................................................6-47

First aid kit ......................................................................6-47

Triangle reflector ...........................................................6-47

Tyre pressure gauge ......................................................6-47

6-2

The hazard warning flasher serves as

a warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-

gency repairs are being made or

when the vehicle is stopped near the

edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher

on or off, press the hazard warning

flasher button with the ignition switch

in any position.The button is located

in the centre fascia panel. All turn

signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-

ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work when

the hazard flasher is on.

If the engine stalls whilst driv-

ing

• Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.

• Try to start the engine again.If your

vehicle will not start, we recom-

mend that you contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

If the engine stalls at a cross-

road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroads or

crossing, if safe to do so, move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

and then push the vehicle to a safe

location.

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR

What to do in an emergency

IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

WWHHIILLSSTT DDRRIIVVIINNGG

OAE066001

6-3

What to do in an emergency

If you have a flat tyre whilst

driving

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driv-

ing:

• Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow

down whilst driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immedi-

ately or attempt to pull off the road

as this may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to

such a speed that it is safe to do

so, brake carefully and pull off the

road. Drive off the road as far as

possible and park on firm, level

ground. If you are on a divided

highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press

the hazard warning flasher button,

move the shift lever into P (Park),

apply the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on

the side of the vehicle that is away

from traffic.

• When changing a flat tyre, follow

the instructions provided later in

this chapter.

6-4

IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT

What to do in an emergency

Hybrid vehicle

• Be sure the shift lever is in P

(Park). The vehicle starts only

when the shift lever is in P (Park).

• This vehicle does not have a regu-

lar 12V battery that needs periodic

replacement. It is lithium ion poly-

mer type integrated into the HEV

high voltage battery. The vehicle

has a 12V battery protection sys-

tem that cuts 12V battery from

vehicle draw to prevent full dis-

charge. If vehicle will not start, first

try pressing the 12V Battery Reset

switch (left side of the steering

wheel near the fuel door open

switch) to reconnect the 12V bat-

tery, but you must start vehicle

within 15 seconds of pressing the

12V Battery Reset switch. After

starting vehicle, operate the vehi-

cle safely outdoors in ready mode

stopped and/or drive it for 30 min-

utes total to charge the 12V battery

fully.

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the vehicle still does not start, we

recommend that you call a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer for assistance.

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

• Be sure the shift lever is in P

(Park). The vehicle starts only

when the shift lever is in P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to

be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate

the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to

start it. This could cause damage to

your vehicle. See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this

chapter.

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the vehicle still does not start, we

recommend that you call a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer for assistance.

Push or pull starting the vehicle

may cause the catalytic convert-

er to overload which can lead to

damage to the emission control

system.

CAUTION

Push or pull starting the vehicle

may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overload which can

lead to damage to the emission

control system.

CAUTION

6-5

What to do in an emergency

Before jump starting

This vehicle does not have a regular

12V battery that needs periodic

replacement. It is lithium ion polymer

type integrated into the HEV high

voltage battery. The vehicle has a

12V battery protection system that

cuts 12V battery from vehicle draw to

prevent full discharge.

Using the 12V battery reset

switch

1. Press the 12V Battery Reset

switch to reconnect the 12V bat-

tery.

2. Start the vehicle within 15 sec-

onds of pressing the 12V Battery

Reset switch.

3. After starting vehicle ( indica-

tor on), operate the vehicle safely

outdoors in ready mode stopped

and/or drive it for 30 minutes total

to charge the 12V battery fully.

If you do not start the vehicle imme-

diately after pressing the 12V Battery

Reset switch, the power of 12V bat-

tery is automatically disconnected

after few seconds to save the 12V

battery from additional discharge. If

the 12V battery is disconnected prior

to starting the vehicle, press the 12V

Battery Reset switch again and then

immediately start the vehicle as

explained.

Repeated use of the 12V Battery

Reset switch without a sufficient

engine ON cycle (30 Min+) may

cause over discharge of the 12V bat-

tery, which will prevent the vehicle

from starting. If the 12V battery is

over discharged to a point that the

reset does not work, try to jump-start

the vehicle.

Information

After starting the vehicle ( indica-

tor on), the 12V battery is being

charged whether the engine is running

or not. Although there is no engine-

sound, it is unnecessary to depress the

accelerator pedal.

IIFF TTHHEE 1122 VVOOLLTT BBAATTTTEERRYY IISS DDIISSCCHHAARRGGEEDD ((HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

OAEPH047037R

6-6

The following items may need to be

reset after the battery has been dis-

charged or the battery has been dis-

connected.

See chapter 3 or 4 for:

• Power Windows

• Trip Computer

• Climate Control System

• Clock

• Audio System

• Sunroof

• Driver Position Memory System

External power source using 12V

battery

The use of external power acces-

sories may reduce performance

and function of the vehicle.

Especially, the use of dash cam-

eras may shut off the power of the

vehicle prior to the dash camera's

automatic shut-down.

If the power of the vehicle is shut

off, start the vehicle as explained.

(refer to "Using the 12V Battery

Reset Switch")

Jump starting

In the event vehicle still does not

have a functional 12V battery (check

if interior lights will not turn on) then

you can try a jump start to the engine

compartment jumper terminals using

a 12V booster pack or jumper cables

from another vehicle's 12V battery

according to the following instruc-

tions.

1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)

and set the parking brake. Turn

both vehicles OFF.

NOTICE

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting can be danger-

ous if done incorrectly. Follow

the jump starting procedure in

this section to avoid serious

injury or damage to your vehi-

cle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehi-

cle, we strongly recommend

that you have a service techni-

cian or towing service do it for

you.

CAUTION

6-7

What to do in an emergency

4. Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+)

jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery/

chassis ground of the assisting

vehicle (3).

7. Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the black,

negative (-) chassis ground of

your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the cor-

rect battery or jumper terminals or

the correct ground. Do not lean

over the battery when making

connections.

8. Press the 12V Battery Reset

switch.

9. Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run for a few min-

utes.

10. Start your vehicle as soon as

possible. After starting vehicle

( indicator on), operate the

vehicle safely outdoors in ready

mode stopped and/or drive it for

30 minutes total to charge the

12V battery fully.

OAE066004N OAEPH047037R

6-8

If your vehicle will not start after a

few attempts, it probably requires

servicing. In this event please seek

qualified assistance. If the cause of

your battery discharging is not

apparent, we recommend that you

have your vehicle checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, neg-

ative (-) battery/chassis ground of

the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper

cable from the red, positive (+)

battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

Information

The voltage range of the charger

should be 13.3~14V and its current

range should be less than 60A. (13.8V

is recommended).

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulations.

To prevent damage to your vehi-

cle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to

jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

NOTICE

What to do in an emergency

• The use of an improper charg-

er with a voltage and current

range higher than specified

may cause overheating and

damage to the 12V battery.

• The use of an incorrect charg-

er will lead to a power shut-off

to save the 12V battery. Stop

using the incorrect charger

once the power of the vehicle

is shut off.

CAUTION

6-9

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Follow the jump

starting procedure in this section to

avoid serious injury or damage to

your vehicle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehicle, we

strongly recommend that you have a

service technician or towing service

do it for you.

IIFF TTHHEE 1122 VVOOLLTT BBAATTTTEERRYY IISS DDIISSCCHHAARRGGEEDD ((PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always pres-

ent in battery cells, is

highly combustible, and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

(Continued)

WARNING

6-10

What to do in an emergency

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to

jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulations.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)

and set the parking brake. Turn

both vehicles OFF.

Information

Your vehicle has a battery in the lug-

gage compartment, but when you

jump start your vehicle, use the

jumper terminal in the engine com-

partment.

NOTICE

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-)

jumper cables to touch. It may

cause sparks.

• The battery may rupture or

explode when you jump start

with a low or frozen battery.

6-11

What to do in an emergency

4. Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+)

jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery/

chassis ground of the assisting

vehicle (3).

7. Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the black,

negative (-) chassis ground of

your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the cor-

rect battery or jumper terminals or

the correct ground. Do not lean

over the battery when making

connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run at approxi-

mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-

utes.Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a

few attempts, it probably requires

servicing. In this event please seek

qualified assistance. If the cause of

your battery discharging is not

apparent, have your vehicle checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, neg-

ative (-) battery/chassis ground of

the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper

cable from the red, positive (+)

battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

OAE066004N

6-12

What to do in an emergency

If your temperature gauge indicates

overheating, you experience a loss

of power, or hear loud pinging or

knocking, the engine may be over-

heating. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon

as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)

and set the parking brake

3. Make sure that there is no hot

steam gushing out of the engine

compartment. When it is safe to

do so, open the engine compart-

ment, and check the water-pump

connector. When the water-pump

connector is disconnected, stop

the engine, re-connect the water-

pump connector, and then re-start

the engine.

4. Set the temperature and the air

flow to the maximum, and turn ON

the air conditioner.

5. When the Service warning light

( ) illuminates on the instru-

ment cluster, immediately stop the

engine, and contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer. When the

engine warning light ( ) illumi-

nates, or when the coolant or hot

steams gush out of the engine

compartment, leave the engine

compartment opened, whilst run-

ning the engine.This is to ventilate

the engine compartment and to

cool down the engine.

6. Check the coolant temperature

gauge on the instrument cluster to

make sure the coolant temperature

is sufficiently cooled down. Check

the coolant level. When it is insuffi-

cient, check its connection with the

radiator, the heater hose, and the

water pump for any leakage.When

there is no leakage, add the

coolant. However, if the problems

persists, such as the illumination of

the warning lights, leakages, or the

cooling-fan malfunction, which may

overheat the engine, immediately

stop the engine, and have your

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS

Whilst the engine is

running, keep hands,

clothing and tools

away from the mov-

ing parts such as the

cooling fan and drive

belt to prevent seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

OAE066005

6-13

What to do in an emergency

7. If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine

temperature has returned to nor-

mal. Then, if coolant has been

lost, carefully add coolant to the

reservoir to bring the fluid level in

the reservoir up to the halfway

mark.

8. Proceed with caution, keeping

alert for further signs of overheat-

ing. If overheating happens again,

we recommend that you call a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

assistance.

• Serious loss of coolant indi-

cates a leak in the cooling

system and we recommend

the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• When the engine overheats

from low engine coolant, sud-

denly adding engine coolant

may cause cracks in the

engine. To prevent damage,

add engine coolant slowly in

small quantities.

CAUTION

Never remove the

engine coolant cap

and/or inverter coolant

cap or the drain plug

whilst the engine and

radiator are hot. Hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure, causing serious injury.

Turn the hybrid system off and

wait until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the engine coolant cap

and/or inverter coolant cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly

to the first stop. Step back whilst

the pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released,press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continue

turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

WARNING

6-14

(1) Low Tyre Pressure Telltale/TPMS

Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low Tyre Pressure Position

Telltale and Tyre Pressure

Telltale

(Shown on the LCD display)

Check tyre pressure

• You can check the tyre pressure in

the Information Mode (for cluster

type A) or Assist Mode (for cluster

type B) on the cluster.

Refer to the "LCD Display

Modes" in chapter 3.

• Tyre pressure is displayed after a

few minutes of driving after initial

engine start up.

• If tyre pressure is not displayed

when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive

to display" message will appear.

After driving, check the tyre pres-

sure.

• The displayed tyre pressure values

may differ from those measured

with a tyre pressure gauge.

• You can change the tyre pressure

unit in the User Settings mode on

the LCD display.

- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User

Settings Mode" section in

chapter 3).

TTYYRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS))

What to do in an emergency

OAE066006R

■ Type A

■ Type A ■ Type B

■ Type B

OAE046114L/OAE046115L

OAE046460L/OAE066030L

6-15

What to do in an emergency

Tyre pressure monitoring sys-

tem

Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tyres of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tyre inflation pressure for

those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a

tyre pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre

pressure telltale when one or more

of your tyres is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low

tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tyres as

soon as possible, and inflate them to

the proper pressure.Driving on a sig-

nificantly under-inflated tyre causes

the tyre to overheat and can lead to

tyre failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tyre tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tyre mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tyre pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with

the low tyre pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximate-

ly one minute and then remain con-

tinuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehi-

cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illu-

minated, the system may not be able

to detect or signal low tyre pressure

as intended.TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or

alternate tyres or wheels on the vehi-

cle that prevent the TPMS from func-

tioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tyres or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tyres and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function proper-

ly.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tyre life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tyre failure that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

6-16

If any of the below happens, have

the system checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

1. The Low Tyre Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

does not illuminate for 3 sec-

onds when the ignition switch

is placed to the ON position or

engine is running.

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

remains illuminated after blink-

ing for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tyre Pressure Position

Telltale remains illuminated.

Low tyre pressure

telltale

Low tyre pressure position and

tyre pressure telltale

When the tyre pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated and a warning message dis-

played on the cluster LCD display,

one or more of your tyres is signifi-

cantly under-inflated. The Low Tyre

Pressure Position Telltale will indi-

cate which tyre is significantly under-

inflated by illuminating the corre-

sponding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immedi-

ately reduce your speed, avoid hard

cornering and anticipate increased

stopping distances. You should stop

and check your tyres as soon as pos-

sible. Inflate the tyres to the proper

pressure as indicated on the vehi-

cle’s placard or tyre inflation pres-

sure label located on the driver’s side

centre pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station

or if the tyre cannot hold the newly

added air, replace the low pressure

tyre with the spare tyre.

The Low Tyre Pressure Telltale will

remain on and the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may blink for one minute

and then remain illuminated (when

the vehicle is driven approximately

10 minutes at speed above 15.5 mph

(25 km/h)) until you have the low

pressure tyre repaired and replaced

on the vehicle.

NOTICE

What to do in an emergency

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE046114L/OAE046115L

6-17

What to do in an emergency

TPMS (Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System.

We recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer as soon as possible.

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the Low Tyre Pressure

Position Telltale will not be dis-

played even though the vehicle

has an under-inflated tyre.

NOTICE

In winter or cold weather, the

Low Tyre Pressure Telltale may

be illuminated if the tyre pres-

sure was adjusted to the recom-

mended tyre inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunc-

tioning because the decreased

temperature leads to a propor-

tional lowering of tyre pressure.

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tyre inflation

pressure and adjust the tyres to

the recommended tyre inflation

pressure.

CAUTION

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tyre pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tyres can cause the tyres

to overheat and fail.

WARNING

6-18

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

may illuminate after blinking for

one minute if the vehicle is near

electric power supply cables or

radio transmitters such as police

stations, government and public

offices, broadcasting stations,

military installations, airports,

transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may illuminate if snow

chains are used or electronic

devices such as computers, charg-

ers, remote starters, navigation,

etc.This may interfere with normal

operation of the TPMS.

Changing a tyre with TPMS

If you have a flat tyre, the Low Tyre

Pressure and Position telltales will

come on. We recommend that the

flat tire be repaired by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer as soon as pos-

sible or replace the flat tyre with the

spare tyre.

The spare tyre (if equipped) does not

come with a tyre pressure monitoring

sensor. When the low pressure tyre

or the flat tyre is replaced with the

spare tyre, the Low Tyre Pressure

Telltale will remain on. Also, the

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illu-

minate after blinking for one minute if

the vehicle is driven at speed above

15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximate-

ly 10 minutes.

Once the original tyre equipped with

a tyre pressure monitoring sensor is

reinflated to the recommended pres-

sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,

the Low Tyre Pressure Telltale and

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go

off within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicators do not extinguish

after a few minutes, please visit a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tyre

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tyre behind the valve stem (except

for the spare tyre). You must use

TPMS specific wheels. It is recom-

mended that you always have your

tyres serviced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

You may not be able to identify a tyre

with low pressure by simply looking

at it. Always use a good quality tyre

pressure gauge to measure. Please

note that a tyre that is hot (from

being driven) will have a higher pres-

sure measurement than a tyre that is

cold.

NOTICE

What to do in an emergency

It is recommended that you do

not use a puncture-repairing

agent not approved by a

HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or

inflate a low pressure tyre. Tyre

sealant not approved by a

HYUNDAI dealer may damage

the tyre pressure sensor.

CAUTION

6-19

What to do in an emergency

A cold tyre means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

Allow the tyre to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tyre is cold before inflating

to the recommended pressure.

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tyre dam-

age caused by external fac-

tors such as nails or road

debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually with light

force, and slowly move to a

safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may interfere with the

system's ability to warn the driv-

er of low tyre pressure condi-

tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may void the warranty

for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING

For EUROPE

• Do not modify the vehicle; it

may interfere with the TPMS

function.

• The wheels on the market do

not have a TPMS sensor.

For your safety, we recom-

mend that you use parts for

replacement from a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

•

If you use the wheels on the mar-

ket,use a TPMS sensor approved

by a HYUNDAI de

aler. If your

vehicle is not equipped with a

TPMS sensor or TPMS does not

work properly, you may fail the

periodic vehicle inspection con-

ducted in your country.

❈❈

All vehicles sold in the EUROPE

market during below period

must be equipped with TPMS.

- New model vehicle :

Nov. 1, 2012 ~

- Current model vehicle :

Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehi-

cle registrations)

WARNING

6-20

What to do in an emergency

Jack and tools

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug

nut wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment under the luggage box

cover.

The jack is provided for emergency

tyre changing only.

Turn the winged hold down bolt

counterclockwise to remove the

spare tyre.

Store the spare tyre in the same

compartment by turning the winged

hold down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tyre and tools

from "rattling", store them in their

proper location.

IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTYYRREE ((WWIITTHH SSPPAARREE TTYYRREE))

OAD065027

OAD065026

Changing a tyre can be danger-

ous. Follow the instructions in

this section when changing a

tyre to reduce the risk of seri-

ous injury or death.

WARNING

Be careful as you use the jack

handle to stay clear of the flat

end. The flat end has sharp

edges that could cause cuts.

CAUTION

6-21

What to do in an emergency

If it is hard to loosen the tyre hold

down wing bolt by hand, you can

loosen it easily using the jack handle.

1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of

the tyre hold-down wing bolt.

2.Turn the tyre hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise with the jack

handle.

Changing tyres

Follow these steps to change your

vehicle's tyre:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park),

apply the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

3. Press the hazard warning flasher

button.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tyre

from the vehicle.

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a

jack causing serious injury or

death to you or those nearby.

Take the following safety pre-

cautions:

• Do not get under a vehicle

that is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a

tyre in the lane of traffic.

ALWAYS move the vehicle

completely off the road on

level, firm ground away from

traffic before trying to change

a tyre. If you cannot find a

level, firm place off the road,

call a towing service for assis-

tance.

• Be sure to use the jack pro-

vided with the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• ALWAYS place the jack on the

designated jacking positions

on the vehicle and NEVER on

the bumpers or any other part

of the vehicle for jacking sup-

port.

• Do not start or run the engine

whilst the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle whilst it is on

the jack.

• Keep children away from the

road and the vehicle.

OAD067033

6-22

What to do in an emergency

5. Block both the front and rear of the

tyre diagonally opposite of the tyre

you are changing.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each in the

order shown above, but do not

remove any lug nuts until the tyre

has been raised off of the ground.

7. Place the jack at the designated

jacking position under the frame

closest to the tyre you are chang-

ing. The jacking positions are

plates welded to the frame with

two notches and two dimples.

Never jack at any other position or

part of the vehicle. It may damage

the side seal molding.

OAE066010

OAE066011 OAE066012

■ Front ■ Rear

6-23

What to do in an emergency

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tyre clears the

ground. Make sure the vehicle is

stable on the jack.

9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel

lug nut wrench and remove them

with your fingers. Remove the

wheel from the studs and lay it flat

on the ground out of the way.

Remove any dirt or debris from

the studs, mounting surfaces, and

wheel.

10. Install the spare tyre onto the

studs of the hub.

11.Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-

gers onto the studs with the

smaller end of the lug nuts clos-

est to the wheel.

12. Lower the vehicle to the ground

by turning the jack handle coun-

terclockwise.

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

tighten the lug nuts in the order

shown. Double-check each lug

nut until they are tight. After

changing tyres, we recommend

that a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer tighten the lug nuts to

their proper torque as soon as

possible. The wheel lug nut

should be tightened to 11~13

kgf.m (79~94 lbf.ft).

OAE066013

OLF064013

6-24

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tyre gauge, check the

tyre pressure (see "Tyres and

Wheels" in chapter 8 for tyre pres-

sure instructions.). If the pressure is

lower or higher than recommended,

drive slowly to the nearest service

station and adjust it to the recom-

mended pressure. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is

not replaced, air may leak from the

tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy

another and install it as soon as pos-

sible. After changing tyres, secure

the flat tyre and return the jack and

tools to their proper storage loca-

tions.

Check the tyre pressure as soon

as possible after installing a spare

tyre. Adjust it to the recommend-

ed pressure.

If any of the equipment such as the

jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-

ment is damaged or in poor condi-

tion, do not attempt to change the

tyre and call for assistance.

Check and tighten the tyre wheel lug

nuts after driving over 30 mile (50km)

if tyres are replaced. Re-check the

tyre wheel lug nuts after driving over

620 mile (1,000km).

Use of compact spare tyres

(if equipped)

Compact spare tyres are designed

for emergency use only. Drive care-

fully on the compact spare tyre and

always follow the safety precautions.

NOTICE

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the studs and lug nuts. Make

certain during tyre changing

that the same nuts that were

removed are reinstalled. If you

have to replace your lug nuts

make sure they have metric

threads to avoid damaging the

studs and ensure the wheel is

properly secured to the hub.We

recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

for assistance.

CAUTION

To prevent compact spare tyre

failure and loss of control pos-

sibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tyre

only in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle

over 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s

maximum load rating or the

load carrying capacity shown

on the sidewall of the com-

pact spare tyre.

• Do not use the compact spare

tyre continuously. Repair or

replace the original tyre as

soon as possible to avoid fail-

ure of the compact spare tyre.

WARNING

6-25

What to do in an emergency

When driving with the compact spare

tyre mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tyre pressure after

installing the compact spare tyre.

The compact spare tyre should be

inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash whilst the com-

pact spare tyre is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tyre

on any other vehicle because this

tyre has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tyre's tread life

is shorter than a regular tyre.

Inspect your compact spare tyre

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tyres with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tyre at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer whilst the com-

pact spare tyre is installed.

When the original tyre and wheel

are repaired and reinstalled on the

vehicle,the lug nut torque must be

set correctly. The correct lug nut

tightening torque is 11~13 kgf.m

(79~94 lbf.ft).

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the com-

pact spare tyre and your vehi-

cle:

• Drive slowly enough for the

road conditions to avoid all

hazards, such as a potholes

or debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tyre diam-

eter is smaller than the diame-

ter of a conventional tyre and

reduces the ground clearance

approximately 25 mm (1 inch).

• Do not use tyre chains on the

compact spare tyre. Because

of the smaller size, a tyre

chain will not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare

tyre on any other wheels, nor

should standard tyres, snow

tyres, wheel covers or trim

rings be used with the com-

pact spare wheel.

CAUTION

6-26

Jack label

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under

the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical

under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehi-

cles with manual transmission or

move the shift lever to the P posi-

tion on vehicles with dual clutch

transmission.

9. The jack should be used on firm

level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and

address

What to do in an emergency

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

OHYK065011

6-27

What to do in an emergency

JACKDOC14S

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack

6-28

What to do in an emergency

Type A

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tyre Mobility Kit is a temporary fix

to the tyre and the tyre should be

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer as soon as possible.

Introduction

With the Tyre Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tyre

puncture.

The compressor and sealing com-

pound system effectively and comfort-

ably seals most punctures in a pas-

senger car tyre caused by nails or

similar objects and reinflates the tyre.

After you ensure that the tyre is prop-

erly sealed you can drive cautiously

on the tyre (distance up to 120 miles

(200 km)) at a max. speed of (50mph

(80 km/h)) in order to reach a service

station or tyre dealer for the tyre

replacement.

It is possible that some tyres, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tyre may

adversely affect tyre performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle

is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in

use.

IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTYYRREE ((WWIITTHH TTYYRREE MMOOBBIILLIITTYY KKIITT,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE066007

When two or more tyres are flat,

do not use the tyre mobility kit

because the supported one

sealant of Tyre Mobility Kit is

only used for one flat tyre.

CAUTION

Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tyre

walls.This can result in an acci-

dent due to tyre failure.

WARNING

Have your tyre repaired as soon

as possible. The tyre may lose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tyre Mobility

Kit.

WARNING

6-29

What to do in an emergency

The Tyre Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tyre

repair method and is to be used for

one tyre only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tyre Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the

Tyre Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road

so that you can work with the Tyre

Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you’re on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tyre Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car tyres.

Only punctured areas located within

the tread region of the tyre can be

sealed using the tyre mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tyres.

• When the tyre and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tyre Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tyre damage larger

than approximately 6 mm (0.24 inch).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tyre

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tyre Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if a

tyre is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tyre.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tyre Mobility Kit

unattended whilst it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a

time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below

-30°C (-22°F).

• In case of skin contact with the

sealant, wash the area thoroughly

with plenty of water. If the irritation

persists, seek medical attention.

• In case of eye contact with the

sealant, flush your eyes for at least

15 minutes. If the irritation persists,

seek medical attention.

• In case of swallowing the sealant,

rinse the mouth and drink plenty of

water. However, never give anything

to an unconscious person and seek

medical attention immediately.

• Long time exposure to the sealant

may cause damage to bodily tissue

such as kidney, etc.

Do not use the TMK if a tyre is

severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air

pressure.

Only punctured areas located

within the tread region of the

tyre can be sealed using the

TMK.

WARNING

6-30

What to do in an emergency

1. Speed restriction label

2.Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

4. Connectors and cable for power

outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. ON/OFF switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tyre inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tyre inflation

pressure

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence,

otherwise the sealant may escape

under high pressure.

Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit

OAE067039

6-31

What to do in an emergency

Using the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).

2. Screw the filling hose (3) onto the

connector of the sealant bottle (2).

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing of the compressor (5) so

that the bottle is upright.

4. Ensure that the button (9) on the

compressor is not pressed.

Do not use the tyre sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tyre failure.

WARNING

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

WARNING

Detach the speed restriction

label (1) from the sealant bottle

(2), and place it in a highly visi-

ble place inside the vehicle

such as on the steering wheel

to remind the driver not to drive

too fast.

WARNING

OAE066014R

OAEPH067041L

6-32

What to do in an emergency

5. Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the flat tyre and screw the

filling hose (3) of the sealant bottle

onto the valve.

6. Ensure that the compressor is

switched OFF.

7. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

8. With the vehicle ON ( indica-

tor ON), switch on the compressor

and let it run for approximately

5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up

to proper pressure. (Refer to the

Tyre and Wheels, chapter 8).

The inflation pressure of the tyre

after filling is unimportant and will

be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the

tyre and stay away from the tyre

when filling it.

Securely install the sealant fill-

ing hose to the valve. If not,

sealant may flow backward,

possibly clogging the filling

hose.

CAUTION

OAE066027

OAE067040 OAEPH047541R

6-33

What to do in an emergency

9. Switch off the compressor.

10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tyre valve.

Return the Tyre Mobility Kit to its

storage location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10

minutes) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tyre.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Whilst driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

Checking the tyre inflation

pressure

1. After driving approximately 4~6

miles (7~10 km or about 10 min-

utes), stop at a safe location.

2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct-

ly into the compressor.

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tyre pressure is

below 29 psi (200 kpa). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tyre failure.

CAUTION

Do not leave your vehicle run-

ning in a poorly ventilated area

for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation can occur.

WARNING

OLMF064106

OAEPH067041

6-34

What to do in an emergency

3. Connect the other end of the filling

hose (3) directly into the tyre

valve.

4. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

5. Adjust the tyre inflation pressure

to the recommended tyre inflation.

With the ignition switched on, pro-

ceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure:

Switch on the compressor. To

check the current inflation pres-

sure setting, briefly switch off the

compressor.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure:

Press the button (9) on the com-

pressor.

Information

The pressure gauge may show higher

than actual reading when the com-

pressor is running. To get an accurate

tyre pressure, the compressor needs to

be turned off.

Information

When reinstalling the repaired or

replaced tyre and wheel on the vehi-

cle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13

kgf·m (79~94 lbf·ft).

Type B

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tyre Mobility Kit is a temporary fix

to the tyre and the tyre should be

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer as soon as possible.

Tyre pressure sensor

(if equipped with TPMS)

The sealant on the tyre pressure

sensor and wheel should be

removed when you replace the

tyre with a new one and inspect

the tyre pressure sensors at an

authorised repairerdealer.

CAUTION

OAEPH067008

OAE067040

6-35

What to do in an emergency

Introduction

With the Tyre Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tyre

puncture.

The compressor and sealing com-

pound system effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tyre caused by nails

or similar objects and reinflates the

tyre.

After you ensure that the tyre is

properly sealed you can drive cau-

tiously on the tyre (distance up to

120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed

of (50mph (80 km/h)) in order to

reach a service station or tyre dealer

for the tyre replacement.

It is possible that some tyres, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tyre may

adversely affect tyre performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle

is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in

use.

The Tyre Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tyre

repair method and is to be used for

one tyre only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tyre Mobility Kit".

When two or more tyres are flat,

do not use the tyre mobility kit

because the supported one

sealant of Tyre Mobility Kit is

only used for one flat tyre.

CAUTION

Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tyre

walls.This can result in an acci-

dent due to tyre failure.

WARNING

Have your tyre repaired as soon

as possible. The tyre may lose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tyre Mobility

Kit.

WARNING

Do not use the TMK if a tyre is

severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air

pressure.

Only punctured areas located

within the tread region of the

tyre can be sealed using the

TMK.

WARNING

6-36

Notes on the safe use of the

Tyre Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tyre Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you’re on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tyre Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car

tyres. Only punctured areas locat-

ed within the tread region of the

tyre can be sealed using the tyre

mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tyres.

• When the tyre and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tyre Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tyre damage larger

than approximately 6 mm (0.24

inch).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tyre

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tyre Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if a

tyre is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tyre.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tyre Mobility Kit

unattended whilst it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a

time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below

-30°C (-22°F).

• In case of skin contact with the

sealant, wash the area thoroughly

with plenty of water. If the irritation

persists, seek medical attention.

• In case of eye contact with the

sealant, flush your eyes for at least

15 minutes. If the irritation persists,

seek medical attention.

• In case of swallowing the sealant,

rinse the mouth and drink plenty of

water. However, never give any-

thing to an unconscious person

and seek medical attention imme-

diately.

• Long time exposure to the sealant

may cause damage to bodily tissue

such as kidney, etc.

What to do in an emergency

6-37

What to do in an emergency

1. Speed restriction label

2.Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

4. Connectors and cable for power

outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. ON/OFF switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tyre inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tyre inflation

pressure

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence,

otherwise the sealant may escape

under high pressure.

Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit

ODE067044

6-38

What to do in an emergency

Using the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).

2. Connect the filling hose (3) to the

sealant bottle (2) in the direction of

(A) and connect the sealant bottle

to the compressor (6) in the direc-

tion of (B).

3. Ensure that the compressor is

switched OFF.

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

WARNING

Detach the speed restriction

label (1) from the sealant bottle

(2), and place it in a highly visi-

ble place inside the vehicle

such as on the steering wheel

to remind the driver not to drive

too fast.

WARNING

OAE066014R

OIGH067042

Do not use the tyre sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tyre failure.

WARNING

6-39

What to do in an emergency

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective and screw

the filling hose (3) of the sealant

bottle onto the valve.

5. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

6. With the With the vehicle ON (

indicator ON), switch on the com-

pressor and let it run for approxi-

mately 5~7 minutes to fill the

sealant up to proper pressure.

(Refer to the Tyre and Wheels,

chapter 8). The inflation pressure

of the tyre after filling is unimpor-

tant and will be checked/corrected

later.

Be careful not to overinflate the

tyre and stay away from the tyre

when filling it.

Securely install the sealant fill-

ing hose to the valve. If not,

sealant may flow backward,

possibly clogging the filling

hose.

CAUTION

OAE066027

OAE067040 OAEPH047541R

6-40

7. Switch off the compressor.

8. Detach the hoses from the sealant

bottle connector and from the tyre

valve.

Return the Tyre Mobility Kit to its

storage location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

9. Immediately drive approximately

4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10

minutes) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tyre.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Whilst driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

Checking the tyre inflation

pressure

1. After driving approximately 4~6

miles (7~10 km or about 10 min-

utes), stop at a safe location.

2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct-

ly into the compressor.

What to do in an emergency

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tyre pressure is

below 200 kpa (29 psi). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tyre failure.

CAUTION

Do not leave your vehicle run-

ning in a poorly ventilated area

for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation can occur.

WARNING

OLMF064106

OAEPH067042

6-41

What to do in an emergency

3. Connect the other end of the fill-

ing hose (3) directly into the tyre

valve.

4. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

5. Adjust the tyre inflation pressure

to the recommended tyre inflation.

With the ignition switched on, pro-

ceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure:

Switch on the compressor. To

check the current inflation pres-

sure setting, briefly switch off the

compressor.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure:

Press the button (9) on the com-

pressor.

Do not let the compressor run for

more than 10 minutes, otherwise

the device will overheat and may

be damaged.

Information

The pressure gauge may show higher

than actual reading when the com-

pressor is running. To get an accurate

tyre pressure, the compressor needs to

be turned off.

NOTICE

If the inflation pressure is not

maintained, drive the vehicle a

second time, refer to

Distributing the sealant. Then

repeat steps 1 to 4.

Use of the TMK may be ineffec-

tual for tyre damage larger than

approximately 4 mm (0.16 in).

We recommend that you con-

tact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer if the tyre cannot be

made roadworthy with the Tyre

Mobility Kit.

CAUTION

OAE067040

6-42

Information

When reinstalling the repaired or

replaced tyre and wheel on the vehi-

cle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13

kgf·m (79~94 lbf·ft).

What to do in an emergency

Tyre pressure sensor

(if equipped with TPMS)

The sealant on the tyre pres-

sure sensor and wheel should

be removed when you replace

the tyre with a new one and

inspect the tyre pressure sen-

sors at an authorised repairer.

CAUTION

The tyre inflation pressure must

be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it

is not, do not continue driving.

Call for road side service or

towing.

WARNING

6-43

What to do in an emergency

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary,

we recommend having it done by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a

commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures

are necessary to prevent damage to

the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies

or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle

with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels

off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or sus-

pension components are damaged

or the vehicle is being towed with the

front wheels on the ground, use a

towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial

tow truck and wheel dollies are not

used, the front of the vehicle should

always be lifted, not the rear.

TTOOWWIINNGG

OAE066018

Dolly

• Do not tow the vehicle with the

front wheels on the ground as

this may cause damage to the

vehicle.

•

Do not tow with sling-type

equipment. Use wheel lift or

flatbed equipment.

CAUTION

OAE066020

OAE066019

6-44

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an

emergency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook

1. Open the boot, and remove the

towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover by press-

ing the lower part of the cover on

the bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is

fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and

install the cover after use.

Failure to place the shift lever in

N (Neutral) may cause internal

damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

OAE066021

OAE066022

OAE066028

■ Front

■ Rear

6-45

What to do in an emergency

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend you have it done by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a

commercial tow truck service.

If a towing service is not available in

an emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or

chain secured to the emergency tow-

ing hook at the front (or rear) of the

vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle with a cable or chain. A

driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done

only on hard-surfaced roads for a

short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train,

steering and brakes must all be in

good condition.

Always follow these emergency tow-

ing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the ACC

position so the steering wheel is

not locked.

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will

have reduced braking perform-

ance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your

own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other fre-

quently.

• Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-

aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady

and even force.

OAE066024

OAE066023

■ Front

■ Rear

6-46

What to do in an emergency

• Use a towing cable or chain less

than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a

white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12

inches) wide) in the middle of the

cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable

or chain remains tight during tow-

ing.

• Before towing, check the dual clutch

transmission for fluid leaks under

your vehicle.If the dual clutch trans-

mission fluid is leaking, flatbed

equipment or a towing dolly must be

used.

To avoid damage to your vehicle

and vehicle components when

towing:

• Always pull straight ahead

when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at

a vertical angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks

to pull a vehicle out of mud,

sand or other conditions from

which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own

power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to

10 mph (15 km/h) and drive

less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when

towing to avoid serious dam-

age to the dual clutch trans-

mission.

CAUTION

OAE066025

6-47

What to do in an emergency

Your vehicle is equipped with emer-

gency commodities to help you

respond to emergency situation.

Fire extinguisher

If there is small fire and you know

how to use the fire extinguisher, fol-

low these steps carefully.

1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of

the extinguisher that keeps the

handle from being accidentally

pressed.

2. Aim the nozzle towards the base

of the fire.

3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)

away from the fire and squeeze

the handle to discharge the extin-

guisher. If you release the handle,

the discharge will stop.

4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth

at the base of the fire.After the fire

appears to be out, watch carefully

since it may re-ignite.

First aid kit

Supplies for use in giving first aid

such as scissors, bandage and

adhesive tape, etc. are provided.

Triangle reflector

Place the triangle reflector on the

road to warn oncoming vehicles dur-

ing emergencies, such as when the

vehicle is parked by the roadside due

to problems.

Tyre pressure gauge

(if equipped)

Tyres normally lose some air in day-

to-day use, and you may have to add

a air periodically and usually it is not

a sign of a leaking tyre, but of normal

wear. Always check tyre pressure

when the tyres are cold because tyre

pressure increases with temperature.

To check the tyre pressure, take the

following steps:

1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap

that is located on the rim of the

tyre.

2. Press and hold the gauge against

the tyre valve. Some air will leak

as you begin and more will leak if

you don't press the gauge in firm-

ly.

3. A firm non-leaking push will acti-

vate the gauge.

4. Read the tyre pressure on the

gauge to see whether the tyre

pressure is low or high.

5. Adjust the tyre pressure to the

specified pressure.Refer to "Tyres

and Wheels" in chapter 8.

6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.

EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY CCOOMMMMOODDIITTYY ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Maintenance

Engine compartment .............................................7-3

Maintenance services ...........................................7-5

Owner's responsibility......................................................7-5

Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-5

Owner maintenance...............................................7-6

How to Disconnect the (-) Cable for

Regular Maintenance .......................................................7-6

Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-7

Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-8

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items...7-9

Engine oil ..............................................................7-11

Checking the engine oil level.......................................7-11

Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-12

Engine coolant/inverter coolant .......................7-13

Checking the coolant level ...........................................7-13

Changing coolant.............................................................7-16

Hybrid starter & generator (HSG) belt.............7-17

Checking the hybrid starter &

generator (HSG) belt......................................................7-17

Brake fluid ............................................................7-17

Checking the brake fluid level .....................................7-17

Washer fluid .........................................................7-18

Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-18

Parking brake .......................................................7-19

Checking the parking brake .........................................7-19

Air cleaner ............................................................7-19

Filter replacement...........................................................7-19

Climate control air filter .....................................7-21

Filter inspection...............................................................7-21

Wiper blades.........................................................7-23

Blade inspection ..............................................................7-23

Blade replacement ..........................................................7-23

Battery (12 volt, Plug-in hybrid vehicle).........7-25

For best battery service................................................7-26

Battery capacity label....................................................7-27

Battery recharging .........................................................7-27

Reset features .................................................................7-28

Tyres and wheels .................................................7-29

Tyre care...........................................................................7-29

Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures ...........7-30

Check tyre inflation pressure ......................................7-31

Tyre rotation ....................................................................7-32

Wheel alignment and tyre balance.............................7-33

Tyre replacement ............................................................7-33

Wheel replacement .........................................................7-34

Tyre traction ...................................................................7-34

Tyre maintenance ...........................................................7-35

Tyre sidewall labeling.....................................................7-35

Low aspect ratio tyres...................................................7-39

Fuses......................................................................7-40

Instrument panel fuse replacement ...........................7-41

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.........7-42

Fuse/relay panel description .......................................7-44

Light bulbs.............................................................7-54

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp

bulb replacement.............................................................7-55

Headlamp aiming .............................................................7-59

Daytime running lamp....................................................7-62

Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-62

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-63

Rear fog lamp ..................................................................7-68

High mounted stop lamp ...............................................7-68

License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-68

Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-68

Appearance care..................................................7-70

Exterior care ....................................................................7-70

Interior care......................................................................7-75

Emission control system .....................................7-77

Crankcase emission control system...........................7-78

Evaporative emission control system.........................7-78

Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-78

Procedure for entering forced

engine activation mode.......................................7-81

7-3

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Engine coolant cap

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Inverter coolant reservoir

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8.Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

9. Fuse box

OAE076001

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■

Hybrid vehicle

7-4

Maintenance

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Engine coolant cap

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Inverter coolant reservoir

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8.Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

9. Fuse box

OAEPH076001

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

7-5

Maintenance

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS

You should exercise the utmost care

to prevent damage to your vehicle

and injury to yourself whenever per-

forming any maintenance or inspec-

tion procedures.

We recommend you have your vehi-

cle maintained and repaired by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer. A

HYUNDAI authorised repairer meets

HYUNDAI’s high service quality

standards and receives technical

support from HYUNDAI in order to

provide you with a high level of serv-

ice satisfaction.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance service and record reten-

tion are the owner’s responsibility.

You should retain documents that

show proper maintenance has been

performed on your vehicle in accor-

dance with the scheduled mainte-

nance. You need this information to

establish your compliance with the

servicing and maintenance require-

ments of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is pro-

vided in your Warranty Booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as

a result of improper maintenance or

a lack of required maintenance are

not covered.

Owner maintenance precau-

tions

Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-

cient servicing may result in opera-

tional problems with your vehicle that

could lead to vehicle damage, an

accident, or personal injury. This

chapter provides instructions only for

the maintenance items that are easy

to perform. Several procedures can

be done only by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified

in any way. Such modifications may

adversely affect the performance,

safety or durability of your vehicle

and may, in addition, violate condi-

tions of the limited warranties cover-

ing the vehicle.

Improper owner maintenance dur-

ing the warranty period may affect

warranty coverage. For details,

read the separate Warranty Booklet

provided with the vehicle. If you're

unsure about any servicing or

maintenance procedure, we rec-

ommend that the system be serv-

iced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

NOTICE

7-6

Maintenance

OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

The following lists are vehicle checks

and inspections that should be per-

formed by the owner or a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer at the frequen-

cies indicated to help ensure safe,

dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your deal-

er as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle

checks are generally not covered by

warranties and you may be charged

for labour, parts and lubricants used.

How to Disconnect the (-)

Cable for Regular Maintenance

When the vehicle is under regular

maintenance, make sure to separate

the (-) cable before maintenance.

Separate the (-) cable following the

below instructions.

1. Fold the rear left side seat.

2. Remove the service cover (A) on

the luggage trim.

3. Separate the (-) cable (B).

Reassemble in the reverse order.

Performing maintenance work

on a vehicle can be dangerous.

If you lack sufficient knowledge

and experience or the proper

tools and equipment to do the

work, have it done by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ALWAYS follow these precau-

tions for performing mainte-

nance work:

• Park your vehicle on level

ground, move the shift lever

into the P (Park) position,

apply the parking brake and

place the ignition switch in

the LOCK/OFF position.

• Block the tyres (front and

back) to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jew-

ellery that can become entan-

gled in moving parts.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• If you must run the engine

during maintenance, do so

out doors or in an area with

plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-

ing materials away from the

battery and fuel-related parts.

OAE076073N

7-7

Maintenance

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the windscreen washer fluid

level.

• Check for low or under-inflated

tyres.

Whilst operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of

exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice if there is any

increased steering effort or loose-

ness in the steering wheel, or

change in its straight-ahead posi-

tion.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly

turns slightly or “pulls” to one side

when travelling on smooth, level

road.

• When stopping, listen and check

for unusual sounds, pulling to one

side, increased brake pedal travel

or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the

operation of your transmission

occurs, check the transmission

fluid level.

• Check the dual clutch transmission

P (Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air

conditioning system during or after

use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn

signals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tyres including the spare for tyres

that are worn, show uneven wear,

or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Autumn)

• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windscreen washer spray

and wiper operation. Clean wiper

blades with a clean cloth damp-

ened with washer fluid.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and

function.

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant/inverter coolant

level when the engine is hot.

This may result in coolant being

blown out of the opening and

cause serious burns and other

injuries.

WARNING

7-8

Maintenance

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and bonnet

hinges.

• Lubricate door and bonnet locks

and latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather

strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate daul clutch

transmission linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule

if the vehicle is usually operated where

none of the following conditions apply.

If any of the following conditions apply,

you must follow the Maintenance

Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated driving short distance of

less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal

temperature or less than 10miles

(16 km) in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or low

speed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,

unpaved, graveled or salt-spread

roads

• Driving in areas using salt or other

corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

• Drinving in heavy dust condition

• Driving in heavy traffic area

• Driving on uphill, downhill, or

mountain road repeatedly

• Towing a trailer or using a camper,

or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other

commercial use of vehicle towing

• Driving over 106 miles/h (170

km/h)

• Frequently driving in stop-and-go

condition

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should

inspect, replace or refill more fre-

quently than "Normal Maintenance

Schedule which is provided in your

Service Booklet."

SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS

7-9

Maintenance

EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule. If the

vehicle is being driven in severe con-

ditions, more frequent oil and filter

changes are required.

HSG (Hybrid starter & genera-

tor) belt

The HSG belt should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and dam-

age. We recommend a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer replace any dam-

aged or leaking parts immediately.

Fuel filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven,

damage the emission system and

cause multiple issues such as hard

starting. If an excessive amount of

foreign matter accumulates in the

fuel tank, the filter may require

replacement more frequently. After

installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for

leaks at the connections. Fuel filters

should be installed by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those inter-

vals specified in the maintenance

schedule. Make sure a new vapour

hose or fuel filler cap is correctly

replaced.

Air cleaner filter

A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter

is recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs

of the correct heat range.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components,

such as radiator, coolant reservoir,

hoses and connections for leakage

and damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

Engine coolant/inverter

coolant

The coolant should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

7-10

Maintenance

Dual clutch transmission fluid

The dual clutch transmission fluid

should be inspected according to the

intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Engine clutch actuator fluid

The engine clutch actuator fluid level

should be inspected or replaced to

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and

any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-

ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the

brake fluid reservoir.The level should

be between the MIN and the MAX

marks on the side of the reservoir.

Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-

forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi-

cation.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system

including the parking brake pedal

and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers

and rotors

Check the pads, the disc, and the

rotor for any excessive wear-out.

Inspect calipers for any fluid leakage.

For more information on checking

the pads or lining wear limit, refer to

the HYUNDAI web site.

(http://ser

vice.hyundai-motor.com)

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,

muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-

rioration, or damage. Start the

engine and listen carefully for any

exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as neces-

sary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections

for looseness or damage. Retighten

to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and the

hybrid system off, check for exces-

sive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or dam-

age. Check the dust boots and ball

joints for deterioration, cracks, or

damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and

clamps for cracks, deterioration, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts and, if necessary, repack the

grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and

connections for leakage and damage.

7-11

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s

precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground in P (Park) with the parking

brake set and the wheels blocked.

3.Turn the engine on and allow the

engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

4.Turn the hybrid system off and

wait about five minutes for the oil

to return to the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,

and re-insert it fully.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should

be between F (Full) and L (Low).

7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil

to bring the level to F.

To prevent damage to your engine:

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Add oil in small quantities and

recheck level to ensure engine

is not overfilled.

• Do not spill engine oil when

adding or changing engine oil.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil

from being spilled on engine

components. Wipe off spilled oil

immediately.

NOTICE

OAE076002

7-12

Maintenance

Use only the specified engine oil

(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants

and Capacities” in chapter 8).

Checking the engine oil and

filter

We recommend that the engine oil

and filter be changed by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

NOTICE

OAEPH076003

7-13

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT//IINNVVEERRTTEERR CCOOOOLLAANNTT

The high-pressure cooling system

has a reservoir filled with year-round

antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is

filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at

the beginning of the winter season

and before travelling to a colder cli-

mate.

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections

of all cooling system hoses and

heater hoses. Replace any swollen

or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between the MAX and the MIN

marks on the side of the coolant

reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) water to bring

the level to the MAX mark, but do not

overfill. If frequent additions are

required, we recommend that you

see a HYUNDAI authorised repairer

for a cooling system inspection.

OAE076005

OAE076004

■ Inverter coolant

■ Engine coolant

7-14

Maintenance

Information

The engine coolant and/or inverter

coolant level is influenced by the

hybrid system temperature. Before

checking or refilling the engine

coolant and/or inverter coolant, turn

the hybrid vehicle off.

Never remove the

engine coolant cap

and/or inverter coolant

cap or the drain plug

whilst the engine and

radiator are hot. Hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure, causing serious injury.

Turn the hybrid system off and

wait until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the engine coolant cap

and/or inverter coolant cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly

to the first stop. Step back whilst

the pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released,press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continue

turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

WARNING

OAE076006

OAE076007

■ Engine coolant cap

■ Inverter coolant cap

7-15

Maintenance

The electric motor for the cooling fan

is controlled by engine coolant tem-

perature, refrigerant pressure and

vehicle speed.As the engine coolant

temperature decreases, the electric

motor will automatically shut off.This

is a normal condition. If your vehicle

is equipped with GDI, the electric

motor for the cooling fan may begin

to operate at any time and continue

to operate until you disconnect the

negative battery cable.

The electric motor for

the cooling fan may

continue to operate

or start up when the

engine is not running

and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the rotating fan blades

of the cooling fan.

WARNING

Make sure the coolant cap is

properly closed after refilling

coolant. Otherwise the engine

could be overheated whilst

driving.

1. Check if the coolant cap label

is straight In front.

(Continued)

WARNING

OTL075062

■ Engine compartment front view

(Continued)

2. Make sure that the tiny pro-

trusions inside the coolant

cap is securely interlocked.

OAE06050

■ Engine compartment rear view

7-16

Maintenance

Recommended coolant

• When adding coolant, use only

distilled (deionized) water for your

vehicle and never mix hard water in

the coolant filled at the factory.

• An incorrect coolant mixture can

result in severe malfunction or

engine/hybrid system damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minium engine parts and must be

protected by an phosphate-based

ethylene glycol coolant to prevent

corrosion and freezing.

• Do not use alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the spec-

ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less

than 35% antifreeze, which would

reduce the effectiveness of the

solution.

For mixing percentage, refer to the

following table:

Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%

water and 50% antifreeze mix is the

easiest to mix together as it will be the

same quantity of each. It is suitable to

use for most temperature ranges of

-35°C (-31°F) and higher.

Changing coolant

We recommend that coolant be

changed by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

To prevent damage to engine parts,

put a thick towel around the engine

coolant cap and/or inverter coolant

cap before refilling the coolant to

prevent the coolant from overflow-

ing into engine parts, such as the

generator.

NOTICE

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windscreen and may

cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

Engine coolant may also cause

damage to paint and body trim.

WARNING

7-17

Maintenance

HHYYBBRRIIDD SSTTAARRTTEERR && GGEENNEERRAATTOORR ((HHSSGG)) BBEELLTT

Checking the hybrid starter &

generator (HSG) belt

We recommend that you have the

hybrid starter & generator (HSG)

belt inspected or replaced according

to the Maintenance Schedule by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Checking the brake fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir

periodically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap

and adding brake fluid, clean the

area around the reservoir cap thor-

oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-

ination.

• Turn the vehicle off whilst you

inspect the engine or hybrid

starter & generator(HSG) belt.

Otherwise it may result in

serious injury.

• Keep hands, clothing etc.

away from the hybrid starter &

generator (HSG) belt.

WARNING

When the HSG belt is worn out or

damaged, replace the belt.

Otherwise, it may cause engine

overheating or battery discharge.

CAUTION

OAE076008

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD

7-18

Maintenance

If the level is low, add the specified

brake fluid to the MAX level.The level

will fall with accumulated mileage.

This is a normal condition associated

with the wear of the brake linings. If

the fluid level is excessively low, we

recommend that the brake system

be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• Do not allow brake fluid to con-

tact the vehicle’s body paint, as

paint damage will result.

• Brake fluid, which has been

exposed to open air for an

extended time should NEVER be

used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be dis-

posed of properly.

• Do not use the wrong kind of

brake fluid. A few drops of miner-

al based oil,such as engine oil, in

your brake system can damage

brake system parts.

Information

Use only the specified brake fluid

Refer to “Recommended Lubricants

and Capacities” in chapter 8.

Checking the washer fluid

level

Check the fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-

sary. Plain water may be used if

washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

NOTICE

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD

OAE076009

If the brake system requires fre-

quent additions of fluid this

could indicate a leak in the

brake system. We recommend

that the vehicle be inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake fluid to come

in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid comes in contact

with your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least 15

minutes and get immediate

medical attention.

WARNING

7-19

Maintenance

Checking the parking brake

Foot type (if equipped)

Check whether the stroke is within

specification when the parking brake

pedal is depressed with 20 kg (44 lb,

196 N) of force. Also, the parking

brake alone should securely hold the

vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the

stroke is more or less than specified,

have the parking brake adjusted by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Stroke : 4~5 notch

Filter replacement

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned

for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,

as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be

replaced.

OAE056014R

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE

To prevent serious injury or

death, take the following safety

precautions when using washer

fluid:

• Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir. Engine coolant can

severely obscure visibility

when sprayed on the wind-

screen and may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident or damage to paint

and body trim.

• Do not allow sparks or flames

to contact the washer fluid or

the washer fluid reservoir.

Washer fluid may contain

alcohol and can be flamma-

ble.

• Do not drink washer fluid and

avoid contact with skin.

Washer fluid is poisonous to

humans and animals.

• Keep washer fluid away from

children and animals.

WARNING

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR

OAEPH076010

7-20

Maintenance

1.Loosen the air cleaner cover

attaching clips and open the cover.

2.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4.Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips.

5.Check that the cover is firmly

installed.

Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual rec-

ommended intervals (Refer to

“Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions” in this chapter).

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed.This will result in

excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner

filter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts.

Use of non-genuine parts could

damage the air flow sensor.

NOTICE

OAPH076011

OAE076012

7-21

Maintenance

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be

replaced according to the Maintenance

Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in

severely air-polluted cities or on

dusty rough roads for a long period,

it should be inspected more fre-

quently and replaced earlier. When

you replace the climate control air fil-

ter, replace it performing the follow-

ing procedure, and be careful to

avoid damaging other components.

1.With the glove box open, remove

the stoppers on both sides.

2. Remove the support rod (1).

OAE076014R OAE076013R

7-22

Maintenance

3. Press and hold the lock (1) on

both sides of the cover.

4. Pull out (2) the cover.

5. Replace the climate control air filter.

6. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

Install a new climate control air fil-

ter in the correct direction with the

arrow symbol (

↓↓

) facing down-

wards, otherwise, it may be noisy

and the effectiveness of the filter

may be reduced.

NOTICE

OHG070041OAE076015

7-23

Maintenance

WWIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS

Blade inspection

Contamination of either the wind-

screen or the wiper blades with for-

eign matter can reduce the effective-

ness of the windscreen wipers.

Common sources of contamination

are insects, tree sap, and hot wax

treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not

wiping properly, clean both the win-

dow and the blades with a clean

cloth dampened with washer fluid.

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, arms or other compo-

nents, do not:

• Use petrol, kerosene, paint thin-

ner, or other solvents on or near

them.

• Attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• Use non-specified wiper blades.

Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windscreen difficult to clean.

Information

Wiper blades are consumable items.

Normal wear of the wipers may not be

covered by your vehicle warranty.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean

adequately, the blades may be worn

or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manu-

ally.

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper mal-

function and failure.

NOTICE

7-24

Maintenance

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).

Then lift up the wiper blade (2).

3.Whilst pushing the lock (3), pull

down the wiper blade (4).

4. Remove the wiper blade from the

wiper arm (5).

5. Install a new wiper blade assem-

bly in the reverse order of removal.

6. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

screen.

OLF074017/H

OAD075074R

OAD075075R OAD075076R

7-25

Maintenance

BBAATTTTEERRYY ((1122 VVOOLLTT,, PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

• When you do not use the vehicle

for a long time in a low tempera-

ture area, disconnect the battery

and keep it indoors.

• Always charge the battery fully

to prevent battery case damage

in low temperature areas.

NOTICE

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always pres-

ent in battery cells, is

highly combustible, and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition switch

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

7-26

Maintenance

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with

petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-

tery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

Information -

For batteries

marked with UPPER and

LOWER

If your vehicle is equipped with a bat-

tery marked with LOWER (MIN) and

UPPER (MAX) on the side, you

should check the electrolyte level.

The electrolyte level should be

between LOWER (MIN) and UPPER

(MAX). When the electrolyte level is

low, add distilled (or de-mineralised)

water. (Never add sulfuric acids or

other electrolyte).

(continued)

Be careful not to spill distilled (or de-

mineralised) water over the battery

surface or other adjacent components.

Also, do not overfill the battery cells.

If not, it may corrode the battery or

other components. Finally, securely

close the cell cap. However, we recom-

mend you to contact an HYUNDAI

authorised repairer for better battery

service.

OAE076016

OHYK077011

7-27

Maintenance

Battery capacity label

❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

1.AGM60L-DIN : The HYUNDAI

model name of battery

2.12V : The nominal voltage

3.60Ah(20HR) :The nominal capacity

(in Ampere hours)

4.100RC : The nominal reserve

capacity (in min.)

5.640CCA : The cold-test current in

amperes by SAE

6.512A : The cold-test current in

amperes by EN

Battery recharging

By battery charger

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged

over a short time (because, for

example, the headlamps or interior

lights were left on whilst the vehicle

was not in use), recharge it by slow

charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electrical load

whilst the vehicle is being used,

recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

Always follow these instructions

when recharging your vehicle’s

battery to avoid the risk of SERI-

OUS INJURY or DEATH from

explosions or acid burns:

• Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat-

tery, turn off all accessories

and place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the OFF posi-

tion.

• Keep all flames, sparks, or

smoking materials away from

the battery.

• Always work outdoors or in an

area with plenty of ventilation.

• Wear eye protection when

checking the battery during

charging.

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in

a well ventilated area.

(Continued)

WARNING

OLMB073072

■ Example

7-28

Maintenance

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good bat-

tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-

utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle

may not restart if you shut it off

before the battery had a chance to

adequately recharge. See “Jump

Starting” in chapter 6 for more infor-

mation on jump starting procedures.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose of the bat-

tery according to your local

law(s) or regulations.

Reset features

The following items may need to be

reset after the battery has been dis-

charged or the battery has been dis-

connected.

See chapter 3 or 4 for:

• Power Windows

• Trip Computer

• Climate Control System

• Clock

• Audio System

• Sunroof

• Driver Position Memory System

(Continued)

• Watch the battery during

charging, and stop or reduce

the charging rate if the battery

cells begin boiling violently.

• The negative battery cable

must be removed first and

installed last when the battery

is disconnected. Disconnect

the battery charger in the fol-

lowing order:

(1) Turn off the battery charger

main switch.

(2) Unhook the negative

clamp from the negative

battery terminal.

(3) Unhook the positive clamp

from the positive battery

terminal.

•

Always use a genuine HYUNDAI

approved battery when you

replace the battery.

7-29

Maintenance

TTYYRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS

Tyre care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tyre

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

(Continued)

• Replace tyres that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are dam-

aged. Worn tyres can cause

loss of braking effectiveness,

steering control, or traction.

• ALWAYS replace tyres with

the same size as each tyre

that was originally supplied

with this vehicle. Using tyres

and wheels other than the rec-

ommended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

Tyre failure may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident. To reduce risk of

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,

take the following precautions:

• Inspect your tyres monthly for

proper inflation as well as

wear and damage.

• The recommended cold tyre

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and on

the tyre label located on the

driver’s side centre pillar.

Always use a tyre pressure

gauge to measure tyre pres-

sure. Tyres with too much or

too little pressure wear

unevenly causing poor han-

dling.

• Check the pressure of the

spare every time you check

the pressure of the other tyres

on your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

7-30

Maintenance

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver’s side centre

pillar.

Recommended cold tyre infla-

tion pressures

All tyre pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tyres are cold. “Cold tyres” means

the vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

1 mi. (1.6 km).

Warm tyres normally exceed recom-

mended cold tyre pressures by 4 to 6

psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air

from warm tyres to adjust the pres-

sure or the tyres will be under-inflat-

ed. For recommended inflation pres-

sure, refer to “Tyre and Wheels” in

chapter 8.

Recommended pressures must

be maintained for the best ride,

vehicle handling, and minimum

tyre wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tyre life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tyre failure that

could result in loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tyre failures that can

result in the loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

This risk is much higher on hot

days and when driving for long

periods at high speeds.

WARNING

OAE086002R

7-31

Maintenance

Check tyre inflation pressure

Check your tyres, including the spare

tyre, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tyre pressure

gauge to check tyre pressure. You

can not tell if your tyres are properly

inflated simply by looking at them.

Radial tyres may look properly inflat-

ed when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tyre

valve stem. Press the tyre gauge

firmly onto the valve to get a pres-

sure measurement. If the cold tyre

inflation pressure matches the rec-

ommended pressure on the tyre and

loading information label, no further

adjustment is necessary. If the pres-

sure is low, add air until you reach

the recommended pressure. Make

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. Without the valve

cap, dirt or moisture could get into

the valve core and cause air leakage.

If a valve cap is missing, install a new

one as soon as possible.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the

tyre pressure with the tyre gauge.Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. Without the valve

cap, dirt or moisture could get into

the valve core and cause air leakage.

If a valve cap is missing, install a new

one as soon as possible.

• Under-inflation results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation is also

possible. Keep your tyre pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tyre frequently needs refilling,

we recommend it be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• Over-inflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the centre of the tyre tread,

and a greater possibility of

damage from road hazards.

CAUTION

7-32

Maintenance

Tyre rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI

recommends that the tyres be rotat-

ed every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for

correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for

uneven wear and damage. Abnormal

wear is usually caused by incorrect

tyre pressure, improper wheel align-

ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe

braking or severe cornering. Look for

bumps or bulges in the tread or side

of the tyre. Replace the tyre if you

find any of these conditions. Replace

the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.

After rotation, be sure to bring the

front and rear tyre pressures to spec-

ification and check lug nut tightness

(proper torque is 11~13 kgf.m

[79~94 lbf.ft ]).

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

Information

The outside and inside of the unsym-

metrical tyre is distinguishable. When

installing an unsymmetrical tyre, be

sure to install the side marked "out-

side" face the outside. If the side

marked "inside" is installed on the

outside, it will have a negative effect

on vehicle performance.

CBGQ0706

ODH073802

■ With a full-size spare tyre (if equipped)

■ Without a spare tyre

• Do not use the compact spare

tyre for tyre rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tyres under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

WARNING

7-33

Maintenance

Wheel alignment and tyre bal-

ance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tyre

life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tyre

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Incorrect wheel weights can dam-

age your vehicle’s aluminium

wheels. Use only approved wheel

weights.

Tyre replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread

wear indicator will appear as a solid

band across the tread. This shows

there is less than 1/16 in.(1.6 mm) of

tread left on the tyre. Replace the

tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tyre.

NOTICE

OLMB073027

Tread wear indicator

To reduce the risk of DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY:

• Replace tyres that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tyres can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Always replace tyres with the

same size as each tyre that

was originally supplied with

this vehicle. Using tyres and

wheels other than the recom-

mended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

(Continued)

WARNING

7-34

Maintenance

Compact spare tyre replace-

ment (if equipped)

A compact spare tyre has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tyre.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tyre.

The replacement compact spare tyre

should be the same size and design

tyre as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tyre

wheel.The compact spare tyre is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tyre wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tyre.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tyre traction

Tyre traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tyres, tyres that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tyres should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

(Continued)

• When replacing tyres (or

wheels), it is recommended to

replace the two front or two

rear tyres (or wheels) as a

pair. Replacing just one tyre

can seriously affect your vehi-

cle’s handling.

• Tyres degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, HYUNDAI recommends

that tyres be replaced after six

(6) years of normal service.

• Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading condi-

tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow this

warning may cause sudden

tyre failure, which could lead

to a loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

The original tyre should be

repaired or replaced as soon as

possible to avoid failure of the

spare and loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.The com-

pact spare tyre is for emergency

use only. Do not operate your

vehicle over 50 mph (80 km/h)

when using the compact spare

tyre.

WARNING

7-35

Maintenance

Tyre maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tyres installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

Tyre sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tyre and also provides

the tyre identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tyre in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

2.Tyre size designation

A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tyres for your car.The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tyre size designation

mean.

Example tyre size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tyre size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

195/65R15 91H

195 - Tyre width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

91 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tyre can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

OLMB073028

5,6

7-36

Maintenance

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one.The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5JX16

6.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tyre speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger vehicle tyres.

The speed rating is part of the tyre

size designation on the sidewall of

the tyre.This symbol corresponds to

that tyre’s designed maximum safe

operating speed.

3. Checking tyre life

(TIN :Tyre Identification

Number)

Any tyres that are over six years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tyre) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tyre

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tyre consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT shows a

plant code number, tyre size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1518 represents

that the tyre was produced in the

15th week of 2018.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

Maximum Speed

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

7-37

Maintenance

4.Tyre ply composition and

material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tyre. Tyre

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tyre, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D“ means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tyre.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tyre and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tyre. When

replacing the tyres on the vehicle,

always use a tyre that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tyre.

7. Uniform tyre quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tyre sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tyre when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course.For example, a tyre

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tyre graded

100.

The relative performance of tyres

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

sidewalls of passenger vehicle tyres.

The tyres available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

7-38

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tyre’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tyre’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tyre to

degenerate and reduce tyre life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perform-

ance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

The traction grade assigned to

this tyre is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tyre is established for a tyre that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, over-inflation,

or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination,

can cause heat build-up and

possible sudden tyre failure.

This may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

7-39

Maintenance

Low aspect ratio tyres

The aspect ratio is lower than 50 on

low aspect ratio tyres.

Because low aspect ratio tyres are

optimised for handling and braking,

their sidewall is a little stiffer than a

standard tyre. Also low aspect ratio

tyres tend to be wider and conse-

quently have a greater contact patch

with the road surface. In some

instances they may generate more

road noise compared with standard

tyres.

The side wall of a low aspect

ratio tyre is shorter than the

nor- mal one. Thus, the low-

aspect wheel and tyre are easily

dam- aged. Follow the below

instructions.

• When driving on a rough road

or driving off a road, be care-

ful not to damage the tyres

and wheels. After driving,

inspect the tyres and wheels.

• When passing over a pothole,

speed bump,manhole, or kerb

stone, drive the vehicle slowly

so as not to damage the tyres

and wheels.

• When there is an impact on a

tyre, inspect the tyre condi-

tion. Or, we recommend that

you contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

(Continued)

CAUTION

(Continued)

• Inspect the tyre condition and

pressure every 1,800 miles

(3,000 km) to prevent a tyre

damage.

• It is difficult to recognise a tyre

damage only with your eyes.

When there is a slight hint of a

tyre damage, check and

replace the tyre to prevent the

damage caused by air leakage.

• When a tyre is damaged

whilst driving on a rough

road, off a road, or over obsta-

cles, such as a pothole, man-

hole, or kerb stone, your war-

ranty does not cover the dam-

age.

• The tyre information is speci-

fied on the tyre side wall.

7-40

Maintenance

FFUUSSEESS

A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-

tected from electrical overload dam-

age by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,

one located in the driver’s side panel

bolster, the other in the engine com-

partment.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check

the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse

has blown, the element inside the

fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not

work, first check the driver’s side

fuse panel. Before replacing a blown

fuse, turn the engine and all switches

off, and then disconnect the negative

battery cable. Always replace a

blown fuse with one of the same rat-

ing.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid

using the system involved and immedi-

ately consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Information

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade

type for lower amperage rating, car-

tridge type, and multi fuse for higher

amperage ratings.

Normal

■ Blade type

■ Cartridge type

Blown

Normal

Blown

Normal

Blown

OLF074075

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove

fuses because it may cause a

short circuit and damage the

system.

CAUTION

NEVER replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly

cause a fire.

• Do not install a wire or alu-

minium foil instead of the

proper fuse - even as a tem-

porary repair. It may cause

extensive wiring damage and

possibly a fire.

WARNING

Normal

Blown

■ Multi fuse

7-41

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1.Turn the vehicle off.

2.Turn all other switches off.

3. Open the fuse panel cover.

4. Refer to the label on the inside of

the fuse panel cover to locate the

suspected fuse location.

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool provided

in the engine compartment fuses

panel.

6. Check the removed fuse;replace it

if it is blown. Spare fuses are pro-

vided in the instrument panel fuse

panels (or in the engine compart-

ment fuse panel).

7. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips.If it fits loosely, we rec-

ommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

In an emergency, if you do not have

a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same

rating from a circuit you may not

need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlamps or other electrical

components do not work and the

fuses are undamaged, check the

fuse panel in the engine compart-

ment. If a fuse is blown, it must be

replaced with the same rating.

OAE076017R

OAE076018

7-42

Maintenance

Fuse switch

Always, place the fuse switch to the

ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF

position, some items such as the

audio system and digital clock must

be reset and the smart key may not

work properly.

Information

If the fuse switch is OFF, “Turn on

FUSE SWITCH” message will appear.

• Always place the fuse switch in

the ON position whilst driving

the vehicle.

• Do not move the transportation

fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse

switch may be damaged.

Engine compartment panel

fuse replacement

1.Turn the vehicle off.

2.Turn all other switches off.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

NOTICE

OAE076023

OAE076024

■ Blade type fuse

■ Cartridge type fuse

OAE076019R OLFH044149L

7-43

Maintenance

4. Check the removed fuse;replace it

if it is blown. To remove or insert

the fuse, use the fuse puller in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips.If it fits loosely, we rec-

ommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

After checking the fuse panel in

the engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. You

may hear a clicking sound if the

cover is securely latched. If it is

not securely latched, electrical

failure may occur from water con-

tact.

Main fuse

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

The electronic system may not func-

tion correctly even when the fuses

located in the engine compartment

and instrument panel are not discon-

nected. In such case, the cause of the

problem may be disconnection of the

main fuse (BFT type), which is located

inside the positive battery terminal (+)

cap. Since the main fuse is designed

more intricately than other parts, we

recommend you visit the nearest

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Information

After inspection always securely

install the battery cap. If it is not

securely latched, electrical failure may

occur from water contact.

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1.Turn the vehicle off.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling it up.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Information

If the multi fuse is blown, we recom-

mend that you consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

NOTICE

OAE076021

OAE076022

7-44

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

Instrument panel fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-

ing fuse/relay names and ratings.

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your

vehicle; the information is accurate at

the time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to

the fuse box label.

OAE076025R

OAE076053L

7-45

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Module 5

MODULE

10A

Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio, Driver IMS Module, A/T Shift Lever

Indicator, A/C Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module, Console Switch LH/RH,

Head Lamp Levelling Device Actuator LH/RH, Vess Unit, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control

Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module

Module 4

MODULE

10A

Lane Departure Warning Unit, Crash Pad Switch, FCA Unit,

Blind-Spot Collision Warning Radar LH/RH

Interior Lamp 10A

Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Ignition Key ILL. & Door

Warning Switch, Luggage Lamp

Airbag 15A SRS Control Module

Ignition 1

IG1

25A PCB Block

Cluster

CLUSTER

10A Instrument Cluster

Module 3

MODULE

10A BCM, DCT Shift Lever, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module

Memory 2

MEMORY

7.5A Active Air Flap LH/RH

Module 8

MODULE

10A

Active Air Flap LH/RH, Electric Water Pump (HEV), VPD Sensor, BMS Control Module,

E/R Junction Block

Airbag

Indicator

IND

7.5A A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster

Start 7.5A Burglar Alarm Relay, Transaxle Range Switch

7-46

Maintenance

Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Module 2

MODULE

10A

E/R Junction Block, Wireless Charger Unit, BCM, USB Charging Connector, Smart Key Control

Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP

Button Start 3

7.5A Immobiliser Module, Smart Key Control Module

Memory 1

MEMORY

10A

Wireless Charger Unit, Instrument Cluster, Driver Ims Module, Rain Sensor, BCM, A/C Control

Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module,

ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)

Multi Media

MULTI

MEDIA

10A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

Electric Water

Pump

EWP

10A Electric Water Pump (HEV)

Electric Power

Steering 1

7.5A EPS Unit

Tailgate 10A Tail Gate Relay, Fuel Filler Switch, Fuel Filler Actuator

Button Start 1

15A Smart Key Control Module

Module 7

MODULE

7.5A

Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module,

Rear Seat Warmer Module

Heated

Steering

15A BCM

Sunroof 20A Sunroof Motor

Power Window

Right-hand

25A

Power Window (RH) Relay, Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch

(LHD), Rear Power Window Switch (RH), Driver Safety Power Window Module (LHD),

Passenger Power Window Switch (RHD)

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-47

Maintenance

Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Power Window

Left-hand

25A

Power Window (LH) Relay, Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch

(RHD), Rear Power Window Switch (LH), Driver Safety Power Window Module (RHD),

Passenger Power Window Switch (LHD)

Button Start 2

7.5A Immobiliser Module, Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch

Brake Switch

BRAKE

SWITCH

7.5A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module

Air conditioner 7.5A Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Electronic A/C Compressor, E/R Junction Block

Washer 15A Multifunction Switch

Seat Heater

Rear

25A Rear Seat Warmer Module

Battery

Management

System

BATTER

MANAG-

EMENT

10A BMS Control Module

Power Seat

Driver

DRV

30A Driver Seat Manual Switch

AMP

30A AMP

AMS

30A Battery Sensor

Module 1

MODULE

10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror

Door Lock 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-48

Maintenance

Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Wiper Front 2

FRT2

10A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)

Module 6

MODULE

7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module

Seat Heater

Front

FRT

25A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

Heated Mirror 10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module

Rear Heated 25A Rear Defogger (+) (Upper)

Wiper Front 1

FRT1

30A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-49

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-

ing fuse/relay names and ratings.

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your

vehicle; the information is accurate at

the time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to

the fuse panel label.

OAE076026

OAE076069L

7-50

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Multi Fuse

MAIN

150A Low Voltage DC-DC Converter, E/R Junction Block

60A PCB Block

60A IGPM

50A IGPM

60A Engine Room Junction Block

50A Engine Room Junction Block

40A Engine Room Junction Block

IG1

40A

Without Smart Key : Ignition Switch

With Smart Key : E/R Junction Block

IG2

40A

Without Smart Key : Ignition Switch

With Smart Key : E/R Junction Block

80A EPS Unit

PTC

HEATER

50A Engine Room Junction Block

7-51

Maintenance

Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Multi Fuse

PTC

HEATER

50A Engine Room Junction Block

CLUTCH

ACTUATOR

40A Clutch Actuator

Fuse

DCT

15A TCM

HPCU

10A HPCU

EWP

10A Electric Water Pump (HEV)

40A IGPM

DCT

40A TCM

DCT

40A TCM

10A Engine Room Junction Block

ACTIVE

HYDRAULIC

BOSSTER

40A Multipurpose Check Connector, IBAU

ACTIVE

HYDRAULIC

BOSSTER

30A Multipurpose Check Connector, IBAU

POWER

OUTLET

40A Engine Room Junction Block

B/UP

LAMP

10A Audio, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror

Engine compartment fuse panel

7-52

Maintenance

Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Fuse

POWER

OUTLET

20A Cigarette Lighter

POWER

OUTLET

20A Power Outlet

15A IGPM, Rear Defogger (+) (Lower)

10A Engine Room Junction Block, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Mass Air Flow Sensor

20A ECM

15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)

IGN

COIL

20A Ignition Coil #1~#4

15A ECM

10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay

10A ECM

HPCU

15A HPCU, Clutch Actuator (HEV)

ACTIVE

HYDRAULIC

BOSSTER

10A Multipurpose Check Connector, IBAU

DCT

15A DCT Shift Lever, TCM, Transaxle Range Switch

Engine compartment fuse panel

7-53

Maintenance

Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected

Fuse

10A

Fuel Pump Relay, Camshaft Position Sensor #1 (Intake), Camshaft Position Sensor #2

(Exhaust), Oil Control Valve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust)

BATTERY

C/FAN

15A Engine Room Junction Block

FUEL

PUMP

20A Fuel Pump Relay

20A Horn Relay

Engine compartment fuse panel

7-54

Maintenance

LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS

Consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer to replace most vehicle light

bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle

light bulbs because other parts of the

vehicle must be removed before you

can get to the bulb.This is especially

true for removing the headlamp

assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electric

wiring system.

Information

After heavy driving rain or washing,

the lamps could appear frosty. This

condition is caused by the temperature

difference between the lamp inside and

the outside temperature. This is similar

to the condensation on your windows

inside your vehicle when raining and

doesn’t indicate a problem with your

vehicle. If the water leaks into the light

bulb circuitry, have your vehicle

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Information

• A normally functioning lamp may

flicker momentarily to stabilize the

vehicle’s electrical control system.

However, if the lamp goes out after

flickering momentarily, or contin-

ues to flicker, we recommend the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• The position lamp may not turn on

when the position lamp switch is

turned on, but the position lamp

and headlamp switch may turn on

when the headlamp switch is turned

on. This may be caused by network

failure or vehicle electrical control

system malfunction. If this occurs,

we recommend the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

NOTICE

Prior to working on a light, firmly

apply the parking brake, ensure

that the ignition switch is in the

LOCK/OFF position and turn off

the lights to avoid sudden move-

ment of the vehicle and burning

your fingers or receiving an elec-

tric shock.

WARNING

7-55

Maintenance

Headlamp, position lamp,

turn signal lamp bulb replace-

ment

Type A

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Turn signal lamp

(4) Position lamp

• Always handle them carefully, and

avoid scratches and abrasions. If

the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with

liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare

hands. Residual oil may cause the

bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

Information

Traffic Change

The low beam light distribution is

asymmetric. If you go abroad to a

country with opposite traffic direc-

tion, this asymmetric part will dazzle

oncoming car driver. To prevent daz-

zle, ECE regulation demand several

technical solutions (ex. automatic

change system, adhesive sheet, down

aiming). This headlamps are designed

not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you

need not change your headlamps in a

country with opposite traffic direc-

tion.

OAE076028

• Handle halogen bulbs with

care. Halogen bulbs contain

pressurized gas that will pro-

duce flying pieces of glass

that could cause injuries if

broken.

• Wear eye protection when

changing a bulb. Allow the

bulb to cool down before han-

dling it.

WARNING

OAE076052

7-56

Maintenance

Headlamp and position lamp

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the bulb cover (1) by turn-

ing it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the bulb socket-con-

nector. (for low beam and high

beam)

5. Remove the bulb from the head-

lamp assembly.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Connect the bulb socket-connec-

tor. (for low beam and high beam)

8. Install the bulb cover (1) by turning

it clockwise.

Information

The headlamp aiming should be

adjusted after an accident or after the

headlamp assembly is reinstalled at a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Turn signal lamp

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4.Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

OAE076030

High beam

Position lamp

Low beam

OAE076031

7-57

Maintenance

5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it

locks into place.

6.Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

7.Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

Type B

(1) Headlamp (Low/High)

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Position lamp

Headlamp and position lamp

If the light bulb does not operate, we

recommended that you have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Information

If your vehicle is equipped with High

Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps,

these headlamps contain mercury. So

if you need to have your vehicle dis-

posed, you should remove the HID

Headlamps before disposal. The

removed HID headlamps should be

recycled, re-used or disposed as haz-

ardous waste.

OAE076029

HID headlamp

Do not attempt to replace or

inspect the low beam (XENON

bulb) due to electric shock dan-

ger. If the low beam (XENON

bulb) is not working, have your

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

WARNING

7-58

Maintenance

Information

HID lamps have superior perform-

ance vs. halogen bulbs.

HID lamps are estimated by the man-

ufacturer to last twice as long or

longer than halogen bulbs depending

on their frequency of use. They will

probably require replacement at some

point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling

the headlamps on and off more than

typical use will shorten HID lamps

life. HID lamps do not fail in the same

manner as halogen incandescent

lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a

period of operation but will immedi-

ately relight when the headlamp

switch is cycled it is likely the HID

lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-

ing components are more complex

than conventional halogen bulbs thus

have higher replacement cost.

Information

The headlamp aiming should be

adjusted after an accident or after the

headlamp assembly is reinstalled at a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Information

Traffic Change (For Europe)

The low beam light distribution is

asymmetric. If you go abroad to a

country with opposite traffic direc-

tion, this asymmetric part will dazzle

oncoming car driver. To prevent daz-

zle, ECE regulation demand several

technical solutions (ex. automatic

change system, adhesive sheet, down

aiming). This headlamps are designed

not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you

need not change your headlamps in a

country with opposite traffic direc-

tion.

Turn signal lamp

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4.Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

OAE076032

7-59

Maintenance

5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it

locks into place.

6.Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots into the assembly.

7.Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

Headlamp aiming

1. Inflate the tyres to the specified

pressure and remove any loads

from the vehicle except the driver,

spare tyre, and tools.

2.The vehicle should be placed on a

flat floor.

3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines

passing through respective head

lamp centres) and a horizontal line

(Horizontal line passing through

centre of head lamps) on the

screen.

4.With the headlamp and battery in

normal condition, aim the head-

lamps so the brightest portion falls

on the horizontal and vertical

lines.

5.To aim the low beam left or right,

turn the driver clockwise or coun-

terclockwise. To aim the low beam

up or down, turn the driver clock-

wise or counterclockwise.

To aim the high beam up or down,

turn the driver clockwise or coun-

terclockwise.

• Type A

• Type B

• Type A

OAE076056L/OAE076058L

■ Without headlight levelling device

■ With headlight levelling device

OAE076057L/OAE076059L

7-60

Maintenance

Unit: mm (in)

■ Type A

Aiming point

OAE076068L

Vehicle condition H1 H2

W1 W2

Without driver

714

(28.11)

688

(27.08)

1,463

(57.59)

1,238

(48.74)

With driver

707

(27.83)

681

(26.81)

1,463

(57.59)

1,238

(48.74)

Vehicle condition H1 H2 W1 W2

Without driver

709

(27.91)

709

(27.91)

1,454

(57.24)

1,454

(57.24)

With driver

702

(27.63)

702

(27.63)

1,454

(57.24)

1,454

(57.24)

■ Type B

H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb centre and ground (Low beam)

H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb centre and ground (High beam)

W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centres (Low beam)

W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centres (High beam)

7-61

Maintenance

Headlamp low beam

1.Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.

2.The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.

3.When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.

4. If headlamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch to “0”.

:

&DUD[LV

9HUWLFDOOLQHRIOHIW

KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU

&XWRIIOLQH

9HUWLFDOOLQHRIULJKW

KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU

+RUL]RQWDOOLQHRI

KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU

*5281'



+

/RZEHDP

OAE076061L

■ Based on 10m screen

7-62

Maintenance

Daytime running lamp

If the LED lamp does not operate, we

recommended that you have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Side repeater lamp replace-

ment

Type A

1. Remove the lamp assembly from

the vehicle by prying the lens and

pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical con-

nector.

3. Separate the socket and the lens

parts by turning the socket coun-

terclockwise until the tabs on the

socket align with the slots on the

lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the

lens part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical con-

nector.

8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

OAE076049

OAE076033

7-63

Maintenance

Type B

If the LED lamp does not operate, we

recommended that you have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Rear combination lamp bulb

replacement

Type A

(1) Tail/Stop lamp

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Tail lamp

(4) Backup lamp

Tail/Stop lamp and turn signal lamp

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Open the tailgate.

3. Open the lamp assembly retaining

screw covers.

4. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-

ing screws with a cross-tip screw-

driver.

OAE076034

OAE076035

OAE076037

7-64

Maintenance

5.Remove the rear combination

lamp assembly from the body of

the vehicle.

6.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

9. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the assem-

bly. Push the socket into the

assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to

the body of the vehicle.

OAE076038 OAE076039

Tail/Stop lamp

Turn signal lamp

7-65

Maintenance

Tail lamp and backup lamp

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Open the tailgate.

3. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

6. Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

7. Reinstall the service cover.

Type B

(1) Tail/Stop lamp

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Tail lamp

(4) Backup lamp

Tail/Stop lamp

If the LED lamp does not operate, we

recommended that you have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

OAE076036

OAE076041 OAE076042

Backup lamp

7-66

Maintenance

Turn signal lamp

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Open the tailgate.

3. Open the lamp assembly retaining

screw covers.

4. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-

ing screws with a cross-tip screw-

driver.

5.Remove the rear combination

lamp assembly from the body of

the vehicle.

6.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on the

assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket.

Pull the bulb out of the socket.

8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it

locks into place.

OAE076040OAE076038OAE076037

7-67

Maintenance

9. Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly. Push

the socket into the assembly and

turn the socket clockwise.

10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to

the body of the vehicle

Backup lamp

1.Turn off the engine.

2. Open the tailgate.

3. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.

4.Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

7. Install the socket into the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the service cover.

OAE076042

Backup lamp

OAE076041

7-68

Maintenance

Rear fog lamp

If the LED lamp does not operate, we

recommended that you have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

High mounted stop lamp

If the high mounted stop lamp does not

operate, we recommend that you con-

tact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

License plate light bulb

replacement

1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens cover from the

lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Interior light bulb replacement

Map lamp and room lamp

If the LED lamp does not operate, we

recommend that you have the vehi-

cle checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

OAE076044

OAEE076026

OAEE076027

■ Map lamp (LED type)

■ Room lamp (LED type)

OAE076043

7-69

Maintenance

1.Using a flat-head screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-

or light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb into the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap

the lens into place.

Use care not to dirty or damage

lenses, lens tabs, and plastic

housings.

NOTICE

■ Vanity mirror lamp

■ Luggage compartment lamp

OAE076048

OAE076047

■ Map lamp (Bulb type)

OAE076045

OAE076046

■ Room lamp (Bulb type)

Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compart-

ment lamp

7-70

Maintenance

AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning

and caution statements that appear

on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-

ers, make sure to maintain suffi-

cient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive

pressure can lead to component

damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors

or its surrounding area directly with

a high pressure washer. Shock

applied from high pressure water

may cause the device to not oper-

ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or plastic covers) or

connectors as they may be dam-

aged if they come into contact with

high pressure water.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish

from rust and deterioration, wash it

thoroughly and frequently at least

once a month with lukewarm or cold

water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road

driving, you should wash it after each

off-road trip. Pay special attention to

the removal of any accumulation of

salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign

materials. Make sure the drain holes

in the lower edges of the doors and

rocker panels are kept clear and

clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar

deposits can damage your vehicle’s

finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain

water may not completely remove all

these deposits. A mild soap, safe for

use on painted surfaces, should be

used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes whilst driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water before getting on the

road. If braking performance is

impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly whilst

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

WARNING

7-71

Maintenance

• Do not use strong soap, chemi-

cal detergents or hot water, and

do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the

side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through

the windows and wet the interi-

or.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts, do not clean with chemi-

cal solvents or strong deter-

gents.

• To prevent damage to the charg-

ing door, make sure to close and

lock the vehicle doors when

washing (high-pressure wash-

ing, automatic car washing, etc.)

the vehicle.

• Water washing in the engine

compartment including high

pressure water washing may

cause the failure of electrical cir-

cuits located in the engine com-

partment.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier

between your paint and contaminate.

Keeping a good coat of wax on your

vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle

before waxing. Use a good quality

liquid or paste wax, and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all

metal trim to protect it and to main-

tain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-

als with a spot remover will usually

strip the wax from the finish. Be sure

to re-wax these areas even if the rest

of the vehicle does not yet need wax-

ing.

NOTICE

OAE076051

7-72

Maintenance

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plat-

ed or anodized aluminium parts.

This may result in damage to the

protective coating and cause

discolouration or paint deterio-

ration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly

rust and may develop into a major

repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and

requires any metal repair or

replacement, be sure the body

shop applies anti-corrosion mate-

rials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or

other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-

metal parts from corrosion, apply a

coating of wax or chrome preser-

vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts

with a heavier coating of wax or

preservative. If necessary, coat the

parts with non-corrosive petroleum

jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may

collect on the underbody. If these

materials are not removed, acceler-

ated rusting can occur on underbody

parts such as the fuel lines, frame,

floor pan and exhaust system, even

though they have been treated with

rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-

body and wheel openings with luke-

warm or cold water once a month,

after off-road driving and at the end

of each winter. Pay special attention

to these areas because it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have

drain holes that should not be

allowed to clog with dirt; trapped

water in these areas can cause rust-

ing.

NOTICENOTICE

7-73

Maintenance

Aluminium wheel maintenance

The aluminium wheels are coated

with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or

wire brushes on aluminium

wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has

cooled.

(Continued)

• Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughly

with water. Also, clean the

wheels after driving on salted

roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with

high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners con-

taining acid or alkaline deter-

gents.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design

and construction practices to combat

corrosion, HYUNDAI produces vehi-

cles of the highest quality. However,

this is only part of the job.To achieve

the long-term corrosion resistance

your vehicle can deliver, the owner’s

cooperation and assistance is also

required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-

sion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath

the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective

coatings by stones, gravel, abra-

sion or minor scrapes and dents

which leave unprotected metal

exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-

cle is regularly exposed to corrosive

materials, corrosion protection is

particularly important. Some of the

common causes of accelerated cor-

rosion are road salts, dust control

chemicals, ocean air and industrial

pollution.

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes whilst driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water. If braking performance

is impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly whilst

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

WARNING

7-74

Maintenance

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in

which corrosion is most likely to

occur. For example, corrosion is

accelerated by high humidity, partic-

ularly when temperatures are just

above freezing. In such conditions,

the corrosive material is kept in con-

tact with the vehicle surfaces by

moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because

it is slow to dry and holds moisture in

contact with the vehicle.Although the

mud appears to be dry, it can still

retain moisture and promote corro-

sion.

High temperatures can also acceler-

ate corrosion of parts that are not

properly ventilated so the moisture

can be dispersed. For all these rea-

sons, it is particularly important to

keep your vehicle clean and free of

mud or accumulations of other mate-

rials.This applies not only to the vis-

ible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is

to keep your vehicle clean and free

of corrosive materials. Attention to

the underside of the vehicle is partic-

ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near

the ocean, areas with industrial

pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent

corrosion. In winter, hose off the

underside of your vehicle at least

once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the

vehicle, pay particular attention to

the components under the fenders

and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just

dampening the accumulated mud

rather than washing it away will

accelerate corrosion rather than

prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly

effective in removing accumulated

mud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members,

be sure that drain holes are kept

open so that moisture can escape

and not be trapped inside to accel-

erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don’t park your vehicle in a damp,

poorly ventilated garage. This cre-

ates a favorable environment for cor-

rosion. This is particularly true if you

wash your vehicle in the garage or

drive it into the garage when it is still

wet or covered with snow, ice or

mud.Even a heated garage can con-

tribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish

should be covered with "touch-up"

paint as soon as possible to reduce

the possibility of corrosion. If bare

metal is showing through, the atten-

tion of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings are highly corrosive

and may damage painted surfaces in

just a few hours. Always remove bird

droppings as soon as possible.

7-75

Maintenance

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-

tacting the interior parts because

they may cause damage or dis-

colouration. If they do contact the

interior parts, wipe them off immedi-

ately. See the instructions for the

proper way to clean vinyl.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

• When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alco-

hol content solutions. If you use

high alcohol content solutions

or acid/ alkaline detergents, the

colour of the leather may fade or

the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and

interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from

vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a

vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-

ric with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-

tion recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-

diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If

fresh spots do not receive immediate

attention, the fabric can be stained

and its colour can be affected. Also,

its fire-resistant properties can be

reduced if the material is not proper-

ly maintained.

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may

affect the fabric’s appearance and

fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

• Features of seat leather

- Leather is made from the outer

skin of an animal, which goes

through a special process to be

available for us. Since it is a natu-

ral product, each part differs in

thickness or density. Wrinkles

may appear as a natural result of

stretching and shrinking depend-

ing on the temperature and

humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable

fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are

curved and the side supporting

area is high which provides driv-

ing comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally

from usage. It is not a fault of the

product.

NOTICE

7-76

Maintenance

• Wrinkles or abrasions which

appear naturally from usage are

not covered by warranty.

• Belts with metallic accessories,

zippers or keys inside the back

pocket may damage the seat

fabric.

• Make sure not to wet the seat. It

may change the nature of natu-

ral leather.

• Jeans or clothes which could

bleach may contaminate the sur-

face of the seat covering fabric.

• Caring for the leather seats

- Vacuum the seat periodically to

remove dust and sand on the

seat. It will prevent abrasion or

damage of the leather and main-

tain its quality.

- Wipe the natural leather seat

cover often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of a proper leather protector

may prevent abrasion of the

cover and helps maintain the

colour. Be sure to read the

instructions and consult a spe-

cialist when using leather coating

or protective agents.

- Light coloured (beige, cream

beige) leather is easily contami-

nated and the stain is noticeable.

Clean the seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth.It may

cause the surface to crack.

• Cleaning the leather seats

- Remove all contaminations

instantly. Refer to instructions

below for removal of each con-

taminant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,

foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth

and wipe the contaminated spot.

Wipe off the cream with a wet

cloth and remove water with a dry

cloth.

- Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral

detergent and wipe until contami-

nations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with

absorbable cloth and wipe with

stain remover used only for natu-

ral leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and

remove gradually.

NOTICE

7-77

Maintenance

Cleaning the seat belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow

the instructions provided with the

soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the

webbing because this may weaken

the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window

glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the

vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-

ered with an oily, greasy or waxy

film), they should be cleaned with

glass cleaner. Follow the directions

on the glass cleaner container.

Do not scrape or scratch the

inside of the rear window. This

may result in damage to the rear

window defroster grid.

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty

information contained in the

Warranty Booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system to meet all

applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control

systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-

tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-

tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to ensure the proper func-

tion of the emission control systems,

it is recommended that you have

your vehicle inspected and main-

tained by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer in accordance with the main-

tenance schedule.

For the Inspection and Maintenance

Test (with Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-

ing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by

pressing the ESC switch (ESC

OFF light illuminated).

• After dynamometer testing is

completed, turn the ESC system

back on by pressing the ESC

switch again.

NOTICE

EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM

7-78

Maintenance

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation

system is employed to prevent air

pollution caused by blow-by gases

being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air

to the crankcase through the air

intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by

gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapours from escaping into the

atmosphere.

Canister

Fuel vapours generated inside the

fuel tank are absorbed and stored in

the onboard canister. When the

engine is running, the fuel vapours

absorbed in the canister are drawn

into the surge tank through the purge

control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is

controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine

coolant temperature is low during

idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-

orated fuel is not taken into the

engine. After the engine warms-up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to

the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system

which controls exhaust emissions

whilst maintaining good vehicle per-

formance.

When the engine starts or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to the

emission system.

Engine exhaust

(carbon monoxide) precautions

• Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes. If you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind in

your vehicle, drive with all the win-

dows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

Engine exhaust gases contain

carbon monoxide (CO). Though

colourless and odourless, it is

dangerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions

on this page to avoid CO poi-

soning.

WARNING

7-79

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in con-

fined or closed areas (such as

garages) any more than what is

necessary to move the vehicle in or

out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short

time with the engine running,

adjust the ventilation system (as

needed) to draw outside air into the

vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped

vehicle for any extended time with

the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to

the emission control system.

Operating precautions for cat-

alytic converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-

alytic converter emission control

device.

To prevent damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle, take

the following precautions:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

petrol engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-

tion, such as misfire or a noticeable

loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the

engine. Examples of misuse are

coasting with the hybrid system off

and descending steep grades in

gear with the hybrid system off.

• Do not operate the engine at high

idle speed for extended periods (5

minutes or more).

The exhaust system and cat-

alytic converter are very hot

during and immediately after

the engine has been running.To

avoid SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH:

• Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-

ble objects, such as grass,

vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under

your vehicle.

• Keep away from the exhaust

system and catalytic convert-

er or you may get burned.

Also, Do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust sys-

tem, do not seal the bottom of

the vehicle, and do not coat

the vehicle for corrosion con-

trol. It may present a fire risk

under certain conditions.

WARNING

• Do not modify or tamper with any

part of the engine or emission con-

trol system. All inspections and

adjustments must be made by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level.

Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging

the catalytic converter.

Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate

Filter (GPF) (if equipped)

The Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate

Filter (GPF) system removes the

soot in the exhaust gas.

The GPF system automatically burns

(or oxidises) the accumulated soot in

accordance with driving situations,

unlike a disposable air filter.

In other words, the accumulated soot

is automatically purged out by the

engine control system and by the

high exhaust-gas temperature at nor-

mal/ high driving speeds.

However, when the vehicle is contin-

ually driven at repeated short dis-

tances or driven at low speed for a

long time, the accumulated soot may

not be automatically removed

because of low exhaust gas temper-

ature. In this case, the accumulated

soot is out of the detection range, the

soot oxidization process does not

occur, and the Gasoline (Petrol)

Particulate Filter (GPF) Lamp ( )

Illuminates.

The Gasoline (Petrol) Particulate

Filter (GPF) Lamp stops illuminating,

when the driving speed exceeds 50

mph (80km/h) with engine rpm 1,500

~ 4,000 and the gear in the 3rd posi-

tion or above for approximately 30

minutes.

When the GPF Lamp continuously

blinks or the warning message

“Check exhaust system” illuminates in

the above cases, we recommend that

you have the GPF system checked by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

When the vehicle is continuously

driven with the GPF Lamp flashing

for an extended period of time, it may

damage the GPF system and lower

the fuel economy.

Lean NOx Trap (if equipped)

The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system

removes the nitrogen oxide from the

exhaust gas.A smell can occur in the

exhaust gas depending on the quali-

ty of the fuel, and it can degrade NOx

reduction performance. Please use

the regulated automotive diesel fuel.

Maintenance

7-80

Gasoline (Petrol) Fuel

(if equipped with GPF)

We recommend you to use only

the regulated petrol fuels, when

your vehicle is equipped with

the GPF system.

When you use other petrol fuels

which contain unspecified addi-

tives, they may damage the GPF

system and cause exhaust

emission problems.

CAUTION

PPRROOCCEEDDUURREE FFOORR EENNTTEERRIINNGG FFOORRCCEEDD EENNGGIINNEE AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN MMOODDEE

If the engine needs to be kept run-

ning whilst the vehicle is stopped to

inspect emission gas or perform

vehicle maintenance, follow below

procedure to enter forced engine

activation mode.

1. Place the shift lever in P (Park)

position with the vehicle stopped.

Engage the parking brake. Then,

follow the steps (1) to (5).

Information

Below steps from (1) to (5) must be

completed within 60 sec. If not, the

process is reset and you must start

again from step (1).

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. Vehicles equipped with

the smart key, press the Engine

Start/Stop button twice without

depressing the brake pedal.

(2) Place the shift lever in P (Park)

position and depress the acceler-

ator pedal twice.

(3) Place the shift lever in N (Neutral)

position and depress the acceler-

ator pedal twice.

(4) Place the shift lever in P (Park)

position and depress the acceler-

ator pedal twice.

(5) With the brake pedal depressed,

start the engine, and maintain

idling state.

Information

The engine remains in idle state and

the forced engine activation mode is

maintained even when the gear is

shifted to a different position.

2. " " indicator on the instrument

cluster blinks when the vehicle is

in forced engine activation mode.

Check the " " indicator blinking

to ensure that the forced engine

activation mode is correctly

entered.

Information

The " " indicator continues blink-

ing until the forced engine activation

mode is cancelled. When the mode is

cancelled the " " indicator will

stop blinking.

3.To cancel the forced engine acti-

vation mode, turn the vehicle off.

7-81

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Dimensions..............................................................8-2

Engine......................................................................8-2

Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3

Tyres and wheels ...................................................8-4

Tyre load and speed capacity ..............................8-5

Air conditioning system ........................................8-5

Volume and weight ................................................8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-6

Recommended engine oil (For Europe).......................8-7

Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-7

Vehicle identification number (VIN)....................8-8

Vehicle certification label.....................................8-8

Tyre specification and pressure label ................8-9

Engine number .......................................................8-9

Air conditioner compressor label ........................8-9

Declaration of conformity ..................................8-10

Fuel label...............................................................8-10

Hybrid vehicle ..................................................................8-10

Plug-in Hybrid vehicle ...................................................8-10

8-2

Specifications & Consumer information

DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS

EENNGGIINNEE

Engine Displacement cc (cu. in) Bore x Stroke mm (in.) Firing order No. of cylinders

Kappa 1.6 GDI

1580 (96.4) 72 X 97 (2.8 X 3.8) 1-3-4-2 In-line 4 cylinder

Items mm (in)

Overall length 4,470 (175.9)

Overall width 1,820 (71.6)

Overall height 1,450 (57.1)

Front tread

195/65 R15 *

1,563 (61.5)

205/55 R16 *

1,555 (61.2)

225/45 R17 *

1,549 (61.0)

Rear tread

195/65 R15 *

1,577 (62.0)

205/55 R16 *

1,569 (61.8)

225/45 R17 *

1,563 (61.5)

Wheelbase 2,700 (106.3)

: Hybrid vehicle

: Plug-in hybrid vehicle

8-3

Specifications & Consumer information

BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE

Light bulb Bulb type Wattage

Front

Type A

Headlamp

Low H7 55

High HB3 60

Position lamp W5W 5

Turn signal lamp PY21W 21

Type B

Headlamp Low/High D8S 25

Position lamp LED LED

Turn signal lamp PY21W 21

Daytime running light (DRL) LED LED

Side repeater lamp

Outside mirror LED LED

Vehicle side WY5W 5

Rear

Type A

Tail/Stop lamp P21/5W 21/5

Turn signal lamp PY21W 21

Tail lamp W5W 5

Backup lamp W16W 16

Type B

Tail/Stop lamp LED LED

Turn signal lamp PY21W 21

Tail lamp LED LED

Backup lamp W16W 16

Fog lamp LED LED

High mounted stop lamp LED LED

License plate lamp W5W 5

Interior

Map lamp

Type A W10W 10

Type B LED LED

Room lamp

Type A FESTOON 8

Type B LED LED

Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5

Luggage compartment lamp FESTOON 5

8-4

Specifications & Consumer information

TTYYRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS

Item Tyre size

Wheel

size

Inflation pressure, bar (kPa, psi)

Wheel lug nut

torque

kgf·m (lbf·ft, N•m)

Normal load *

Maximum load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tyre

195/65 R15 *

6.0J X 15

2.5 (250, 36) 2.5 (250, 36) 2.5 (250, 36) 2.5 (250, 36)

11~13

(79~94, 107~127)

205/55 R16 *

6.5J X 16

225/45 R17 *

7.0J X 17

Compact spare

tyre

(if equipped)

T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60)

When replacing tyres, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tyres of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

CAUTION

: Normal load : Up to 3 persons

: Hybrid vehicle

: Plug-in hybrid vehicle

• It is permissible to add 3 psi (20 kPa) to the standard tyre pressure specification if colder temperatures are

expected soon.Tyres typically lose 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature

variations are expected, recheck your tyre pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level.Thus, if you plan

to drive a high-altitude area, check the tyre pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level

(Air inflation per altitude: +2.4 psi/1 mile (+10 kPa/1 km).

NOTICE

8-5

Specifications & Consumer information

TTYYRREE LLOOAADD AANNDD SSPPEEEEDD CCAAPPAACCIITTYY

LI : LOAD INDEX *

SS : SPEED SYMBOL

Min : Behind rear seat to roof.

Max : Behind front seat to roof.

Item Tyre size Wheel size

Load capacity Speed capacity

LI *

kg SS *

km/h

Full size tyre

195/65 R15 6.0J X 15 91 615 H 210

205/55 R16 6.5J X 16 91 615 H 210

225/45 R17 7.0J X 17 91 615 W 270

Compact spare tyre

(if equipped)

T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 95 690 M 130

VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

Items Weight of volume Classification

Refrigerant g (oz.) 600±25 (21.16±0.88)

R-1234yf (For Europe)

R-134a (Except Europe)

Compressor lubricant g (oz.) 130±10 (4.58±0.35) POE

Contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for more details.

Gross vehicle weight kg (lbs.)

Luggage volume l (cu ft)

Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle

Min. Max. Min. Max.

1,870 (4,122) 1,970 (4,343) 563 (19.9) 1,518 (53.6) 446 (15.8) 1,401 (49.5)

8-6

Specifications & Consumer information

RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *

Recommends

(drain and refill)

3.8 l

(3.34 lmp. qts.)

5W-30

ACEA A5/B5

Dual clutch transmission fluid

1.6 ~ 1.7 l

(1.41~1.50 lmp. qts.)

SAE 70W, API GL-4

HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK)

SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL)

GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)

Engine clutch actuator fluid

100 ± 20 cc

(0.088 ± 0.018 lmp. qts.)

DOT 3

Engine coolant

6.7 l (5.90 lmp. qts.)

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminium radiator)

Inverter coolant

3.2 l (2.82 lmp. qts.)

Brake fluid

0.7~0.8 l

(0.62~0.70 lmp. qts.)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel

Hybrid vehicle

45 l (9.9 lmp. gal)

Refer to “Fuel requirements” in the Introduction chapter.

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

43 l (9.5 lmp. gal)

: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

: Engine oils labelled Energy Conserving Oil are now available.Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-

omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure

in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

8-7

Specifications & Consumer information

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain

plug, or dipstick before check-

ing or draining any lubricant.

This is especially important in

dusty or sandy areas and when

the vehicle is used on unpaved

roads. Cleaning the plug and

dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the

engine and other mechanisms

that could be damaged.

CAUTION

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold

weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity

engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,

however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication

in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended

could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be

operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended

oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Petrol Engine Oil

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

0/5W-30, 5W-40

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Recommended engine oil (For Europe)

Supplier

Product

Petrol Engine

Shell

Helix Ultra AH 5W-30

Helix Ultra A5/B5 0W-30

8-8

Specifications & Consumer information

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN)) VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN

LLAABBEELL

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in register-

ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-

ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the driver's seat. To check the

number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached

to the top of the dashboard. The

number on the plate can easily be

seen through the windscreen from

outside.

The vehicle certification label

attached on the driver’s (or front pas-

senger’s) side centre pillar gives the

vehicle identification number (VIN).

OAE086004L

OAE086004L/H

■ VIN label (if equipped)

· Type A

· Type B (if equipped)

OAE086001

■ Frame number

OAEPH087002R

8-9

Specifications & Consumer information

The tyres supplied on your new vehi-

cle are chosen to provide the best

performance for normal driving.

The tyre label located on the driver's

side centre pillar gives the tyre pres-

sures recommended for your vehicle.

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown in the

drawing.

A compressor label informs you the

type of compressor your vehicle is

equipped with such as model, suppli-

er part number, production number,

refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).

TTYYRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD

PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

OHC081001

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNEERR

CCOOMMPPRREESSSSOORR LLAABBEELL

OAEPH086001

OAE087002R

8-10

Specifications & Consumer information

The radio frequency components of

the vehicle comply with requirements

and other relevant provisions of

Directive 1995/5/EC.

Further information including the

manufacturer's declaration of con-

formity is available on HYUNDAI

web site as follows:

http://service.hyundai-motor.com

Hybrid vehicle

The fuel label is attached on the fuel

filler door.

A. Octane rating of unleaded Gasoline

(Petrol)

1) RON/ROZ : Research Octane

Number

2) (R+M)/2, AKI : Anti Knock Index

B. Identifiers for Petrol-type fuels

❈ This symbol means usable

fuel.

Do not use any other fuel.

C. For further details, refer to the “Fuel

Requirement” in the Introduction

chapter.

Plug-in Hybrid vehicle

The fuel label is attached on the fuel

filler door.

A. Octane rating of unleaded Gasoline

(Petrol)

1) RON : Research Octane Number

2) (R+M)/2 : Anti Knock Index

B. Identifiers for Petrol-type fuels

❈ This symbol means usable fuel.

Do not use any other fuel.

C. For further details, refer to the “Fuel

Requirement” in the Introduction

chapter.

D. Add fuel into the fuel tank within

20 min.

CE0678

DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF

CCOONNFFOORRMMIITTYY

■ Example

OTM048455L

OAEPH048585

FFUUEELL LLAABBEELL ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Hyundai 2019 Ioniq Plug-in Hybrid

Product's Documents

Owner's Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2019 IONIQ PLUG-IN HYBRID Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor L17040C101&L17040T101 Truck Cargo Mat & Backrest Mat TPE Custom Fit for Hyundai Palisade 2020-2024

Hyundai HYSW1500E 1500W 32cm Electric Artificial Grass Sweeper and Lawn Brush

Vevor HP121 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Kia Hyundai Santa 35320-2G720 35320-2G740

Vevor HP156 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Hyundai Accent/Sonata Tucson Veloster Kia Rio

Pyle PHYELANT16 2016 Hyundai Elantra Replacement Stereo

Hyundai HY-T26 True Wireless Earphones